0932-2 Garage - Pricing Specs 10 - 0517

PROJECT MANUAL
Starr Garage
Issued for Pricing NE Corner of Fifth and Colorado Austin, Texas 78701
Heather H. McKinney Texas Registration #9665 Not for Regulatory approval, permitting, or construction.
May 17, 2010
Owner: Starr Colorado Partners, L.P. 3809 South Second Street, Suite D-200 Austin, Texas 78704 (512) 441-1062
Architect: McKinney York Architects 1301 East Seventh Street Austin, Texas 78702 (512) 476-0201
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTIONS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES SECTION 014529 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 031100 CONCRETE FORMING SECTION 032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PAGES
4 2 2 4 3 11 8 6 13 6 11 9 7 9 5 2 3
10 4 26
14
6 11 8 10
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 071326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING SECTION 071800 - TRAFFIC COATINGS SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 077129 - MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 088000 - GLAZING SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 111200 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE 11 4 5 2 7 8 11 13 6 10 14 9 7 8 10 7 4 7 12 11 14 6 7 6 9 8 5
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15015 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK SECTION 15020 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 15060 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS SECTION 15100 VALVES SECTION 15120 PIPING ACCESSORIES SECTION 15140 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS SECTION 15150 METERS AND GAGES SECTION 15160 PUMPS SECTION 15245 VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 15150 SYSTEM INSULATION SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 15430 FLOOR AND ROOF DRAINS SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM SECTION 15450 ELECTRICAL HEATING CABLE SECTION 15850 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS SECTION 15855 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS SECTION 15860 FANS, OA INTAKES, AND RELIEF AIR VENTS SECTION 15885 FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15930 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES SECTION 15985 HVAC CONTROL SEQUENCES SECTION 15990 HVAC OPERATIONAL TEST-ADJUST-BALANCE DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 SECTION 16110 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 7 SECTION 16115 ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS 2 SECTION 16120 - CABLE, WIRE, AND CONNECTORS 4 SECTION 16125 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 3 SECTION 16130 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 5 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 4 SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 2 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 4 SECTION 16440 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES 3 SECTION 16450 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING 4 SECTION 16460 TRANSFORMERS 5 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES 3 SECTION 16475 FUSES 2 SECTION 16485 MOTOR STARTERS 4 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS 5 SECTION 16620 STANDBY GENERATOR SETS 7 SECTION 16625 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 8 SECTION 16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 3 SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 11 SECTION 16745 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 2 SECTION 16910 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND CONTROL WIRING 4 17 3 4 15 4 3 4 2 5 4 6 7 2 2 2 2 8 5 2 8 5 3 4 4 13
SECTION 16920 HVAC CONTROL WIRING DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION Refer Division 15 Mechanical and Plumbing DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Refer Division 15 Mechanical and Plumbing DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) Refer Division 15 Mechanical and Plumbing DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Refer Division 16 Electrical DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Refer Division 16 Electrical DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Refer Division 16 Electrical DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK SECTION 316329 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOT APPLICABLE
14
SUMMARY
011000 - 1
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. Project information. Work covered by Contract Documents. Phased construction. Work by Owner. Work under separate contracts. Future work. Access to site. Work restrictions. Specification and drawing conventions. Miscellaneous provisions.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 A.
PROJECT INFORMATION Project Identification: Starr Garage: 0932-2. 1. Project Location: South East Corner of Sixth and Congress, Austin Texas).
B.
Owner: Starr Colorado Partners. 1. Owner's Representative: Bill Ball - bill@kemp.net.
C. D.
Architect: McKinney York Architects; Will Wood - wwood@mckinneyyork.com. Other Owner Consultants: The Owner has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
McKinney York Architects 0932-2
Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10
SUMMARY
011000 - 2
1.
Structural Engineering: CBM Engineers; Dr. T.M. Sheikh, sheikh@cbmengineers.com. Structural Engineer has prepared the following portions of the Contract Documents: a. Structural Construction Documents.
2.
Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing (MEP) Engineer: MEJ Associates; Walt Richardson; waltr@mejassociates.com. MEP Engineer has prepared the following portions of the Contract Documents: a. MEP Construction Documents.
3.
Parking Planning Consultant: HWA PARKING | Strickland Jamail; Troy Jamail; Troy.Jamail@hwaPARKING.com. Parking Planning Consultant has prepared the following portions of the Contract Documents: a. Parking Control Equipment Specifications.
4.
Civil Engineer: Bury Partners; Joe Isaja; jisaja@burypartners.com. Civil Engineer has prepared the following portions of the Contract Documents: a. Civil Construction Documents.
5.
Landscape Architect: Land Design Partners; Zach Hunter; zhunter@landdesignpartners.com. Landscape Architect has prepared the following portions of the Contract Documents: a. Landscape and Irrigation Construction Documents.
6.
Geotechnical Engineer: Terracon; James Bierschwale; jgbierschwale@terracon.com. Geotechnical Engineer has prepared the following portions of the Contract Documents: a. Geotechnical Report.
E.
Construction Manager: Bob Albanese - bob@benchmarktx.net. 1. Construction Manager has been engaged for this Project to serve as an advisor to Owner and to provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction between Owner and each Contractor, according to a separate contract between Owner and Construction Manager.
1.4 A.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. New Cast-in-place Concrete multi-level parking structure, miscellaneous renovations to Owner's existing building(s).
SUMMARY
011000 - 3
1.5 A.
WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. Preceding Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1. Selective Demolition: Demolition of spiral ramp structure located on site of this new parking structure. .
B.
C.
Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Starr Building Renovations Phase II and Starr Building Renovations Phase III.: Renovations to Owner's existing adjacent Building(s). .
1.6 A.
FUTURE WORK The Contract Documents include requirements that will allow Owner to carry out future work following completion of this Project. ACCESS TO SITE General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS Partial Occupancy by Owner's Tenant: Owner's Tenant will occupy portions of Level 1 and all of Level 2 of the Starr Building during portions of the construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect
1.7 A.
1.8 A.
2.
SUMMARY
011000 - 4
Owner's Tenant's operations. 1.9 A. SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
2. B. C.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. 2. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. Where definitions of abbreviations are not included in documents, definition shall be as interpreted by the Architect. Contractor shall submit requests for interpretation to Architect not later than 7 days prior to submitting a bid or proposal for the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000
UNIT PRICES
012200 - 1
SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.
1.2 A. B.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. PROCEDURES Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
1.4 A. B.
C.
D.
UNIT PRICES
012200 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES Unit Price 1: Drilled Piers. 1. Description: Drilled piers including labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill and other items for complete drilled-pier installation. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot for piers longer or shorter than base lengths. Provide separate unit price for each pier diameter to be utilized on the project for drilling in the following geological formations. a. b. 4. Austin Grp. Limestone. Eagle Ford Shale.
2. 3.
Alternate Foundation Design Unit Prices: Provide Alternate Unit Prices corresponding to those required for base foundation design to use if Alternate foundation design is selected by Owner.
ALTERNATES
012300 - 1
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. DEFINITIONS Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. 2. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.2 A. 1.3 A.
1.4 A.
PROCEDURES Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
C.
ALTERNATES
012300 - 2
D.
Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES Alternate No. 1: Drilled Pier Foundations. 1. Base Bid: Drilled Piers to the scheduled Base Bid depth below the top of the Austin Limestone Grp. as indicated on Sheet GS1.05, Drilled Pier Details and as specified in Division 31 Section "Drilled Piers". Alternate: Drilled Piers to the Alternate #1 depth below the top of the Austin Limestone Grp. as indicated for on Sheet GS1.05, Drilled Pier Details and as specified in Division 31 Section "Drilled Piers."
2.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 1
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions.
1.2 A. B.
2.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
2.
1.4 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. 2. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:
012500 - 2
a. b.
c.
d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
k. l.
m.
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
012500 - 3
b.
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.5 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. PROCEDURES Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.
1.6 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
012500 - 4
B.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600 - 1
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
1.2 A. B.
1.3 A.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." PROPOSAL REQUESTS Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Construction Manager will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Construction Manager are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 5 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and
1.4 A.
2.
012600 - 2
b. c. d.
e. B.
unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Construction Manager. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."
2.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
1.5 A.
ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS Unit-Price Adjustment: See Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.
012600 - 3
1.6 A.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE Construction Change Directive: Construction Manager may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
1.7 A.
B.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 1
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.2 A.
B.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.
B.
C.
013300 - 2
D.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. ACTION SUBMITTALS Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. 2. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. 4. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.
1.4 A.
3.
Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Scheduled date for first submittal. Specification Section number and title. Submittal category: Action; informational. Name of subcontractor. Description of the Work covered. Scheduled date for Architect's and Construction Manager's final release or approval. Scheduled date of fabrication. Scheduled dates for purchasing. Scheduled dates for installation. Activity or event number.
1.5 A.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the
013300 - 3
Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2007 for PC. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. . The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) 2) B. Floor plans. Reflected ceiling plans.
b. c. d. e.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
3.
4.
C.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Construction Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Construction Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's
2. 3. 4.
013300 - 4
consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. a. D. Divisions 03, 05, and 13-33 Sections.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
2.
3.
4.
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. Project name. Date. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. Category and type of submittal. Submittal purpose and description. Specification Section number and title. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. Related physical samples submitted directly. Indication of full or partial submittal. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. Other necessary identification. Remarks.
E. F.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect and Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same
013300 - 5
identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. 2. 3. H. Note date and content of previous submittal. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp.
I.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.
2.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.
3.
Deviations from Contract Documents: Provide a typed itemized list of each deviation from the contract documents with each submittal. For each deviation listed, provide exact references to all locations in the specifications and drawings from which the item deviates. Provide an explanation for each deviation. Within each submittal, clearly and boldly highlight each instance of a deviation from the contract documents.
013300 - 6
a. b.
Only deviations so noted shall be reviewed by the Architect and Construction Manager. Only deviations noted as indicated above and then expressly accepted as an Acceptable Deviation on the Architects submittal review shall be accepted. All other deviations included in submittals are rejected without review or comment. This rejection supersedes all comments, notations, review stamps, or other indication to the contrary including an indication that a submittal has been 'Reviewed', 'Approved', 'Accepted', or authorized to proceed with provisions such as "Make Corrections Noted". Unless expressly indicated in the Architects submittal review as an Acceptable Deviation the submitting entity is and shall remain fully responsible for compliance with the Contract Documents and shall remove any work that deviates from the Contract Documents whenever deviant work is discovered and make all corrections necessary to bring the work into full compliance with the contract documents at the submitters sole expense without cost to the Owner, Architect, or Construction Manager and without delay to the project schedule. .
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 4. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Manufacturer's product specifications. Standard color charts. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. Testing by recognized testing agency. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Notation of coordination requirements. Availability and delivery time information.
2. 3.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. b. c. d. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. 6.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. Submit Product Data in the following format:
013300 - 7
a. C.
PDF electronic file.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. Identification of products. Schedules. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
3.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file.
D.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. 2. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. b. c. d. e. 3. Generic description of Sample. Product name and name of manufacturer. Sample source. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
4.
For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
013300 - 8
a. 5.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options selected.
6.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
2)
E. F. G.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
H.
013300 - 9
I.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Name of evaluation organization. Date of evaluation. Time period when report is in effect. Product and manufacturers' names. Description of product. Test procedures and results. Limitations of use.
J.
K. L. M.
N.
O.
P.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract
Q.
R.
013300 - 10
Documents. S. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. B. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
2.2 A.
Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and Construction Manager. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. C.
013300 - 11
3.2 A.
ARCHITECT'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION Action Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect and Construction Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. 1. .
B.
Informational Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect and Construction Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect and Construction Manager. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.
C.
D. E.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 1
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
1.2 A. B.
2.
3.
C.
Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products
B.
014000 - 2
incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager. C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
D.
E. F. G. H.
I.
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may
1.4 A.
B.
014000 - 3
exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 A. REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. B. Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service
014000 - 4
2. 3. 4. 5. D.
representative making report. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. QUALITY ASSURANCE General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.
1.6 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
014000 - 5
G.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. 2. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. QUALITY CONTROL Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. 3. 4. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
I.
1.7 A.
2.
5. 6. B.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized

014000 - 6
service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." C. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
D.
E.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. F.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Access to the Work. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
014000 - 7
G.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.8 A.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections[ and in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section], and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. TEST AND INSPECTION LOG Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Date test or inspection was conducted. Description of the Work tested or inspected. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
014000 - 8
B.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. REPAIR AND PROTECTION General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."
3.2 A.
B. C.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
REFERENCES
014200 - 1
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.2 A. B.
C.
D.
E.
F. G.
H. I.
REFERENCES
014200 - 2
1.3 A.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
B. C.
1.4 A.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."
B.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
ICC
ICC-ES
(800) 423-6587
www.icc-es.org UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)

C.
(562) 699-0543
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized
REFERENCES
014200 - 3
name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE
Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011
www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772

a. (301) 504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov Federal Aviation Administration
EPA
FAA
(866) 835-5322
www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration
(888) 225-5322
(888) 463-6332
www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development
(202) 708-1112
LBL
www.hud.gov Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000
www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
(800) 321-6742
REFERENCES
014200 - 4
b.
(202) 693-1999
PBS
Public Buildings Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science
(202) 690-7694
www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov Transportation Research Board
TRB
(202) 334-2934
http://gulliver.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com
D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
(800) 872-2253
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office
(202) 512-1800
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus
(215)
REFERENCES
014200 - 5
FED-STD FS
(See FS) Federal Standard (See FS) Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800
www.wbdg.org/ccb FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (800) 952-5210 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 574-2041 (916) 323-6815
www.calregs.com CPUC California Public Utilities Commission www.cpuc.ca.gov

(415) 703-2782
REFERENCES
014200 - 6
TFS
Texas Forest Service (979) 458-6650 Forest Resource Development http://txforestservice.tamu.edu

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 1
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. Related Requirements: 1. 2. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
1.2 A.
B.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
2.
3.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific

016000 - 2
manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 A. ACTION SUBMITTALS Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. 2. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. b. B. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.5 A.
2.
016000 - 3
1.6 A.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Handling: 1. 2. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
B.
3.
4.
C.
Storage: 1. 2. 3. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
4. 5. 6. 7.
1.7 A.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents
2.
016000 - 4
to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. 2. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
3. C.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
016000 - 5
2.
3.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
b.
4.
Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
b.
5.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
C.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
D.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a
016000 - 6
product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 A. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. Samples, if requested.
2.
3. 4.
5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

EXECUTION
017300 - 1
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. Field engineering and surveying. Installation of the Work. Cutting and patching. Coordination of Owner-installed products. Progress cleaning. Starting and adjusting. Protection of installed construction. Correction of the Work.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.
4. 5.
1.3 A. B.
DEFINITIONS Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.
EXECUTION
017300 - 2
1.4 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. QUALITY ASSURANCE Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 3. Primary operational systems and equipment. Fire separation assemblies. Air or smoke barriers. Fire-suppression systems. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. Control systems. Communication systems. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. Conveying systems. Electrical wiring systems. Operating systems of special construction.
1.5 A.
2.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. Membranes and flashings. Exterior curtain-wall construction. Sprayed fire-resistive material. Equipment supports. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
4.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.
2.
EXECUTION
017300 - 4
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. 2. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
C.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Description of the Work. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. Recommended corrections.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. PREPARATION Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
3.2 A.
B.
C. D.
EXECUTION
017300 - 5
3.3 A.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. Establish limits on use of Project site. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager. FIELD ENGINEERING Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect or Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report
D.
E.
3.4 A.
EXECUTION
017300 - 6
2. B.
the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect and Construction Manager before proceeding. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. 2. 3. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.
C.
Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
2.
3.5 A.
INSTALLATION General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces.
B. C.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until
EXECUTION
017300 - 7
Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. 2. 3. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
E. F. G.
H.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. CUTTING AND PATCHING Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
J.
3.6 A.
EXECUTION
017300 - 8
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary." Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. D.
E.
F.
G.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. H.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
EXECUTION
017300 - 9
2.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. b. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. 5.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
I.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.7 A. B.
2.
EXECUTION
017300 - 10
3.8 A.
PROGRESS CLEANING General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. 2. 3. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. 4. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.
B. C.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. 2. Remove liquid spills promptly. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
E. F.
G.
H.
EXECUTION
017300 - 11
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. STARTING AND ADJUSTING Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements." Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
J.
3.9 A. B. C. D.
E.
3.10 A. B.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 1
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. 2. 3. B. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of hazardous waste. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
2.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.
B. C.
D. E.
017419 - 2
F.
Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following: 1. Demolition Waste: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. 2. Concrete. Concrete reinforcing steel. Brick. Structural and miscellaneous steel. Glazing. Metal studs. Gypsum board. Equipment. Piping. Supports and hangers. Mechanical equipment. Refrigerants. Electrical conduit. Copper wiring. Lighting fixtures. Switchgear and panelboards. Transformers.
1.4 A.
Construction Waste: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Masonry and CMU. Lumber. Wood sheet materials. Wood trim. Metals. Roofing. Insulation. Carpet and pad. Gypsum board. Piping. Electrical conduit. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the
017419 - 3
following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 1.5 A. Paper. Cardboard. Boxes. Plastic sheet and film. Polystyrene packaging. Wood crates. Plastic pails.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Award. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for demolition waste. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Material category. Generation point of waste. Total quantity of waste in tons. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
1.6 A.
B.
Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of
C.
D. E.
F.
017419 - 4
waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. G. Austin Energy Green Building Submittal: Form acceptable to Austin Energy, signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. QUALITY ASSURANCE Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form CWM-2 for demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste and Form CWM-4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone
H.
1.7 A. B.
1.8 A.
B.
C.
2.
017419 - 5
3.
4.
5.
6.
numbers. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.
D.
Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste and Form CWM-6 for demolition waste. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Total quantity of waste. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). Revenue from salvaged materials. Revenue from recycled materials. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. PLAN IMPLEMENTATION General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
017419 - 6
B.
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 1. 2. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
C.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
2.
3.2 A.
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows: 1. 2. Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. Store items in a secure area until installation. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.
3. 4. 5.
B. C.
Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows: 1. 2. Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3. 4. 5.
017419 - 7
D. E. F. G. H.
Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. 2. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.
3.3 A. B. C.
D.
3. 4. 5.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.
017419 - 8
3.4 A.
RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 1. 2. Pulverize concrete to maximum [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase.
B.
Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
C.
Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. 2. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
D.
E.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. Carpet: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 1. Store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.
F. G.
H.
Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle
I. 3.5 A.
017419 - 9
2. 3.
4. B.
and store in a dry location. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
Wood Materials: 1. 2. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
C.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. DISPOSAL OF WASTE General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3.6 A.
B. C.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Substantial Completion procedures. Final completion procedures. Warranties. Final cleaning. Repair of the Work.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 A.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
B.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
7. C.
access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Submit test/adjust/balance records. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. D.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. 2. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.4 A.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
2. B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.5 A.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. 2. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name.
3.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
b. c. d. e. 4.
Date. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. Name of Contractor. Page number.
Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file.
1.6 A.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
B.
C.
2.
3. 4.
D.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. FINAL CLEANING General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,
B.
b. c. d. e. f.
g.
h. i.
j.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 6
k. l.
m. n. o.
p. q. C.
vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove labels that are not permanent. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." REPAIR OF THE WORK Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. 2. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.
3.2 A. B.
3. 4.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 1
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. Product maintenance manuals. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.
3.
1.3 A. B. 1.4 A.
DEFINITIONS System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
017823 - 2
1. 2. B.
Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.
Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
b. C.
Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. List of documents. List of systems. List of equipment. Table of contents.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in
C.
017823 - 3
separate list. D. E. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. 2. 3. B. Title page. Table of contents. Manual contents.
Title Page: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Subject matter included in manual. Name and address of Project. Name and address of Owner. Date of submittal. Name and contact information for Contractor. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
D.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble
017823 - 4
instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
2.
F.
Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, post-type binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
b.
2.
3.
4. 5.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
017823 - 5
a. b.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
2.3 A.
OPERATION MANUALS Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. Operating standards. Operating procedures. Operating logs. Wiring diagrams. Control diagrams. Piped system diagrams. Precautions against improper use. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. Manufacturer's name. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves. Engineering data and tests. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Startup procedures. Equipment or system break-in procedures. Routine and normal operating instructions. Regulation and control procedures. Instructions on stopping. Normal shutdown instructions. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
017823 - 6
8. 9. D. E.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Product name and model number. Manufacturer's name. Color, pattern, and texture. Material and chemical composition. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
2.4 A.
B.
C.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. Repair instructions.
E. F.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
017823 - 7
2.5 A.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
B.
C.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Test and inspection instructions. Troubleshooting guide. Precautions against improper maintenance. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. 2. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and
017823 - 8
related services. G. H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. MANUAL PREPARATION Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
B.
2. C.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.
D.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and
017823 - 9
2. E.
maintenance manuals. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."
Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 1
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Record Drawings. Record Specifications. Record Product Data. Miscellaneous record submittals.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 01 Section "Execution" for final property survey. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.
1.3 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.
B. C.
Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
017839 - 2
D.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. RECORD DRAWINGS Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. b. c. d. e. 2. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. Dimensional changes to Drawings. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. Depths of foundations below first floor. Locations and depths of underground utilities. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. Revisions to electrical circuitry. Actual equipment locations. Duct size and routing. Locations of concealed internal utilities. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. Changes made following Architect's written orders. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and

017839 - 3
4.
5. 6. B.
accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. Identification: As follows: a. b. c. d. e. Project name. Date. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." Name of Architect and Construction Manager. Name of Contractor.
2. 3.
2.2 A.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. 2. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
3. 4.
5. B.
Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.
017839 - 4
2.3 A.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. 2. 3. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.
B.
Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
2.4 A.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal
B.
017839 - 5
working hours.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
017900 - 1
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. B. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. COORDINATION Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
1.4 A.
B. C.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
017900 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. INSTRUCTION PROGRAM Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. PREPARATION Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data." INSTRUCTION Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. B. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
3.2 A.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, through Construction Manager, with at least seven days' advance notice.
C.
Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of an oral performance-based test. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.
D. E.
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
019113 - 1
SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only. SUMMARY Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components. Related Sections: 1. 2. Division 23 Section "Commissioning of HVAC" for commissioning process activities for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. Division 25 Section "Commissioning of Integrated Automation" for commissioning process activities for integrated automation systems, assemblies, equipment, and components.
B. 1.2 A. B.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. CxA: Commissioning Authority. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are
B.
C. D.
E.
019113 - 2
used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components. 1.4 A. COMMISSIONING TEAM Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA. Members Appointed by Owner: 1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage the Can under a separate contract. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel. Architect and engineering design professionals.
B.
2. 3. 1.5 A. B. C.
OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES Provide the OPR documentation to the Can and Contractor for information and use. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team activities. Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the Can and Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and maintenance training plan. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action. Cooperate with the Can for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a variable basis.
1.6 A.
2. 3.
019113 - 3
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1.7 A. B. C. D. E.
Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the Can. Complete paper and/or construction checklists as Work is completed and provide to the Commissioning Authority on a weekly basis. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the Commissioning Authority. Complete commissioning process test procedures.
CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES Organize and lead the commissioning team. Provide commissioning plan. Convene commissioning team meetings. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to, equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests, and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the requirement, the Can will report the failure in the Issues Log. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component startup. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual and commissioning process report.
F. G. H. I.

UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 1
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Concrete masonry units. Mortar and grout. Steel reinforcing bars. Masonry joint reinforcement. Ties and anchors. Embedded flashing. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for dovetail slots for masonry anchors. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels for unit masonry. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. Division 32 Section "Unit Paving" for exterior unit masonry paving.
4. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B.
DEFINITIONS CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 2
1.5 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. PROJECT CONDITIONS Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. 2. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.
B.
C.
1.6 A.
B. C. D.
E.
1.7 A.
B.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 3
loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.
E.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement
B.
2.2 A.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 4
2. B.
joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Density Classification: Lightweight except use Normal weight for walls surrounding conditioned spaces. a. Conditioned spaces include: 1) 2) 3) 4) 2. 3. 4. Mechanical and Electrical rooms Guard room and Toilet room Elevator Machine room Tenant
Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. Grade N Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
C.
Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55. 1. 2. Density Classification: Lightweight. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 3-5/8 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.
2.3 A. B.
CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS General: Provide one of the following: Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than CMUs. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and with reinforcing bars indicated. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
C.
D.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 5
2.4 A.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. 2. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
B. C. D.
E. F. 2.5 A. B.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. Water: Potable. REINFORCEMENT Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Walls: Stainless steel. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
C.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. TIES AND ANCHORS Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.
2.6 A.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 6
3. 4. 5. B.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, stainless-steel wire.
2. C.
Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M or Epoxy coating 0.020 inch thick.
2.7 A.
MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. Postinstalled Anchors: 1. chemical anchors.
B.
2.
Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
2.8 A.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers that prevent UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed to be built into mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 7
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Blok-Flash.
B.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or urethane selected for compatibility with sealants and other materials with which it may be placed in contact. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets for use in Control Joints within Non-Fire-Resistance rated CMU walls: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity. Use only for weeps.
2.9 A.
B.
C. D.
E.
Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
2.10 A.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 8
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. 2. 3. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
D.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. Provide grout with a slump of [8 to 11 inches] [10 to 11 inches] as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
2.
3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. 2. 3. B. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other
3.2 A.
B.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 9
Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. TOLERANCES Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. 2. 3. B. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
D.
E.
3.3 A.
Lines and Levels: 1. 2. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.
3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
C.
Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 10
2. 3. 4.
5.
minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
3.4 A.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of
B.
C.
D.
E. F. G.
H. I.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 11
2.
structure above. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
3.5 A.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. 2. 3. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls, vertically cantilevered walls, and parapet walls. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
C. D.
3.6 A.
B. C. D.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units or rigid anchors. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 12
corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 A. ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.
2. 3.
3.8 A.
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. 2. Control Joints in Non-Fire-Resistance Rated CMU walls: Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. Control Joints in Fire-Resistance Rated CMU walls: As indicated.
B.
3.9 A.
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. Place single-wythe CMU flashing system so that it weeps to the interior of the garage structure. 1. Locations: Install single-wythe CMU flashing system at the bottom of CMU perimeter exterior walls that are bearing on suspended concrete floor structures or on lintels and that are indicated to receive cement plaster finish.
B.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 13
C. D.
Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. Place pea gravel in cell cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches, to maintain drainage. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.
3.10 A.
2.
B. C.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches .
2. 3.11 A.
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. 2. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or
B. C.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 14
3. 4.
polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.12 A.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. 2. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
B.
3. C.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000 - 1
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. B. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
B.
C.
1.4 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
054000 - 2
B.
Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. 2. B. Grade: ST33H unless otherwise indicated. Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30.
Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. 2. Grade: 50, Class 1 or 2. Coating: G90.
2.2 A.
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated but not less than 0.0428 inch. Flange Width: As indicated but not less than 1-5/8 inches.
B.
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.
C.
Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure. FRAMING ACCESSORIES Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight
D.
2.3 A.
054000 - 3
used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 2.4 A. B. Supplementary framing. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. Web stiffeners. Anchor clips. End clips. Foundation clips. Gusset plates. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. Hole reinforcing plates. Backer plates.
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
C.
2.5 A. B.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. FABRICATION Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
2.6 A.
054000 - 4
1. 2. 3.
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
4. B.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.
C.
2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it
3.3 A.
054000 - 5
may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.
C.
D.
Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E. F.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
G. H. I.
054000 - 6
3.4 A. B.
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated but not less than 16 inches.
C. D.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E.
Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. F.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. REPAIRS AND PROTECTION Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.5 A.
B.
END OF SECTION 054000 Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10 McKinney York Architects 0932-2
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. B. Steel framing and supports for countertops. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. Elevator machine beams, hoist beams, and divider beams. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. Steel girders for supporting wood frame construction. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction. Metal light bollards. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards and steel edgings. Metal bollards. Pipe and Downspout guards. Abrasive metal nosings.
1.2 A.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. 2. 3. Loose steel lintels. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.
C.
Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing." Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."
2. 3. 4.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
5. 6. 7. 1.3 A.
Division 05 Section "Metal Gratings." Division 12 Section "Site Furnishings" for bicycle racks. Division 32 Section "Plants" for tree grates.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. Metal nosings and treads. Paint products. Grout.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. 1.5 A.
Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
1.6 A.
1.7 A.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. METALS, GENERAL Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. FERROUS METALS Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. 2. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches unless otherwise indicated. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0966-inch minimum thickness; hot-dip galvanized after fabrication .
2.2 A. B. C. D.
E.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. FASTENERS General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed
2.3 A.
B. C.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. Post-Installed Anchors: 1. chemical anchors.
L.
M.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
N.
Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
2.4 A. B.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 5
C. D. E.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. FABRICATION, GENERAL Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and, where exposed to view, contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F.
2.5 A.
B.
C. D. E.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish
G. H.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 6
hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 A. B.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. 2. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. D.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports unless otherwise indicated. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. METAL LADDERS General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 A.
B.
Steel Ladders: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. Siderails: Continuous, 3 x 1 1/2 x 3/16 inch steel tube. Rungs: 1-inch- diameter steel bars. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Provide Hinged security cover at ladder.
6. 7.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 7
a. b. c.
d. 8.
Provide not less than three Heavy duty hinges. Provide hasp for padlock. Fabricate frame for security cover from steel angels or tubes of sufficient strength so that they cannot be bent to gain access to the ladder. Infill security cover frame with expanded steel mesh welded to frame.
Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets, security covers, hardware, and fasteners.
2.8 A.
METAL LIGHT BOLLARDS Fabricate metal light bollards from steel shapes, plates, and bars of size and to dimensions indicated, bent as indicated and fully welded together, unless otherwise indicated. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints. Where removable cover plates are indicated, provide with countersunk drilled holes to receive fastener so that fasteners are flush with cover plate when installed. . Galvanize metal light bollards. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.
B. C.
2.9 A.
B.
C.
Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim unless otherwise indicated. Prime steel trim with zinc rich primer where not galvanized. METAL BOLLARDS Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe unless otherwise indicated . 1. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary cutouts for controls and holes for wire.
2.10 A.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 8
2. B.
Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire.
Fabricate bollards located on exiting concrete slabs with 3/8-inch- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards.
C.
For bollards to be set in sleeves located in new concrete construction, fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. Bumper Post Sleeves: 1. Dome top, low-density polyethylene thermoplastic sleeve. a. UV resistant and antistatic type. 2. Nominal thickness 0.250 inch. 3. Diameter: To fit bollard sizes indicated 4. Height: To fit bollard sizes indicated 5. Color: Custom colors selected by Architect from full range of Pantone colors. 6. Surface of sleeve: Smooth with round top, no ribbed or two piece systems accepted. 7. Adhesive Tape: Manufacturer's standard neoprene adhesive tape. PIPE AND DOWNSPOUT GUARDS Fabricate pipe and downspout guards from 3/8-inch- thick by 12-inchwide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts. Galvanize pipe and downspout guards. ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches wide with 1 inch lip, for casting into concrete steps.
D. E.
2.11 A.
B. 2.12 A.
B.
Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to

METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 9
units, as standard with manufacturer. C. 2.13 A. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units. LOOSE STEEL LINTELS Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. FINISHES, GENERAL Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. B. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
B. C. 2.14 A.
2.15 A. B. C.
2.16 A.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 10
1.
Shop prime with primers specified in Division 09 painting Sections unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
B.
C.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. INSTALLING METAL LIGHT BOLLARDS Anchor metal light bollards to concrete slabs with chemical anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.
E.
3.2 A.
3.3 A.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 11
B.
Fasten removable cover plates to light bollard with flush, tamper resistant fasteners.. INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS Anchor bollards to existing construction with chemical anchors . Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete or at contractors option, in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. Install bumper post sleeves with adhesive tape. INSTALLING PIPE AND DOWNSPOUT GUARDS Provide pipe and downspout guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches above driving surface. INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
3.4 A. B.
C. D. 3.5 A.
3.6 A. B.
3.7 A.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000 Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10 McKinney York Architects 0932-2
METAL STAIRS
055100 - 1
SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. B. Industrial-type stairs with steel floor plate treads. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings not installed in metal stairs. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.
1.3 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.
B.
Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding
METAL STAIRS
055100 - 2
the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Guards: a. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction at the top and to transfer this load through the supports to the structure. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction at any point along the top. 1) Handrails and Guards shall have attachment devices and supporting structure to transfer this loading to appropriate structural elements of the building.
c. 2.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards, components other than Top Guardrail and handrails: : a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.0.093 sq. m.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 1. Metal floor plate treads.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 A. B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

METAL STAIRS
055100 - 3
1. 2. 1.6 A.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
COORDINATION Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2. 3.
4.
2.2 A.
METALS, GENERAL Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. FERROUS METALS Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel
2.3 A. B.
METAL STAIRS
055100 - 4
drawn). C. D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel by a proprietary process. Iron Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 2.4 A. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
E.
FASTENERS General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. FABRICATION, GENERAL Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. 2. 3. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.
2.5 A. B. C.
2.6 A.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
METAL STAIRS
055100 - 5
C. D. E.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels. a. 2. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
G.
2.7 A.
3.
Construct platforms of steel plate, channel or tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.
B.
Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from abrasive-surface floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 3/16 inch. 1. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers from steel sheet not less than 0.0966 inch thick, welded to tread nosings and stiffeners and to platforms. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener, and with open risers. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets.
2. 3.
METAL STAIRS
055100 - 6
4.
Fabricate platforms with integral nosings matching treads and weld to platform framing.
2.8 A.
STEEL TUBE RAILINGS General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Configuration: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top, bottom, and intermediate rails and 1-1/2-inch- square posts. Space intermediate rails less than 21 inches clear.
B.
Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
C.
D.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. 2. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous-metal components.
E. F.
2.9 A. B. C.
FINISHES Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:
METAL STAIRS
055100 - 7
1. 2. 3.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
B.
C. D.
E.
3.2 A.
INSTALLING STEEL TUBE RAILINGS Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
METAL STAIRS
055100 - 8
3.3 A.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 1
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Steel pipe tube railings. Screen wall railings.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.
1.3 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
B.
C.
Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. b. c. 2. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards:
055213 - 2
a. b. D.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
E.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings,
1.4 A. B.
1.5 A. B.
1.6 A.
1.7 A.
B.
055213 - 3
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. METALS, GENERAL Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. STEEL AND IRON Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. C. D. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
B.
2.2 A. B.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, rectangular pattern, 3/8-inch by 3 inch woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510. 1. For panels at Stair 1 and Stair 3: Intermediate-crimp square pattern, 2 inch by 2 inch woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135 inch nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A510.
2.3 A.
FASTENERS General: Provide the following: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM
055213 - 4
F 2329 for zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
C.
2. D.
Post-Installed Anchors: chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
2.
2.4 A. B. C. D. E. F.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.
G.
055213 - 5
1.
Water-Resistant Product: provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.5 A.
FABRICATION General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
B.
C.
D. E. F. G. H.
I.
Form changes in direction as follows: 1. Flush mitered unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
055213 - 6
components. K. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
M.
N.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. For railing posts set in sleeves in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames from same metal as railings in which they are installed. 1. Orient wire mesh with wires perpendicular and parallel to top rail and with the long side of rectangular openings parallel to top rail.
O.
P.
2.6 A.
STEEL TUBE RAILINGS FOR STAIR 1 AND STAIR 3 General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. Finish: Galvanized. Configuration: 1. One of the following configurations: a. 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter or 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and bottom rails, 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square posts, and 1/2-inch(13-mm-) square pickets spaced less than 4 inches (100 mm) clear.
B. C.
055213 - 7
b.
1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and bottom rails and posts with infill panels made from woven wire mesh crimped into 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) steel channel frames. 1) Orient wire mesh with wires perpendicular and parallel to top rail.
D.
Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
E.
F.
|Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. Provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous-metal components
G.
H.
2.7 A. B. C.
FINISHES, GENERAL Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.
D.
055213 - 8
E. 2.8 A.
Unless otherwise indicated, hot-dip galvanize all railings. STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanized Railings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion to items indicate to receive paint. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B. C.
For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: Where a painted finish is indicated over galvanized steel, after galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. Primer Application: For items indicated to be painted, apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
D.
2.9
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations
2. 3.
055213 - 9
from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. Use slotted connections where indicated to accommodate thermal expansion of railing and live load deflection. RAILING CONNECTIONS Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. ANCHORING POSTS At contractors option, anchor posts in one the following methods. 1. 2. Anchor baseplates and clip angles to concrete using post installed chemical anchors. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. For posts set in concrete, Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post.
D. E.
3.2 A.
3.3 A.
3.
4.
3.4 A.
ATTACHING RAILINGS Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface with the greatest projection. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
055213 - 10
2. B.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. 2. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3.5 A.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. PROTECTION Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 A.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053 - 1
SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.3 A. B. Wood blocking and nailers. Wood grounds].
1.2 A.
DEFINITIONS Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
1.4 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to
061053 - 2
inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. 2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3. B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2[ for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground]. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
2.2 A.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not pressure treat temporary grounds used in application of portland cement plaster.
C. D.
2.3 A.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Blocking. Nailers. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Grounds.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and the following species:
061053 - 3
1. 2.4 A.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
FASTENERS General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. C. D. E. F. G. H.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
2.5 A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
061053 - 4
and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. C. D. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
E.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. 2. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
F.
G.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
H.
Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of
3.2 A.
061053 - 5
attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. C. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. PROTECTION Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
3.3 A.
B.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
071326 - 1
SECTION 071326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. B. Adhesive-coated HDPE sheet waterproofing. Molded-sheet drainage panels.
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. Qualification Data: For Installer. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course, and molded-sheet drainage panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. C. D. 1.4 A. B.
071326 - 2
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B.
C. D. E. 1.6 A.
B.
Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials. WARRANTY Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch in width. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 A.
2. B.
Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years.
071326 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. ADHESIVE-COATED HDPE SHEET WATERPROOFING Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. C. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Preprufe 160R and 300R.
Adhesive-Coated HDPE Sheet for Vertical Applications: 32-milthick, uniform, flexible sheets consisting of 16-milthick, HDPE sheet coated with a pressure-sensitive rubber adhesive, a protective adhesive coating, and a release liner with the following physical properties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum; ASTM D 412. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 903, modified. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 1876, modified. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified. Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent; ASTM D 570.
D.
Adhesive-Coated HDPE Sheet for Horizontal Applications: 46-milthick, uniform, flexible sheets consisting of 30-milthick, HDPE sheet coated with a pressure-sensitive rubber adhesive, a protective adhesive coating, a detackifying surface treatment, an uncoated self-adhering side lap strip, and a release liner with the following physical properties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum; ASTM D 412. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 903, modified. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 1876, modified. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified. Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent; ASTM D 570.
2.2 A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
071326 - 4
B. C. D. E. F.
Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. Detail Tape: Two-sided, pressure-sensitive, self-adhering reinforced tape, 4-1/2 inches wide, with a tack-free protective adhesive coating on one side and release film on self-adhering side.
G. H.
Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers. Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C 578, Type X, 1/2 inch thick. MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft..
2.3 A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. 2. 3. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, and sound; and ready to
071326 - 5
4.
receive adhesive-coated HDPE sheet. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
SURFACE PREPARATION Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. ADHESIVE-COATED HDPE SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels over substrate. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Vertical Applications: Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheet with HDPE face against substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 3-inchminimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger and tape end laps to ensure watertight installation. Mechanically fasten to substrate. 1. Securely fasten top termination of membrane with continuous metal termination bar anchored into substrate and cover with detailing tape.
3.3 A. B. C.
D.
Horizontal Applications: Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheet with HDPE face against substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 3-inchminimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams. Overlap, stagger, and seal end laps with detail tape to ensure watertight installation. Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and outside corners with detail tape. Seal penetrations through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail tape patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to produce a continuous watertight tie into adjacent waterproofing. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming area extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly secure with detail tape. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with
E. F. G. H.
I.
071326 - 6
requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. 3.4 A. MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels.
3.5 A. B. C.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. WATERPROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Waterproofing Installer," has performed waterproofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. Address: <Insert address>. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. Address: <Insert address>. Area of Work: <Insert information>. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. Expiration Date: <Insert date>.
3.6 A.
B.
AND WHEREAS Waterproofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, NOW THEREFORE Waterproofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements
C.
071326 - 7
of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition and return over topping construction to the condition indicated in the Contract Document. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. b. c. d. Lightning; (m/sec) Fire; Failure of waterproofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; and Vapor condensation on bottom of waterproofing.
e. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Waterproofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. Waterproofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty and for removal and replacement of over-topping construction necessary to repair waterproofing but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Waterproofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Waterproofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Waterproofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. During Warranty Period, if original use of waterproofed areas is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. Owner shall promptly notify Waterproofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Waterproofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Waterproofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner
071326 - 8
from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of waterproofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Waterproofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1. 2. 3. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. Name: <Insert name>. Title: <Insert title>.
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
071416 - 1
SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Latex-rubber waterproofing. Molded-sheet drainage panels. Insulation. Plaza deck pavers.
1.2 A.
Related Section: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course and molded-sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken,
B. 1.4 A. B.
1.5 A.
071416 - 2
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. B. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period.
C. D. 1.6 A.
Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. WARRANTY Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofing manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch in width. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 A.
2. B.
Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation, and concrete topping slab on decks.
071416 - 3
1.8 A.
COORDINATION Prior to start of concrete forming, notify Contractor, Construction Manager, Concrete subcontractor and Mason in writing of all products and practices which could have a deleterious effect on the adhesion, performance, or durability of waterproofing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. LATEX-RUBBER WATERPROOFING Two-Component, Reinforced, Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2.2 A. American Hydrotech, Inc.; Liquid Membrane 6090 (Basis of Design) Grace, W. R. & Co.; Procor Deck System 3R.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene. 1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.
B. C.
D. E. F.
Membrane-Reinforcing Fabric: , Manufacturer's recommended, spun-bonded polyester fabric. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric. Joint Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer. 1. Subject to Manufacturer's approval: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing, complying with ASTM C 920 Type M, Class 25; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions.
071416 - 4
2. 2.3 A.
Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
PROTECTION COURSE Protection Course: Manufacturer's Standard, 80- to 90-mil thick, fiberglass-reinforced rubberized asphalt or modified bituminous sheet or with manufacturer's approval, ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, nominal.
2.4 A.
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 12 to 15 gpm per ft.. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve, laminated to one side[ with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft.. INSULATION Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, square or shiplap edged. 1. 2. Type VI, 40-psi minimum compressive strength for vertical applications. Type V, 100-psi minimum compressive strength for horizontal applications.
B.
2.5 A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period
071416 - 5
2. 3.
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
SURFACE PREPARATION Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other construction. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. 1. Where recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for adhesion, abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast-cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents. Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
B. C. D.
E.
Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 for horizontal application and ASTM C 1471 for vertical applications and manufacturer's written instructions. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of
3.3 A.
B. C.
071416 - 6
deck-to-wall butt joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.4 A. JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 for horizontal applications and ASTM C 1471 for vertical applications and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces. 1. 2. 3. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.
B.
Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898.
3.5 A. B. C. D.
WATERPROOFING APPLICATION Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 for horizontal applications and ASTM C 1471 for vertical applications and manufacturer's written instructions. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. Apply primer over prepared substrate. Reinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other suitable application method. 1. Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply second coat of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a seamless reinforced membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film total thickness of 120 mils. Apply reinforced waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft..
2. 3. E.
Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent construction operations.
071416 - 7
3.6 A.
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install molded-sheet drainage panels with woven geotextile facing. Install non-woven geotextile faced drainage panels at horizontal applications. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels.
2. B.
After installation of insulation on horizontal surfaces, install a second layer of molded-sheet drainage panels as specified for first layer prior to placing concrete topping slab. INSULATION INSTALLATION Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer. On horizontal surfaces, place insulation units unadhered according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Engage a full time site representative qualified by the waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, and application of the membrane, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. 1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of sheet flashings.
3.7 A.
B.
C.
3.8 A.
B.
071416 - 8
2. 3. C.
Flood each area for 48 hours. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until waterproofing installation is watertight.
Engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing. CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
3.9 A.
B. C.
Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. Protect installed board insulation from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Immediately after installation, provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. WATERPROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Waterproofing Installer," has performed waterproofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. Address: <Insert address>. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. Address: <Insert address>. Area of Work: <Insert information>. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. Expiration Date: <Insert date>.
D.
3.10 A.
B.
AND WHEREAS Waterproofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, NOW THEREFORE Waterproofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own
C.
071416 - 9
cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition and return over topping construction to the condition indicated in the Contract Document. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. b. c. d. Lightning; Fire; Failure of waterproofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; and Vapor condensation on bottom of waterproofing.
e. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Waterproofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. Waterproofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty and for removal and replacement of over-topping construction necessary to repair waterproofing but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Waterproofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Waterproofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Waterproofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. During Warranty Period, if original use of waterproofed areas is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. Owner shall promptly notify Waterproofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Waterproofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Waterproofing
071416 - 10
Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of waterproofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Waterproofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1. 2. 3. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. Name: <Insert name>. Title
TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 1
SECTION 071800 - TRAFFIC COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications: 1. 2. B. Vehicular traffic. Pavement markings.
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates. Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for expansion and seismic joints in surfaces to receive traffic coatings.
1.3 A. B. C. D.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product indicated. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish indicated. Material Certificates: For each traffic coating, signed by manufacturers. Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to include in maintenance manuals. Identify substrates and types of traffic coatings applied. Include recommendations for periodic inspections, cleaning, care, maintenance, and repair of traffic coatings. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of traffic coatings required for this Project. Source Limitations:
E. 1.4 A. B.
TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 2
1. 2.
Obtain traffic coatings from a single manufacturer. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended in writing by primary material manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic coating materials with the fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method below for deck type and slopes indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Class B roof covering per ASTM E 108 .
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels showing the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Manufacturer's brand name. Type of material. Directions for storage. Date of manufacture and shelf life. Lot or batch number. Mixing and application instructions. Color.
B.
Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In storage areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by manufacturer. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost-free conditions occur throughout the depth of substrate.
1.6 A.
B.
Do not install traffic coating until items that will penetrate membrane have been installed.
TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 3
1.7 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which traffic coating manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coatings that deteriorate during the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate cracks exceeding 1/16 inch in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by snowplow, maintenance equipment, and truck traffic. 1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes the following: a. b. c. d. 2. Adhesive or cohesive failures. Abrasion or tearing failures. Surface crazing or spalling. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck substrate.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8
COORDINATION 1. Prior to start of concrete forming, notify Contractor, Construction Manager, Concrete subcontractor and Mason in writing of all products and practices which could have a deleterious effect on the adhesion, performance, appearance, or durability of Traffic Coatings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. MATERIALS Traffic Coatings: Complying with ASTM C 957. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoats; and miscellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. VOC Content: Provide traffic coatings and pavement marking paints, for use inside the weatherproofing system, with VOC content of 150 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). TRAFFIC COATING Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer recommended for substrate and conditions indicated.
C.
2.2 A.
TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 4
B. C. D.
Preparatory and Base Coats: Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer. Intermediate Coat(s): Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer. Topcoat: 1. Single- or multicomponent, aliphatic liquid urethane elastomer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E.
Component Coat Thicknesses: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, but not less than the following (measured excluding aggregate): 1. 2. 3. Base Coat: 25minimum dry film thickness. Intermediate Coat: 16minimum dry film thickness. Topcoat: 10minimum dry film thickness.
F.
Aggregate: Uniformly graded, washed silica sand of particle sizes, shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. 1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, but not less than the following: a. b. c. First Intermediate Coat: 10 to 12 lb/100 sq. ft.. Second Intermediate Coat: 15 to 25 lb/100 sq.ft.. Topcoat: As required to achieve slip-resistant finish.
2.3 A. B.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Sheet Flashing: Nonstaining. 1. Material: Sheet material recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer .
C. D.
Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. PAVEMENT MARKINGS Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than
2.4 A.
TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 5
45 minutes. 1. Color: White accept where Yellow is indicated. a. Use blue for spaces accessible to people with disabilities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and for other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings. 1. 2. 3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period recommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. a. 5. 3.2 A. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by manufacturer.
4.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to a uniform profile according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch. 1. 2. 3. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
B.
C.
4.
TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 6
3.3 A.
TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, deck-to-wall butt joints. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations. JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
B. C. D.
3.4 A.
3.5 A.
TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. 2. Start traffic coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft..
B. C.
Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated, and omit aggregate on vertical surfaces. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing stages. PAVEMENT MARKINGS Do not apply traffic paint for striping and other markings until traffic coating has cured according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to
3.6 A. B.
TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 7
produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates for a 15-mil- minimum wet film thickness. 3.7 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Final Traffic Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic coating manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect membrane installation on completion. 1. B. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. PROTECTING AND CLEANING Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.8 A. B.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. B. Glass-fiber board insulation.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. Division 07 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for insulated drainage panels installed with waterproofing. Division 07 Section(s) "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing " "" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. 2. 3. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.
1.4 A.
B.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84[, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics]. 1. B. Nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber board insulation as follows: 1. 2. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
2.2 A.
INSULATION FASTENERS Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. 2. 3. Gemco; Spindle Type.
Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 2-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. 2. Gemco; S-250.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap.
C.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation

THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. PREPARATION Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply
3.2 A. B. C.
D.
3.3 A.
2.
3.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
capped washers to tips of spindles. 3.4 A. PROTECTION Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 1
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. B. Fluid-applied membrane air barrier, vapor permeable..
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedded flashings. . Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashings. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.
1.3 A. B.
DEFINITIONS ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vaporpermeable air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
1.4 A.
072726 - 2
1.5 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier. Qualification Data: For Applicator. QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. COORDINATION Prior to start of concrete forming, notify Contractor, Construction Manager, Concrete subcontractor and Mason in writing of all products and practices which could have a deleterious effect on the adhesion, performance, or durability of air barrier.
B. 1.6 A.
1.7 A.
B. C. D. 1.8 A.
1.9 A.
072726 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous membrane. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Synthetic Polymer Membrane: 1) 2. Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31.
Physical and Performance Properties: a. b. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Not less than 10 perms; ASTM E 96.
2.2 A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40-milthick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-milthick, crosslaminated polyethylene film with release liner backing. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler. Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft density; flame spread index of 25
B. C.
D. E. F. G. H.
072726 - 4
or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. I. Flexible Flashing: Vapor-retarding, 40-milthick, smooth-surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-milthick polyethylene film with release liner backing. Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Vapor-permeable, 17-milthick, self-adhering strip consisting of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance of 37 perms. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
J.
K.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
SURFACE PREPARATION Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb,
B. C. D.
072726 - 5
aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane. E. F. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. JOINT TREATMENT Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation coat strip extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of air barrier membrane and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.
G.
3.3 A.
3.4 A.
TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
B.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials [as indicated. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to
C.
D.
072726 - 6
substrate with termination mastic. E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply adhesive-coated transition strip as indicated and in accordance with air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 1. G. Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
F.
Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inchwide, modified bituminous strip. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: 47-mil minimum dry film
H. I. J.
K.
3.5 A.
B. C.
D.
072726 - 7
thickness. E. F. Apply membrane air barrier of previously applied strip and transition strip overlapping according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than 30 days. Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, TPO, EPDM, flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer.
3.6 A.
2.
B.
Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. Remove masking materials after installation.
C.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 1
SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. Metal soffit panels.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. Division 07 Section "Air Barriers" for continuous air barrier systems. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and other sheet metal work that is not part of metal wall panel assemblies.
1.3 A.
DEFINITION Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall system. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. 2. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward.
1.4 A.
B.
Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind

METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 2
loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.5 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of wall panel and accessory. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work. 1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. b. Flashing and trim. Anchorage systems.
B.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. 2. 3. Metal Wall and Soffit Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal wall panel accessories. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. Accessories: 12-inch- long Samples for each type of accessory.
D. E. 1.6 A. B.
Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 3
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel installation. Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows: 1. 2. 3. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
1.7 A.
B. C.
D. E.
1.8 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. COORDINATION Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of girts, studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
B.
1.9 A.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 4
1.10 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. PANEL MATERIALS Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. 2-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 5
3.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
B.
Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.
3. 2.2 A.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped Hat and Sill Channel sections, 0.053-inch nominal thickness. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch nominal thickness. Base or Sill Channels: 0.079-inch nominal thickness. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch. Depth: 7/8 inch.
B. C. D. E.
F.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inchwide flange. 1. 2. 3. 4. Nominal Thickness: 0.064 inch. Depth: 3/4 inch. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with 0.040-inch nominal thickness. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.
G.
Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 6
2.3 A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. Reveal-Joint, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels : Formed with vertical panel edges and flat pan between panel edges; with 1 inch reveal joint between panels. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CENTRIA Architectural Systems; IW-40A or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. 2. ATAS International, Inc. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. Metecno-Morin. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2.4 A.
B.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.034-inch nominal thickness. a. b. Exterior Finish: Mica fluoropolymer. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. 4. 5.
Panel Coverage: 12 inches. Panel Height: 1.5 inches. Mitered Corners: Basis of Design: CENTRIA; MicroSeam Corners. Structurally-bonded horizontal interior and exterior trimless corners matching metal wall panel material, profile, and factory-applied finish, fabricated and finished by metal wall panel manufacturer. a. Welded, riveted, fastened, or field- fabricated corners do not meet the requirements of this specification.
2.5 A.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 7
attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners[ and factory-applied sealant] in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal wall panels. 1. 2. 2.6 A. Finish: Match finish and color of metal wall panels. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
ACCESSORIES Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inchthick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels. FABRICATION General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
2.7 A.
B.
C.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 8
D.
Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
E.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
2.8 A. B. C.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.
2.
3. B.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Soffit Framing: Wire-tie furring channels to supports.
C.
3.2 A.
3.3 A.
METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. 2. 3. Commence metal wall panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of factory-authorized representative. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. Flash and seal metal wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by metal wall panels are installed.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 10
4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
9.
10. B.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
Fasteners: 1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
D.
2. E.
Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or
2. 3.
4.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 11
5. 6.
7.
panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
F.
Fire-Rated Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: Install metal liner panels on exterior side of girts, fastening through faces of panels, with girts exposed to the interior. Install subgirts horizontally, fastened to legs of metal liner panels. Install substrate board as indicated in Division 06 Section "Sheathing," in number of layers required for fire rating, over subgirts, attached with board fasteners. Install second set of subgirts horizontally, fastened through substrate board into first set of subgirts. Install exterior metal wall panels, fastened to second set of subgirts. METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION In addition to complying with requirements of "Metal Wall Panel Installation, General" Article, install metal soffit panels to comply with the requirements of this article. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. 1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings.
3.4 A.
B.
3.5 A.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
METAL WALL PANELS
074213 - 12
1.
2.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.6 A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
B. C.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
075423 - 1
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system. Roof insulation.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 1. 3. 4. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. Division 07 Section "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for proprietary manufactured roof expansion-joint assemblies. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.
1.3 A. B.
DEFINITIONS TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base
1.4 A.
075423 - 2
flashings shall remain watertight. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. 2. 3. D. Corner Uplift Pressure: <Insert lbf/sq. ft.>. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: <Insert lbf/sq. ft.>. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: <Insert lbf/sq. ft.>.
C.
Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low -slope roof products. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. Base flashings and membrane terminations. Tapered insulation, including slopes. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
1.5 A. B.
C. D. 1.6 A. B.
Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
C.
075423 - 3
D.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
1.7 A.
B.
C.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, cover boards, and other components of membrane roofing system. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
D.
1.8 A.
1.9 A.
2.
075423 - 4
B.
Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 A.
COORDINATION Prior to start of concrete forming, notify Contractor, Construction Manager, Concrete subcontractor and Mason in writing of all products and practices which could have a deleterious effect on the adhesion, performance, appearance, or durability of TPO roofing..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible fabric backed TPO sheet. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 2. 3. 2.2 A. Firestone Building Products Company.
Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. Exposed Face Color: White.
AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. 2. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. b. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
075423 - 5
c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. B. C. D. E.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. ROOF INSULATION General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Size: Provide 48 inch by 48 inch.
F.
G.
2.3 A.
B.
C.
Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. 1. Size: Provide 48 inch by 48 inch.
D.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation
075423 - 6
shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.4 A. B. INSULATION ACCESSORIES General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-applied, low-rise, one- or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. WALKWAYS Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
C.
2.5 A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. 2. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed.
3. 4. 5. 6. B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
075423 - 7
corrected. 3.2 A. PREPARATION Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. INSULATION INSTALLATION Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 1. G. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
B.
C.
3.3 A. B. C. D.
E. F.
Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation
075423 - 8
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. a. If required to comply with other requirements, set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
3.4 A. B. C. D.
ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. 2. 3. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
E. F. G.
H.
Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring. BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 A.
075423 - 9
B. C. D. E.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. WALKWAY INSTALLATION Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion if required for warranty specified. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. PROTECTING AND CLEANING Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents
3.6 A.
3.7 A. B.
C. D.
3.8 A.
B.
C.
075423 - 10
and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 3.9 A. ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. Address: <Insert address>. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. Address: <Insert address>. Area of Work: <Insert information>. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. Expiration Date: <Insert date>.
AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. b. c. d. e. Lightning; Peak gust wind speed exceeding 100 mph; Fire; Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner.
C.
D.
f. g.
2.
When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing
075423 - 11
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E.
IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1. 2. 3. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. Name: <Insert name>. Title: <Insert title>.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 1
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: a. b. c. d. B. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. Formed equipment support flashing.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. Division 07 Section "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing. Division 07 Section "Metal Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal wall panels. Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for manufactured sheet metal expansion-joint covers.
1.3 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49: 1. Wind Zone 2: For velocity pressures of 31 to 45 lbf/sq. ft.: 90-lbf/sq. ft. perimeter uplift force, 120-lbf/sq. ft. corner uplift force, and 45-lbf/sq. ft.
B.
076200 - 2
outward force. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. Details of special conditions. Details of connections to adjoining work. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.
B.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color required.
2.
3. 4.
076200 - 3
D. E. 1.5 A.
Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. WARRANTY Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
B.
1.6 A.
B.
1.7 A.
Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
076200 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. SHEET METALS General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. C. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed. 1. 2. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled). Surface: Smooth, flat.
D.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. 2. 3. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. Surface: Smooth, flat and mill phosphatized for field painting were painted metal is indicated.. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish where field painting is not indicated: a. Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
4. 5.
Color: Match Architect's samples. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
2.2 A.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
076200 - 5
1. 2.
Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F.
2.3 A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.
B.
Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
C.
Solder: 1. 2. 3. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or
E.
076200 - 6
silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight and compatible with and undamaging to materials with which they will come in contact. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. FABRICATION, GENERAL General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.
G.
H. I.
2.4 A.
2. 3.
4. B.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.
C.
D.
076200 - 7
E.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet aluminum joints where necessary for strength. Seams for Aluminum without painted or coated finish: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers,[ gutter bead reinforcing bars,] and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. 2. 3. Gutter Style: SMACNA designation A . Expansion Joints: Lap type. Gutters with Girth to 20 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. 4. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
F. G.
H.
I.
J. 2.5 A.
Gutters with Girth 21 to 25 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch thick.
5.
076200 - 8
6.
B.
Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. 2. Fabricated Hanger Style: SMACNA figure designation 1-35G. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
2.6 A.
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop): Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inchwide, joint cover plates. 1. 2. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inchwide, concealed backup plate and 6-inchwide, exposed cover plates. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
B.
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. 2. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inchwide, concealed backup plate and 6-inchwide, exposed cover plates. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick.
C.
Roof to Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch thick.
D.
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
E.
Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
076200 - 9
F.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
G.
Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
2.7 A.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches minimum beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. 2. Where Aluminum is indicated: thickness indicated, if not indicated, 0.032 inch thick. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
2.8 A.
MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. 2. B. C. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
076200 - 10
3.2 A. B.
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION General: Install underlayment as indicated. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. INSTALLATION, GENERAL General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. Install sealant tape where indicated. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
3.3 A.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.
2.
C.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed
076200 - 11
within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws and metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
E.
2. F.
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. 2. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.
3.
4. G.
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
3.4 A.
076200 - 12
B.
Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to roof deck. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat, eave, or apron flashing. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
C.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
D.
Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow. ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1. 2. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 20-inch centers.
3.5 A.
B.
C.
D.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
076200 - 13
E.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-inch centers. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. ERECTION TOLERANCES Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. Clean off excess sealants. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused
F.
3.6 A.
B.
3.7 A.
3.8 A.
3.9 A. B. C. D.
076200 - 14
materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
077129 - 1
SECTION 077129 - MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. B. Bellows-type roof expansion joints.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wooden curbs or cants for mounting roof expansion joints. Division 07 Section "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for roofing system. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated sheet metal expansion-joint systems, flashing, and other sheet metal items.
1.3 A. B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: For roof expansion joints. 1. 2. 3. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Include details of splices, intersections, transitions, fittings, method of field assembly, and location and size of each field splice. Provide isometric drawings of intersections, terminations, and changes in joint direction or planes, depicting how components interconnect with each other and adjacent construction to allow movement and achieve waterproof continuity.
1.4 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
077129 - 2
1.5 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace roof expansion joints and components that leak, deteriorate beyond normal weathering, or otherwise fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof expansion joints that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. Color fading more than five Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Roof expansion joints shall withstand exposure to weather, remain watertight, and resist the movements indicated without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. C. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-barrier assemblies with fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products, per test method indicated, by UL or another testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Assemblies shall be capable of anticipated
077129 - 3
movement while maintaining fire rating. Fire-barrier products shall bear classification marking of qualified testing agency. 2.2 A. B. BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS Source Limitations: Obtain bellows-type roof expansion joints approved by roofing manufacturer and that are part of roofing membrane warranty. Flanged Bellows Roof Expansion Joint : Manufactured, continuous, waterproof, joint-cover assembly, consisting of exposed membrane bellows, laminated to flexible, closed-cell support foam, and secured along each edge to a 3- to 4-inchwide metal flange for nailing to substrate. Provide each size and type indicated, factory-fabricated units for corner and joint intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions including those to other building expansion joints, splicing units, adhesives, and other components as recommended by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer for complete installation. Fabricate each assembly specifically for installation configuration indicated on Drawings. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide InPro Corporation; 672, 674 Series or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. 3. Architectural Art Manufacturing Inc.; a division of Pittcon Architectural Metals, LLC. Balco, Inc. Building Materials Corporation of America; GAF Materials Corporation. C/S Group. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. MM Systems Corporation. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
Joint Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent of joint size. Bellows: EPDM flexible membrane, nominal 60 mils thick. a. Color: White.
4.
Flanges: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick. a. Form: Flat to fit cants or angle formed to fit curbs as indicated on Drawings.
5.
Secondary Seal: Continuous, waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint below the primary bellows assembly. a. Drain-Tube Assemblies: Equip secondary seal with drain tubes
077129 - 4
and seals to direct collected moisture to drain. 6. Fire Barrier: Manufacturer's standard fire-resistive joint system with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 to resist spread of fire and to accommodate building thermal movements without impairing its ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. a. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 2-hour unless unrated assembly is indicated.
2.3 A. B. C.
MATERIALS Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, hot-dip zinc-coating designation G90. EPDM Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type standard with manufacturer for application. Adhesives: As recommended by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Gasketed. Use screws with hex washer heads matching color of material being fastened.
D.
E. F.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: ASTM C 665. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine roof-joint openings, inside surfaces of parapets, and expansion-control joint systems that interface with roof expansion joints, for suitable conditions where roof expansion joints will be installed. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
B.
C.
077129 - 5
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion joints. 1. Anchor roof expansion joints securely in place, with provisions for required movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and miscellaneous items as required to complete roof expansion joints. Install roof expansion joints true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. Provide for linear thermal expansion of roof expansion joint materials. Provide uniform profile of roof expansion joint throughout its length; do not stretch or squeeze membranes. Provide uniform, neat seams. Install roof expansion joints to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Torch cutting of roof expansion joints is not permitted. Do not use graphite pencils to mark aluminum surfaces.
3.2 A.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B.
Directional Changes and Other Expansion-Control Joint Systems: Coordinate installation of roof expansion joints with other expansion-control joint systems to result in watertight performance. Install factory-fabricated units at directional changes and at transitions between roof expansion joints and exterior expansion-control joint systems specified in Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and watertight joints. Splices: Splice roof expansion joints with materials provided by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer for this purpose, to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and waterproof joints. 1. Install waterproof splices and prefabricated end dams to prevent leakage of secondary-seal membrane.
C.
D.
Fire Barrier: Install fire barrier where indicated to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of roof expansion joint, including transitions and end joints. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
077129 - 6
3.3 A. B.
PROTECTION Protect roof expansion joints from foot traffic, displacement, or other damage. Remove and replace roof expansion joints and components that become damaged by moisture or otherwise.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 1
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. b. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to
B.
078413 - 2
designations listed by the following: 1) 1.4 A. UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. COORDINATION Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.
B.
1.5 A. B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. 2. C. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, and fire partitions. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
B.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
078413 - 3
1. 2. D.
Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
W-Rating: For penetrations through floors of parking levels immediately above occupied spaces, provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
E.
F.
G.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. Fire-rated form board. Fillers for sealants.
Temporary forming materials. Substrate primers. Collars. Steel sleeves.
2.2 A.
FILL MATERIALS Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.
B.
078413 - 4
C. D. E. F. G.
Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
H.
I. J.
2.3 A.
MIXING For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
078413 - 5
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
3.2 A.
2.
3. B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. INSTALLATION General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.
C.
3.3 A.
B.
C.
Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
078413 - 6
1.
2. 3.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 A.
IDENTIFICATION Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." Contractor's name, address, and phone number. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Date of installation. Manufacturer's name. Installer's name.
3.5 A. B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
3.6 A.
B.
078413 - 7
3.7 A.
LOCATION Install penetration firestopping at all penetrations through fire resistance rated construction..
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078446 - 1
SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. B. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers. Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for fire-resistive architectural joint systems.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency.
B.
078446 - 2
b.
Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the following: 1) 2) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." .
1.4 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. COORDINATION Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
B.
1.5 A. B. C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1. 2. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies, and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating
B.
078446 - 3
3.
of construction they will join. Provide Joints that are designed and tested to be waterproof at joints in construction separating unconditioned and exterior areas from interior conditioned spaces.
C.
Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. VOC Content: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
D.
E.
Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. 2. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
3.2 A.
3.
078446 - 4
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates. INSTALLATION General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.
C.
3.3 A.
B.
C.
Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. 2. 3. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 A.
IDENTIFICATION Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
078446 - 5
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.5 A. B.
Contractor's name, address, and phone number. Designation of applicable testing agency. Date of installation. Manufacturer's name. Installer's name.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. CLEANING AND PROTECTING Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE At all joints between and within fire resistance rated assemblies, install UL-classified systems with system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or some other Testing Agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction except where fire rated architectural movement joints specified in Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" are specifically indicated. Where indicated, provide specific systems detailed. Provide systems with the characteristics indicated below. At joints between unconditioned or exterior spaces and conditioned interior spaces Install joints that are designed and tested to be waterproof. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:
C.
3.6 A.
B.
3.7 A.
B. C.
078446 - 6
1. 2. 3. D.
Assembly Rating: As indicated. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. Movement Capabilities: Class II - 12.5 percent compression or extension.
Floor-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. 2. 3. Assembly Rating: As indicated. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. Movement Capabilities: Class II - 12.5r percent compression, extension, or horizontal shear.
E.
Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. 2. 3. Assembly Rating: As indicated. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. Movement Capabilities: Class II - 12.5 percent compression or extension.
F.
Bottom-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. 2. 3. Assembly Rating: As indicated. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. Movement Capabilities: Class II - 12.5 percent compression or extension.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Silicone joint sealants. Urethane joint sealants. Latex joint sealants. Acoustical joint sealants.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for building expansion joints. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
1.3 A.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. 2. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. 3. 4. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
5.
6.
Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
1.4 A. B. 1.5 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. PROJECT CONDITIONS Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. When joint substrates are wet. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
1.6 A.
1.7 A.
WARRANTY Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. B. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
2. 3. 4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS, GENERAL Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3. C. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; 898.
E.
F.
2.2 A.
2.3 A.
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-901.
B.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1 or Sonolastic Ultra. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 40 FC. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
C.
Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 or Dymeric 240 FC.
2.4 A.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
B.
C.
2.5 A.
B.
C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c. d. e. 3. 4. Concrete. Masonry. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. Exterior insulation and finish systems. .
3.2 A.
2.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c. d. e. Metal. Glass. Porcelain enamel. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. .
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant
C.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 7
or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 A. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3. D. E. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
B.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 8
indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.4 A.
CLEANING Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE Joint-Sealant Application: Joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. Joints between different materials listed above. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows, and louvers. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. Other joints as indicated.
3.5 A.
3.6 A.
Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 50 or Multicomponent, nonsag,, Class 50. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B.
Joint-Sealant Application: Joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 9
b. 2. 3. C.
Other joints as indicated.
Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Location: a. b. 2. 3. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 1
SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Interior expansion control systems. Exterior wall expansion control systems.
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. Division 07 Section "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for factory-fabricated roof expansion control. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for liquid-applied joint sealants in fire-resistive building joints. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for liquid-applied joint sealants and for elastomeric sealants without metal frames.
1.3 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams showing entire route of each expansion control system. Where expansion control systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of expansion control system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material.
B.
C.
Product Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. 2. 3. Manufacturer and model number for each expansion control system. Expansion control system location cross-referenced to Drawings. Nominal joint width.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 2
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Movement capability. Classification as thermal or seismic. Materials, colors, and finishes. Product options. Fire-resistance ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces. 1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other materials. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion control systems.
2.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall and soffit expansion control systems with roof expansion control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion joint assemblies are specified in Division 07 Sections. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide expansion control systems with fire barriers identical to those of systems tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling systems shall be subjected to hose stream testing.
2.2 A.
2.3 A.
INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.; Division of Pittcon Industries. Balco, Inc. Construction Specialties, Inc. JointMaster/InPro Corporation. Michael Rizza Company, LLC.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 3
6. 7. 8. B. C.
MM Systems Corporation. Nystrom, Inc. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASF Construction Chemicals business.
Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer. Floor-to-Floor joints in vehicular pathways: 1. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: InPro Corporation; 757-A01- 100. Design Criteria: a. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide expansion control system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating not less than 2 hours.
Type: Glide plate. a. Metal: Aluminum. 1) b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard.
D.
Floor-to-Floor (Hinged, pedestrian) : 1. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: InPro Corporation; 806-A01-100. Design Criteria: a. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide expansion control system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating not less than 2 hours.
Type: Hinged Cover plate . a. Metal: Aluminum. 1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
E.
Wall-to-Wall and Ceiling-to-Ceiling : 1. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: InPro Corporation; 615-A07-075 for Flush mounted Conditions, 620-A07-075 for Surface mounted conditions. Design Criteria: a. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide expansion control system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating not less than 2 hours . Dual elastomeric seal. Metal: Aluminum.
Type: a.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 4
1) b.
Finish:
Manufacturer's standard.
Seal Material: Santoprene . 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F.
Wall Corner and Wall-to-Ceiling : 1. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: InPro Corporation; 615-A07-075 for flush mounted conditions, 620-A09-075 for surface mounted conditions. Design Criteria: a. b. 3. Type of Movement: . Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide expansion control system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating not less than 2 hours . Dual elastomeric seal. Metal: Aluminum. 1) b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
Type: a.
Seal Material: Santoprene . 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 A.
EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.; Division of Pittcon Industries. Balco, Inc. Chase Construction Products; Division of Chase Corporation. Construction Specialties, Inc. D. S. Brown Company (The). EMSEAL Corporation. Erie Metal Specialties, Inc. LymTal International, Inc. Michael Rizza Company, LLC. MM Systems Corporation. Nystrom, Inc. RJ Watson, Inc. Schul International Company, Inc. Tremco Incorporated. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASF Construction Chemicals business. Williams Products, Inc.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 5
B. C.
Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer. Wall-to-Wall : 1. Basis-of-Design Product: InPro Corporation; InPro Corporation; 615-A07-075 for Flush mounted Conditions, 620-A07-075 for Surface mounted conditions. Design Criteria: a. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide expansion control system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating not less than 2 hours unless unrated indicated .
2.
3.
Type: Flat seal. a. b. Metal: Aluminum. Seal Material: Santoprene. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D.
Wall Corner : 1. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: InPro Corporation; 615-A07-075 for flush mounted conditions, 620-A09-075 for surface mounted conditions. Design Criteria: a. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide expansion control system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating not less than 2 hours unless unrated indicated .
3.
Type: Flat seal. a. b. Metal: Aluminum. Seal Material: Santoprene. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 A.
ACCESSORIES Moisture Barriers: Manufacturer's standard moisture barrier consisting of a continuous, waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint below the primary cover. 1. Drain-Tube Assemblies: Equip moisture barrier with drain tubes and seals to direct collected moisture to drain.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 6
2.6 A.
MATERIALS Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. 1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials.
B. C.
Elastomeric Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in metal frames. Elastomeric Concrete: Modified epoxy or polyurethane extended into a prepackaged aggregate blend, specifically designed for bonding to concrete substrates. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling, designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and to meet performance criteria for required fire-resistance rating. Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material, Santoprene. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. ALUMINUM FINISHES Mill finish.
D.
E. F.
G.
2.7 A. B. C.
2.8 A.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine surfaces where expansion control systems will be installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A. B.
PREPARATION Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion control systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion control systems. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control systems. 1. 2. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper expansion control system installation and performance. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic, shrinkage-resistant grout. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. a. 6. Shimming is not permitted.
3.3 A.
B.
3. 4. 5.
Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.
C.
Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to

EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 8
comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints. 1. 2. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-weld field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
3. D. E.
Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion control system materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. 1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
F.
Moisture Barrier: Provide at all exterior joints and interior floor-to-floor joints subject to vehicular traffic where indicated on Drawings. Provide drainage fittings at a maximum of 50 feet or where indicated on Drawings. PROTECTION Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over expansion control systems. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion of the Work.
3.4 A.
B.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 1
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. Custom hollow metal doors and frames.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" [ for door hardware for hollow metal doors. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators.
1.3 A. B. C.
DEFINITIONS Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
1.4 A.
081113 - 2
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Elevations of each door design. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of accessories. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C.
Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
D.
Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252, and where allowed below, UL 10B and UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. Side-hinged and pivoted swinging doors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10C. After 5 minutes into the NFPA 252 test, the neutral pressure level in the furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the sill. Other types of doors, including swinging elevator doors, shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10B. The pressure in the furnace shall be maintained as nearly equal to the atmospheric pressure as possible. Once maintained as nearly equal to the atmospheric pressure as possible. Once established, the pressure shall be maintained during the
1.5 A. B.
2.
3.
081113 - 3
entire test period. 4. Fire door assemblies required to have a minimum fire protection rating of 20 minutes where located in corridor walls or smoke barrier walls having a fire resistance rating in accordance with Table 715.3 shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10C without the hose stream test. If a 20-minute fire door assembly contains glazing material, the glazing material in the door itself shall have a minimum fire protection rating of 20 minutes and be exempt from the hose stream test. Glazing material in any other part of the door assembly, including transom lites and sidelites, shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 257, including the hose stream test, in accordance with IBC 2003 Section 715.4. Fire door assemblies shall also meet the requirements for a smoke- and draft control door assembly tested in accordance with UL 1784 with an artificial bottom seal installed across the full width of the bottom of the door assembly. The air leakage rate of the door assembly shall not exceed 3.0 cfm per square foot (0.01524 m3/s?m2) of door opening at 0.10 inch (24.9 Pa) of water for both the ambient temperature and elevated temperature tests. Louvers shall be prohibited. a. Exception: Viewports that require a hole not larger than 1 inch (2 mm) in diameter through the door, have at least an 0.25-inch-thick (6.4 mm) glass disc and the holder is of metal that will not melt out where subject to temperatures of 1,700F (927C).
1.6 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
B. C.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.7 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field

081113 - 4
measurements before fabrication. 1.8 A. COORDINATION Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. D. MATERIALS Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. Frame Anchors: steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type
E. F.
G. H.
I. J.
081113 - 5
noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.2 A. STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. 2. Design: Flush panel. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. b. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) 3. 4. 5. B. Locations: Doors separating conditioned and or tempered spaces from unconditioned or untempered space .
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
C. D.
2.3 A.
081113 - 6
B.
Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. .
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL DOORS General: Provide doors not less than 1-3/4 inches thick, of seamless hollow construction unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with smooth surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces. Comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. Exterior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum 0.053 inch thick. Core Construction: Provide thermal-resistance-rated cores for exterior doors interior doors where indicated. 1. Steel-Stiffened Core: 0.026-inch- thick, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart, spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 inches o.c. Spaces filled between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation. a. b. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu] when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
2.4 A.
B. C.
D. E.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, minimum 0.053 inch thick, of same material as face sheets and spot welded to both face sheets. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL FRAMES General: Fabricate frames of construction indicated. Close contact edges of
F.
2.5 A.
081113 - 7
corner joints tight with faces mitered and stops butted or mitered. Continuously weld faces and soffits and finish faces smooth. Comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. 1. 2. B. C. D. Door Frames for Openings 48 Inches Wide or Less: Fabricated from 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. Door Frames for Openings More Than 48 Inches Wide: Fabricated from 0.067-inch- thick steel sheet.
Frames: Formed from metallic-coated steel sheet. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861 with reinforcing plates from same material as frame. Head Reinforcement: Provide minimum 0.093-inch- thick, steel channel or angle stiffener for opening widths more than 48 inches. FRAME ANCHORS Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
2.6 A.
2. 3.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. 2. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
2.7 A. B.
STOPS AND MOLDINGS Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum
081113 - 8
of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. ACCESSORIES Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inchwide steel. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. FABRICATION Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117 and ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861 for standard steel and custom steel doors and frames respectively. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
2.8 A. B. C.
2.9 A.
B.
C.
2. 3.
D.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. 2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
081113 - 9
3. 4. 5. 6.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors required for fire rating but not less than as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) b. Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.
c.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
7.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. b. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E. F.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates
081113 - 10
furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861 for standard and custom steel doors respectively. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.
2. 3.
4. G.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.
2.10 A.
STEEL FINISHES Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual
B.
081113 - 11
locations before frame installation. C. D. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.
3.2 A.
B.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. INSTALLATION General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and HMMA 840 for standard and custom steel frames respectively. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding
3.3 A.
B.
081113 - 12
c. d. e. f.
g. 2.
face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. b. c. d. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
C.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.
081113 - 13
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. b. c. d. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.
2. D.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
3.4 A.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. C.
D.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083323 - 1
SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following types of manually operated overhead coiling doors: 1. B. Fire-rated service doors.
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 25 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward.
1.4 A.
B.
Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000 cycles and for 10 cycles per day.
083323 - 2
1.5 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the following: 1. 2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. Fire-Rated Doors: Include description of fire-release system including testing and resetting instructions.
B. C.
Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and that exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
1.6 A.
B.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b and NFPA 252, and that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
D.
E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width
083323 - 3
of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel (SS) sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation. a. Minimum Base-Metal (Uncoated) Thickness: 0.0336 inch, but not less than required for fire rating indicated or than recommended by manufacturer's published literature for size and rating of opening and windloads indicated in "Performance Requirements" article. Curved profile slats.
b. 2. B.
Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat .
Endlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Manufacturer's standard sloping bottom bar conforming to contour of sill condition.. Bottom Bar for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, either stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats. Curtain Jamb Guides for Service Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch- thick galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks. HOODS AND ACCESSORIES Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and provide fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Fabricate hoods for steel doors of minimum 0.028-inch- thick, hot-dip
C. D.
E.
2.2 A.
083323 - 4
2. 3. 4. B.
galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M. Include automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke or flame. Shape: Round. Exterior-Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant-joint bead profile for applying joint sealant.
Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide integral Frame, Hood and Fascia. Provide welded assemblies of the following sheet metal: 1. Fabricate from minimum 0.064-inch- thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
C.
Integral Sills: If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide integral sills. Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of same sheet metal; 0.078-inch minimum thickness. Smoke Seals: Provide UL-listed and -tested smoke-seal perimeter gaskets. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 1. 2. Locking Bars: Single-jamb side operable from inside only. Lock cylinder is specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
D. E.
F. G.
Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock. Provide automatic-closing device that is inoperative during normal door operations, with governor unit complying with requirements of NFPA 80 and with an easily tested and reset release mechanism, and designed to be activated by the following: 1. Replaceable fusible links with temperature rise and melting point of 165 deg F; interconnected and mounted on both sides of door opening.
2.3 A.
COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.
B.
083323 - 5
C.
Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS Provide manual chain-hoist operators unless electric door operators are indicated. Chain-Hoist Operator: Provide manual chain-hoist operator consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 35-lbf force for door operation. Provide alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. FINISHES, GENERAL General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES Baked Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked finish consisting of primer and topcoat according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.
D. E.
2.4 A. B.
2.5 A. B.
2.6 A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers,
083323 - 6
and equipment supports. 1. 3.2 A. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
ADJUSTING Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter. STARTUP SERVICES Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. 2. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
3.3 A.
3.4 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 - 1
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. B. Exterior and interior storefront framing. Storefront framing for punched openings. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Louvers And Vents" for units installed with aluminum-framed systems.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. Failure includes the following:
1.4 A.
2. 3.
084113 - 2
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. B.
Deflection exceeding specified limits. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. Sealant failure. Failure of operating units.
Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: . a. b. c. d. 2. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph . Importance Factor: II. Exposure Category: B. 200 lb point load acting in any direction.
C.
3.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch.
D.
Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. 2. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.
3.
084113 - 3
E.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
F.
G.
1.5 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.
B.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. 2. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. Include design calculations.
D. E.
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
084113 - 4
1.6 A. B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
C.
1.7 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. Failure of operating components.
1.8 A.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
084113 - 5
B.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company; TriFab VersaGlaze 450 or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. EFCO Corporation. United States Aluminum. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
2.2 A.
MATERIALS Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
B.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. 2. 3. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.3 A.
FRAMING SYSTEMS Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing
084113 - 6
members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. 2. 3. 4. Construction: Nonthermal. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. Glazing Plane: Center . Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
B.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
2. C. D.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials or Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E.
2.4 A. B.
GLAZING SYSTEMS Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
C.
084113 - 7
2.5 A.
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
2. 3.
B.
Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" and as described in Entrance Door Hardware Article of this Section. ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.
2.6 A. B.
C.
Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. ACCESSORY MATERIALS Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.7 A.
B.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
084113 - 8
2.8 A. B.
FABRICATION Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
C. D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
E.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware".. 1. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
F.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. ALUMINUM FINISHES Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
G.
2.9 A.
084113 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION General: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B.
3.2 A.
Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
2. C. D. E. F. G. H.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." Install Louvers as specified in Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents." Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at
084113 - 10
contact points. 1. 2. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
I.
Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. ERECTION TOLERANCES Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. 2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. Alignment: a. b. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
3.3 A.
B.
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. ADJUSTING Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 A.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 1
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. 2. 3. B. Swinging doors.
1.2 A.
Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. Electrified door hardware.
Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for astragals provided as part of labeled fire-rated assemblies and for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames. Division 08 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors" for door hardware provided as part of overhead door assemblies. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for installation of entrance door hardware, including cylinders. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring work. Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for detection devices installed at door openings and provided as part of an intrusion-detection system. Division 28 Section "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System" for connections to building fire-alarm system.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of
B.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 2
Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. Content: Include the following information: 1) 2) 3) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. Fastenings and other pertinent information. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. Mounting locations for door hardware. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.
b. c.
4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 2.
Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.
C. D. 1.4 A.
Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. 2. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 3
3.
schedules. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows: 1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is also an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC).
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
D.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.
E.
F. G.
Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1,and Texas Accessibility Standards. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
H.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 4
2.
Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. b. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. 4.
Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
I.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. Requirements for key control system. Requirements for access control. Address for delivery of keys.
1.5 A. B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1.6 A.
B.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 5
C. D.
Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.
E.
1.7 A.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. b. c. [Electromagnetic] and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
B.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
2.
B.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.
2.2 A.
HINGES Hinges: Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. CONTINUOUS HINGES Continuous Hinges: Fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) latchbolt throw. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.
2.3 A.
2.4 A.
B.
Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 7
1. C.
For Hardware installed on existing doors, field verify backset and provide hardware to fit or replace door with new door to fit hardware indicated.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. 2. 3. 4. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
2.5 A. 2.6 A.
ELECTRIC STRIKES Electric Strikes: With faceplate to suit lock and frame. LOCK CYLINDERS Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.
B. C.
Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are interchangeable; face finished to match lockset. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. KEYING Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. 2. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate cylinders. Existing System: a. Coordinate with Keying system for Owner's other renovations in adjacent facilities so that keying of all locks is convenient to Owner.
2.7 A.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 8
B.
Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. 2. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. b. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. Grand Master Keys: Five.
2.8 A.
DOOR GASKETING Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. THRESHOLDS Thresholds: Fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on [Drawings] [schedule] or comparable product by one of the following:
2.9 A.
2.
2.10 A.
FABRICATION Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide
B.
C.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 9
Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. Fire-Rated Applications: a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 1) 2) 3) b. Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames. Strike plates to frames. Closers to doors and frames.
2.
Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) 2) 3) Surface hinges to doors. Closers to doors and frames. Surface-mounted exit devices.
3. 4. 5.
Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
2.11 A. B. C.
FINISHES Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." INSTALLATION Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. 2. 3. B. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
B. C.
3.2 A. B.
3.3 A.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. 2. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 11
C.
Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. 2. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
D.
E.
Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.
F.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. ADJUSTING Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
H. I. J.
3.4 A.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 12
B.
Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and
HARDWARE SCHEDULE TYPICAL MANUFACTURER U.N.O.:

PR HINGE PC HINGE PANIC CYLINDER KICKPLATE STOP SEAL SET AUTOBOLT DUST STRIKE LOCKSET CLOSER COORDINATOR SET ASTRAGAL THRESHOLD HAGER SELECT HINGE VON DUPRIN BEST HAGER TRIMCO NGP GLYNN-JOHNSON / IVES GLYNN-JOHNSON / IVES BEST LCN TRIMCO NGP NGP SWEEP RAIN DRIP DEADLOCK THUMBTURN PUSH/PULL SET BRACKET FLUSHBOLT OH STOP SILENCER PRIVACY PULL ELECTRIC STRIKE PUSH PLATE PULL PLATE NGP NGP ADAMS RITE FALCON HAGER LCN TRIMCO GLYNN-JOHNSON GLYNN-JOHNSON BEST IVES VON DUPRIN TRIMCO TRIMCO
readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 A. B. C. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
3.6
HW1 DOOR G-1.001, G-1.002, G-4.001, G-5.001, G-6.001, G-7.001; TO HAVE: 1 CYLINDER 1E72 NOTE: BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER.
DOOR HARDWARE HW2 DOOR G-1.100; TO HAVE: 2 PR HINGES 1 PANIC 1 CYLINDER 1 CLOSER 1 KICKPLATE 1 STOP 1 THRESHOLD 1 SWEEP 1 SEAL HW3 DOOR G-1.101, G-1.102; TO HAVE: 2 PR HINGES (1 PR @ G-1.102) 1 PANIC 1 CYLINDER 1 CLOSER 1 KICKPLATE 1 STOP 1 SEAL HW4 DOOR G-1.103; TO HAVE: 3 PR HINGES 1 SET AUTO BOLT 1 DUST STRIKE 1 LOCKSET 2 CLOSER 1 COORDINATOR 2 STOP 1 SEAL 1 SET ASTRAGAL HW5 DOOR G-1.500, G-8.001, G-13.001; TO HAVE: 1-1/2 PR HINGES 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 KICKPLATE 1 STOP 1 THRESHOLD 1 SWEEP 1 SEAL
087100 - 13
BB1279 - NRP - 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 99L 1E72 P4041 - TB 10 X 2" LDW - 16GA 1214ES - 2-1/4" 425 102V 5050 - BN
BB1279 - NRP - 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 99L-F 1E72 P1461 TB (P4041-TB @ G-1-101) 10 X 2" LDW - 16GA 1214ES 5050 - BN
BB1279 - 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 FB51P DP2 93K7D-15C 1461 - TB 3092 1211ES 5050 - BN 115NA
BB1279 - NRP - 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 93K7D-15C P1461 - TB 10 X 2" LDW - 16GA 1214ES - 2-1/4" 425 102V 5050 - BN
DOOR HARDWARE HW6 DOOR G-1.501; TO HAVE: 1-1/2 PR HINGES 1 PRIVACY 1 STOP 3 SILENCER
087100 - 14
1279 - 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 93K0L-15C 1270WV GJ64
HW7 DOOR G-2.000, G-3.000, G-4.000, G-5.000, G-6.000, G-7.000, G-8.000, G-9.000, G-10.000, G-11.000, G-12.000, G-13.000; TO HAVE: 1-1/2 PR HINGES 1 PANIC 1 TRANSFER 1 POWER SUPPLY 1 CLOSER 1 STOP 3 SILENCER HW8 DOOR G-12.001, G-12.002; TO HAVE: 1 PC HINGE 1 PUSH/PULL SET 1 CLOSER 1 BRACKET 1 OH STOP 1 THRESHOLD 1 SWEEP 1 SEAL BB1279 - 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 CX9975L-BE EPT10 PS873 1461 - TB 1214ES - 2-1/4" GJ64
SL11HD 1737 P4041 - TB 4040-18PA GJ100S 425 102V BY DOOR SUPPLIER
GLAZING
088000 - 1
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 A. Doors. Storefront framing. Glazed entrances. Interior borrowed lites.
1.2 A.
DEFINITIONS Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B.
GLAZING
088000 - 2
1.5 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
1.6 A.
B. C. D. E.
F.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for
G.
1.7 A.
B.
GLAZING
088000 - 3
venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.8 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.9 A.
WARRANTY Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. B. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. GLASS PRODUCTS Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear)
2.2 A. B.
GLAZING
088000 - 4
unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
2. 3.
2.3 A.
INSULATING GLASS Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. 2. 3. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction . Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
B.
Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article. GLAZING GASKETS Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
2.4 A.
2.5 A.
GLAZING SEALANTS General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart
2.
3.
GLAZING
088000 - 5
4. B.
D. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. GLAZING TAPES Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
2.6 A.
2.7 A.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.
B. C. D. E. F.
G.
GLAZING
088000 - 6
2.8 A.
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES Glass Type GL-1: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. 2. Thickness: 6.0 mm. Provide safety glazing labeling.
B. C. 2.9 A.
2.10 A.
INSULATING-GLASS TYPES Glass Type GL-2: Clear insulating glass. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. Interspace Content: Air. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. Provide safety glazing labeling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. Presence and functioning of weep systems. Minimum required face and edge clearances. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GLAZING
088000 - 7
3.2 A. B.
PREPARATION Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. GLAZING, GENERAL Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
3.3 A.
B.
C.
D. E.
F. G.
2.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
GLAZING
088000 - 8
I. J. K.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. TAPE GLAZING Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. GASKET GLAZING (DRY) Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on
L.
3.4 A. B. C.
D.
E. F.
3.5 A. B. C.
GLAZING
088000 - 9
setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
E. 3.6 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 1
SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. Adjustable, extruded-aluminum louvers.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B. C.
D.
1.4 A.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 2
B.
Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
1.5 A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. 2. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. Show mullion profiles and locations.
1.6 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2. 3. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
B.
C.
SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 3
B.
Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
C.
Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. FABRICATION, GENERAL Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.
D.
2.2 A.
B. C.
D. E.
Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. 1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.
F.
Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 4
G.
Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver (Fixed Louver): 1. 2. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Airolite Company, LLC (The); SCH7 or comparable product. Material: Aluminum, Class 1 Clear Anodic Finish. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.3 A.
B.
Horizontal, Nondrainable-Blade Louver (Narrow Profile Louver): 1. 2. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Airolite Company, LLC (The); T6482 or comparable product: Material: Aluminum, Class 1 Clear Anodic Finish. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.4 A.
ADJUSTABLE, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS Louver Construction and Operation: Provide adjustable louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and blades not less than 0.080-inch nominal thickness, and with operating mechanisms to suit louver sizes. 1. Crank operation with removable-crank operator in sill or jamb.
B.
Single-Blade, Adjustable Louver (Adjustable Louver): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Airolite Company, LLC (The); T6784 or comparable product by one of the following: Accessories: Equip louvers as follows: a. 3. Vinyl blade-edge gaskets for each louver blade.
2.
AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.5 A.
LOUVER SCREENS General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. 2. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. Screen Location for Adjustable Louvers: Interior face unless otherwise indicated.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 5
3. B. C.
Screening Type: Insect screening except bird screening at Narrow Profile Louver .
Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.
2. 3. D.
Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. 2. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.
2.6 A.
BLANK-OFF PANELS Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver. 1. 2. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness. Panel Finish: Same type of finish applied to louvers, but black color.
2.7 A.
FINISHES, GENERAL Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. ALUMINUM FINISHES Finish louvers after assembly. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
2.8 A. B.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. INSTALLATION Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
B.
3.2 A.
3.3 A. B.
C. D. E.
F.
G.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 7
3.4 A. B.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
C. D.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 1
SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on . Acrylic-Based coatings on portland cement plasterwork and monolithic concrete.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring included in portland cement plaster assemblies. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders included in portland cement plaster assemblies.
1.3 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Copy of Notification Letter sent to Contractor, Construction Manager, Concrete Subcontractor and Mason notifying same of products and practices that could have deleterious effect on cement plaster or acrylic-based coating performance. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
C.
1.4 A.
092400 - 2
1.
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 40 deg F for at least 48 hours before plaster application, and continuously during and after application. 1. 2. Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydrating plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application and until plaster is dry.
1.6 A. B.
C.
Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred.
2. 3. D.
Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes. COORDINATION Prior to start of concrete forming, notify Contractor, Construction Manager, Concrete subcontractor and Mason in writing of all products and practices which could have a deleterious effect on the adhesion, performance, appearance, or durability of cement plaster and acrylic based coatings.
1.7 A.
092400 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. ACCESSORIES General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. Metal Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from zinc. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. J Beads: Fabricated from zinc; square-edged style; with perforated flanges and where used along the bottom of a cement plaster panel, with weep holes.. Two-Piece Joints: Fabricated from zinc; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/2 to 1 1/4 inch wide; with perforated flanges. Screed depth to fit cement plaster thickness. Edge Mould: Fabricated from zinc; screed depth to fit cement plaster thickness. a. 2.2 A. B. C. D. Product: Superior Metal Trim; SCT.
5.
6.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. PLASTER MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
E.
2.3 A.
092400 - 4
1. B. C. D.
Color for Finish Coats: White.
Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes. 1. Basis of Design Product: Sto Corp, ; Powerwall Finish or subject to compliance with requirements, a comparable product by one of the following provided they are capable of meeting the color and texture requirements indicated: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Prema-Flex. LaHabra, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Acrylic Finish. Master Wall Inc.; Superior Finishes. Omega Products International, Inc.; Omega Flex Finishes. Parex, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; e-lastic. Surewall, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Acrylic Finish.
Color: Match Architect's sample. Texture: Sto Fine.
2.4 A.
PLASTER MIXES General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials.
B.
Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork for use over "high-absorption" plaster bases such as concrete masonry, absorptive brick, and tile as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
C.
Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
092400 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. Prepare concrete surfaces to receive Acrylic Based Finished Coatings as recommended by coating manufacturer. Clean surfaces free of all bond-inhibiting materials, including dirt, efflorescence, form oil and other foreign matter. Remove loose or damaged material by water blasting, sandblasting or mechanical wire brushing. Repair damaged surfaces. Do not apply coating to irregular surfaces. Resurface, patch or level surfaces to required tolerance and smoothness with coating system manufacturer's recommended leveling materials. Prepare concrete surfaces for acrylic based coating in accordance with ASTM D-4258 and ASTM D-4261. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings. INSTALLING ACCESSORIES Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. C. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.
B.
3.2 A. B. C.
3.3 A.
3.4 A. B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
092400 - 6
3.5 A.
PLASTER APPLICATION General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
2.
3. B. C.
Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry plaster bases. Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 3/8 inch thick on concrete masonry except where otherwise indicated or required for fire resistance rating. 1. Portland cement mixes.
D. E. F.
Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhered finishes, omit finish coat. Concealed Interior Plasterwork: 1. 2. 3. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings, and equipment, apply finish coat. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations, finish coat may be omitted. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes, omit finish coat.
3.6 A.
PLASTER REPAIRS Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. PROTECTION Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove
3.7 A.
092400 - 7
plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 1
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Concrete. Concrete masonry units (CMU). Steel. Galvanized metal. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). Exterior portland cement plaster (stucco).
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
1.3 A. B. C. D. E. F.
DEFINITIONS Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 2
G.
Exterior: Includes exterior walls, the head, jamb, and sills of openings in exterior walls, items mounted on exterior walls, surfaces and items located in areas without a roof above, and surfaces contiguous with the above but extending under the roof or floor above to a natural point of termination such as an inside corner. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. 2. 3. 4. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. Label each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application area.
1.4 A. B.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2. 3. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. VOC content.
1.5 A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.6 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 3
b. 2.
sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3.
4.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. 2. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.8 A. B.
FIELD CONDITIONS Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Basis of Design Manufacturer: Products scheduled by reference to Sherwin-Williams Company (The) product designations. Provide scheduled products or subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. ICI Paints. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 4
4. 2.2 A.
Pratt & Lambert.
PAINT, GENERAL Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
2.
B. C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 1. 10 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
D.
Factory-Mixed Coatings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. Coating Application Accessories: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required per manufacturers specifications. Notwithstanding requirements of systems scheduled, under no circumstances shall products containing lead be used. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements.
E.
F.
2.3 A.
2. 3.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 5
Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3. C. D. E. Concrete: 12 percent. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
B.
Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 A. B.
PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 6
1. D.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
E.
F.
G.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. APPLICATION Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. 2. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
H.
I. 3.3 A.
3. 4. 5. B.
Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 7
C. D.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view and located on painted or acrylic-based coating finished surfaces.: a. b. c. d. e. f. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. Uninsulated metal piping. Uninsulated plastic piping. Pipe hangers and supports. Metal conduit. Plastic conduit.
E.
3.4 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. 2. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 A. B.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
C.
D.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 8
3.6 A.
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Concrete and Cement Plaster Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces; Contractors option of one of the following systems: 1. Option 1: Apply to obtain a coating thickness of 14.0 to18.0 mils wet and 6.4 to 8.3 mils dry per coat. a. b. 2. Prime Coat: S-W Loxon XP Exterior Waterproofing System, A24W451. Top Coat: S-W Loxon XP Exterior Waterproofing System, A24W451.
Option 2: Apply to obtain a total dry film thickness of 12 - 15 mils. a. b. c. Prime Coat: S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200. Intermediate Coat: S-W ConFlex XL High Build Smooth, A5 Series. Topcoat: S-W ConFlex XL High Build Smooth, A5 Series.
B.
CMU Substrates: 1. Option 1: Apply to obtain a coating thickness of 14.0 to18.0 mils wet and 6.4 to 8.3 mils dry per coat. a. b. c. 2. Prime Coat: S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200. Intermediate Coat: S-W Loxon XP Exterior Waterproofing System, A24W451. Top Coat: S-W Loxon XP Exterior Waterproofing System, A24W451.
Option 2: Apply to obtain a total dry film thickness of 12 - 15 mils. a. b. c. Prime Coat: S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200. Intermediate Coat: S-W ConFlex XL High Build Smooth, A5 Series. Topcoat: S-W ConFlex XL High Build Smooth, A5 Series.
C.
Steel Substrates: 1. System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. Intermediate Coat: S-W Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel, B54-150 Series. Topcoat: S-W Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel, B54-150 Series.
D.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. System

EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 9
a. b. c. E.
Prime Coat: S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. Intermediate Coat: S-W Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel, B54-150 Series. Topcoat: S-W Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel, B54-150 Series.
Aluminum Substrates: 1. System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. Intermediate Coat: S-W Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel, B54-150 Series. Topcoat: S-W Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel, B54-150 Series.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 1
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint and repainting systems on the following interior substrates: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Concrete. Structural clay masonry. Concrete masonry units (CMU). Steel. Cast iron piping. Galvanized metal. Wood. Gypsum board. Cement Plaster
1.2 A.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.
1.3 A. B. C. D.
DEFINITIONS Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 2
E. F. G. H.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Interior: Those areas not specifically identified as 'Exterior' in Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting". ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. 2. 3. 4. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. Label each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application area.
1.4 A. B.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. VOC content.
1.5 A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.6 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 3
a. b. 2.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3.
4.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. 2. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.8 A. B.
FIELD CONDITIONS Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Basis of Design Manufacturer: Products scheduled by reference to Sherwin-Williams Company (The) product designations. Provide scheduled products or subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable products by the following : 1. 2. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. ICI Paints. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 4
4. 2.2 A.
Pratt & Lambert.
PAINT, GENERAL Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
2.
B. C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. Factory-Mixed Coatings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. Coating Application Accessories: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required per manufacturers specifications. Notwithstanding requirements of systems scheduled below, under no circumstances shall products containing lead be used. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 1. 10 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
D.
E. F.
2.3 A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements.
2. 3.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 5
Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. D. E. F. G. Concrete: 12 percent. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. Wood: 15 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Plaster: 12 percent.
B.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
B.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 6
1.
2. C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. 2. 3. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. De-gloss previously painted surfaces in a manner compatible with optimal adhesion and performance of painting system to be applied. Take other actions necessary to return previously painted surfaces to a condition so that after application of paint system they will appear and perform like new.
D.
Abandoned Items: Remove fasteners, clips, and other attachment devices for which there is no purpose in the final plans. Obtain Owner's authorization before removal. 1. Remove staples, tacks, pins, post-it notes, adhesives, tape, chewing gum, and anything else that is found on an existing surface that does not serve a legitimate purpose in the final design. Refer all questionable items to Owner for determination.
E.
Patch all holes, repair irregular surfaces, scrape away mortar that remains from selective demolition, remove protrusions and take all other corrective actions to return surface to a condition that will achieve a like new appearance after application of paint system. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
F.
G.
H.
I.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 7
J.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. Wood Substrates: 1. 2. 3. 4. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
K. L.
M.
Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. APPLICATION Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. 2. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
3.3 A.
3. 4. 5. B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:
C. D.
E.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 8
1.
Paint the following work where exposed and located on painted surfaces: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Equipment, including panelboards. Uninsulated metal piping. Uninsulated plastic piping. Pipe hangers and supports. Metal conduit. Plastic conduit. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. Other items as directed by Architect.
2.
Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
3.4 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. 2. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 A. B.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. INTERIOR REPAINTING SCHEDULE For painting over previously painted substrates, select paint system from "MPI
C.
D.
3.6 A.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 9
Maintenance Repainting Manual" that will equal or exceed the requirements and performance of systems specified below for previously unpainted substrates. Submit selected systems for Architect's approval. 3.7 A. INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. System: a. b. c. B. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Loxon Masonry Primer A24W300. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, sheen TBD.
Exposed Concrete Floors and Curbs in HVAC Rooms: 1. System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams ArmorSeal Water Based Epoxy Primer B70AQ11, B60VQ11. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Armor-Plex Water Based Urethane B65-750, B65V750. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Armor-Plex Water Based Urethane B65-750, B65V750, with Anti-Slip Additive H&C SharkGrip added to the coating.
C.
Structural Clay Tile Substrates: 1. System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Adhesion Primer. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, sheen TBD.
D.
CMU Substrates: 1. System: a. b. c. Block Filler: Sherwin-Williams Prep-Rite Block Filler, B25W25. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series , sheen TBD.
E.
Steel Substrates including handrails and guardrails:

INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 10
1.
System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer B66-310 Series. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series , sheen TBD.
F.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer B66-310 Series. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series , sheen TBD.
G.
Wood Substrates: Including wood trim: 1. System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Sand-N-Go Waterborne Fast Dry Wood Primer B28WJ80. Sand prime coats with 220 grit sand paper. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic B31 Series, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic B31 Series, sheen TBD.
H.
Cast Iron Piping: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer B66-310 Series. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series , sheen TBD.
I.
Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. System: a. b. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams ProGreen Low VOC Primer B28W600. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams ProGreen 200 Low VOC Interior Latex, matching topcoat.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 11
c. J.
Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams ProGreen 200 Low VOC Interior Latex, sheen TBD.
Cement Plaster Substrates: 1. System: a. b. c. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams Loxon Masonry Primer A24W300. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic B66-Series, sheen TBD.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 1
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.3 A. Public-use washroom accessories. Underlavatory guards.
1.2 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Construction details and dimensions. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. Material and finish descriptions. Features that will be included for Project. Manufacturer's warranty.
B.
Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. COORDINATION Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required
1.4 A.
1.5 A.
B.
102800 - 2
to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. D. E. F. MATERIALS Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser : 1. 2. 3. 4. Description: Single-roll dispenser . Mounting: Surface mounted. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls.
G. H. I. 2.2 A.
B. C.
102800 - 3
5. D.
Material and Finish: Chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac) or steel.
Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser <Insert drawing designation>: 1. 2. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. Material and Finish: ABS plastic, gray.
E.
Grab Bar : 1. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. 3. 4. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
F.
Mirror Unit : 1. Frame: Stainless-steel channel. a. 2. 3. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.
Integral Shelf: 5 inches deep. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
4. 2.3 A.
Size: As indicated on Drawings.
UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS Underlavatory Guard : 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2. 2.4 A.
FABRICATION General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing
102800 - 4
plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of three keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
3.2 A. B. C.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
104413 - 1
SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. B. Portable fire extinguishers.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. 2. Division 09 painting Sections for field painting fire protection cabinets. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
B.
Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. COORDINATION Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
1.4 A.
104413 - 2
1.5 A.
SEQUENCING Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. FIRE PROTECTION CABINET <Insert drawing designation> Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher . 1. B. C. D. E. F. G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, Provide Larsen's Manufacturing Company; 2409-SM or a comparable product..
2.2 A.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet. Door Material: Aluminum sheet . Door Style: Solid opaque panel with frame. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
H.
Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.
2. 3.
104413 - 3
a.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) 2) 3) 4) Location: Applied to cabinet door. Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. Lettering Color: White. Orientation: Vertical with letters rotated counter clockwise so that text reads from right-hand edge.
I.
Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. b. Exterior of cabinet , door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. Interior of cabinet and door.
2.3 A.
FABRICATION Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. Weld joints and grind smooth. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. Install door locks at factory.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. 2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
2.4 A. B.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable
C. D.
104413 - 4
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 A. STEEL FINISHES Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling" . After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet a. Mount surface mounted cabinets located along accessible routes and with no cane detection guard indicated below cabinet so that bottom edge does not exceed 27 inches in height.
3.2 A.
B.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.
C.
Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
104413 - 5
3.3 A.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
B. C. D.
E.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
104416 - 1
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers. Related Sections: 1. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."
1.2 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Warranty: Sample of special warranty. QUALITY ASSURANCE NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.
1.5 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.6 A.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
104416 - 2
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated. 1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container : UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. B. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.2 A.
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
111200 - 1
The General Conditions, any Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1, General Requirements are hereby made a part of this section as fully as if repeated herein. 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A Work Included: Perform all work necessary and required for the construction of the project as indicated. Such work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B Automatic Barrier Gates (AG) Vehicle Detectors and Inductive Loops (AL, CL) Automated Vehicle Identity System (AT) Ticket Dispensers (TD) Pay-in-lane Exit Terminal (PS) Parking Facility Management Computer Facility Management Software Accessories
Related Work in Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications. 1. Division 2 Section Bituminous Concrete Pavement for asphalt driveway and approach paving. Division 2 Section Portland Cement Concrete for concrete driveway and approach paving. Division 5 Section Metal Fabrications for pipe bollards to protect parking control equipment. Division 16 Section for electrical service and security systems.
2.
3.
4.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the parking control equipment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of the type of units required for this Project, and whose installations have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Contractor/Installer shall: 1. Allow Owner and/or its Representative(s) free access to facility(s) at any time to observe installation process. If Contractor elects to integrate components from different manufacturers, Contractor shall be responsible for insuring that all specified features are provided and fully operating when system is turned over to Owner for testing and acceptance.
McKinney York Architects 0932
2.
Starr Garage Issue For Pricing 05/17/10
111200 - 2
Basis of Design: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of each parking control equipment component and are based on Amano USA and Sirit Technologies. Other manufacturers' will be considered. 1. Do not modify intended design concept, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architects approval and only to extent needed to comply with performance requirements.
Listing and Labeling: Provide internal electrical components required as part of parking control equipment specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. 2. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For each item of parking control equipment. Include manufacturer's standard details and installation and maintenance instructions. Shop Drawings: For each item of parking control equipment. Include plans, elevations, and details of typical members and other components. Show layout of all conduit, installation details, including anchorage details. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for parking control equipment operator, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show locations of connections to electrical service provided in other Sections. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit samples of color charts showing the full range of colors available with factory-applied color finishes, paint finishes, tickets, standard reports and other elements to be selected by Owner within 30 days after approval of contract. Approval/selections will be returned to Contractor within 30 days of submittal. Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturer's written instructions for maintenance of parking control equipment. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining equipment in optimum operating condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
2.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with controls by field measurements and indicate
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.05 COORDINATION A
111200 - 3
Coordinate installation of anchorages for controls. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of parking control equipment with connections to power supplies and security access control system.
1.06 WARRANTY A Warranty Period: Contractor shall warrant equipment and installation (100% parts and labor) in each phase for period of one year from date of final acceptance of that phase by Owner. System shall be maintained and serviced against any and all malfunctions due to manufacturing or installation defects at no cost to Owner during warranty period. Maintenance shall include preventive maintenance per manufacturer's recommendations, or as necessary to keep equipment in good working order. Contractor shall be responsible for performing all maintenance and repair during warranty period, including all preventive maintenance and minor repair tasks. Contractor shall keep a log of all maintenance, preventive maintenance and repair work performed under warranty to give to Owner at end of warranty period. Warranty shall not cover acts of vandalism, damage caused by third party, or natural phenomena. Warranty shall not cover damage caused during maintenance actions by untrained/unapproved Owner personnel.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A Contractor shall assume care, custody and control of all PARCS equipment and components. PARCS equipment shall deliver equipment to site packaged to prevent damage and marked for easy identification. Equipment shall be stored in original containers in a clean and dry location designated by the General Contractor or Owner and agreed to by the PARCS Contractor.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Gate Arms: One replacement arm for each gate installed. (AL-12 folding 11-0 aluminum gate arm or comparable product by approved equal). Include required accessory components.
1.09 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Parking Control System: Intended to be used for the following types of parking management: o Transient Parking: Hourly rated parking, with fee paid while exiting. o Monthly Parking: Monthly rated parking, with fee paid by the month and
Starr Garage Issue For Pricing 05/17/10 McKinney York Architects 0932
111200 - 4
access gained by access control card. o Flat-Rate Parking: Unlimited-duration parking, with free gate entry and fixed-fee amount paid while exiting. o Special-Event Parking: Duration-of-event parking, with fee paid while entering with gates up or down. o Merchant Validated Parking: Fee set, reduced, or waived by merchant validation, with free gate entry and fee paid while exiting. o Valet Parking: Assisted parking, with fee paid while entering or exiting.
PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. 2. Amano McGann, Inc. McGann Software
Substitutions: Alternative equipment that accomplishes the design intent will be considered subject to owner approval. Submit substitution request for approval 2 weeks before submitting bid proposals.
2.02 MATERIALS A Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum manufacturer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. 1. 2. 3. B C Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, 6063-T6. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 5005-H15. Aluminum Floor Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, 6061.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M. Galvanized Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123. Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel structural tubing, Grade B. Steel Mechanical Tubing: ASTM A 513 welded steel mechanical tubing. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized: According to ASTM A 123.
F G
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304. Plastic-Laminate Panels: NEMA LD 3, Type HWS, high-pressure decorative laminate, on 1/2-inch-thick particleboard.
2.03 AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES

Starr Garage Issue For Pricing 05/17/10 McKinney York Architects 0932
111200 - 5
General: Gates shall provide a one-way barrier to vehicles in entrance and exit lanes. Barrier arms shall open vertically on command signal from arming loop and return to lower position upon signal from detector beyond gate location. Provide UL-approved, automatic, barrier-gate parking control system (Amano McGann AGP-1750 Gate with Detector, or comparable product by an approved equal). Verify number per plan. Cabinets: Shall be fabricated of a material that is strong and durable such as, but not limited to composite, stainless steel, aluminum alloy or welded 12-gauge steel. Weld seams and grind smooth. All surfaces shall be corrosion resistant and exterior of cabinet and exterior of cabinet shall be finished in a color chosen by the Owner from manufacturers full range of colors. 1. Provide weatherproof, gasketed access doors hinged away from traffic with flush-mounted locks; furnish two keys for each gate, keyed alike.
Gate Arm: 11 folding gate arm. Finish with manufacturer's standard coating system with black diagonal stripes on traffic side face. (Amano McGannAL20 Folding Aluminum Gate Arm). Provide mounting flange with breakaway feature to ensure clean break if arm is struck by vehicle. 1. Reversing Feature: Provide an automatic instant-reversing mechanism that stops downward motion of gate arm if arm strikes an object and that immediately returns arm to upward position. Include a 0- to 60-second variable-time reset device.
Operator: Provide 1/3-hp; 115-V, ac; 60-Hz; single-phase; instant-reversing motor for operating gate arm. Transmit power to gate-arm drive shaft through a harmonic-acting crank and connecting rod. Fabricate cranks, rod, and drive shaft of galvanized solid bar steel. Provide an operable cam for adjusting arm travel. Electrical Components: Provide electrical control components in factorysealed, plug-in controller. Provide a galvanized steel box for wiring connections. Equip unit with the following features: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. One 115-V, ac grounded convenience outlet. 250-W strip heater with a control switch and a preset thermostat. On-off switch. Automatic-manual switch. Overload switch protection.
Built-in detector harness: (Amano AGP-0134 Single Detector)
2.04 VEHICLE DETECTORS AND INDUCTIVE LOOPS A Vehicle Loop Detectors: Solid-state, electronic vehicle-detector units designed to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and emit an electrical pulse to operate other equipment. Provide a
111200 - 6
three-position sensitivity switch and detection indicator light on front panel. 1. Detector Loops: Multiple strands of wire of the wire size, number of turns, loop size and method of placement as recommended in writing by parking control equipment manufacturer. (L5 2x 6 with 25 lead-in). Verify number per plan. Count Signal Board: Provide Amano McGannKIT-10 Count Signal Board, or comparable product by approved equal.
2.
2.05 ACCESS CARD SYSTEM A Automated Vehicle Identification Unit: Access Control System that read transponder tags and transmit it to the access system controller for verification of authorization for access to system and/or recording of appropriate data regarding transaction. Access control system that activates barrier gates and functions only when authorized tags are presented. Provide AVI antennas at locations indicated per plan. (Transcore AI1620 SmartPass Reader System, or comparable product by approved equal). 1. System: Programmable, multiple code capability permitting, validating, or voiding of individual tags. 2. Reader: Proximity type (AI1620 SmartPass Reader).
3. Antenna: Ultra-high frequency remote antenna for automatic vehicle identification. Capable of 25-0 range. 4. Tags: Provide 750 tags.
2.06 TICKET DISPENSERS (TD) A General: Provide ticket dispenser units, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, consisting of base cabinet and cap housing, ticket printing and issuing mechanism, ticket magazine, control panel, and electrical switches. Verify number per plan. (Amano AGP-2070 Series Mag Stripe Ticket Dispenser). Cabinets: Shall be fabricated of a material that is strong and durable such as, but not limited to composite, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, or welded 12-gauge steel. Weld seams and grind smooth. All surfaces shall be corrosion resistant and exterior or cabinet shall be finished in a color chosen by the Owner. 1. Provide weatherproof gasketed access doors hinged away from traffic with flush mounted locks; furnish two keys for each unit. Fabricate cabinet cap with quick release latches to allow ticket loading and maintenance. Provide a flush-mounted lock in rear of cap, keyed the same as base cabinet lock. Equip unit with a removable ticket tray with a capacity of 5000 tickets. Provide units activated by a loop detector and pushbutton operation. Finish interior and exterior of cabinet with manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish over primer.
2.
3. 4. 5.
111200 - 7
Ticket Dispensing Mechanisms: Removable assembly, with plug-in-type electrical connections for easy maintenance. Provide a self-sharpening ticket cutter. Before dispensing, ticket shall be imprinted with time, date and sequential ticket number. 1. Time Indicator: Provide a 24-hour-cycle time indicator with an A.M. and P.M. clock mechanism. The ticket dispenser must have an electronic LCD display as an integral part of the design. a. Display must have at least a two line by twenty character backlit display. b. Programmable dusk to dawn feature to control backlight. c. Backlight must have capability to be illuminated when time, loop or manually activated. d. Ticket dispenser will offer the capability to display customer defined messages & greetings as a standard programmable feature.
2.
Tickets: Provide 100,000 one-color one-sided preprinted white mag stripe tickets.
2.07 PAY-IN-LANE EXIT TERMINAL (PS) A General: Each Pay-In-Lane and Pay-On-Foot Exit Terminal shall be capable of reading encoded tickets issued by ticket dispenser, computing parking fees, and accepting payment in cash or by credit card. Terminal shall operate automatically, completely un-staffed, 24 hrs/day with the following features: Provide self contained exit terminal mounted in the exit lane consisting of magnetic-stripe ticket readers, fee computers, displays and printers housed in a combined enclosure. See schedule and verify number per plan. (Amano McCann AGP 6800 Exit Pay Station and Amano McGann Pay-on-Foot Station AGP-7800).
System Performance: Capable of the following: 1. 2. Activated by vehicle loop detector. Compute parking fees based on entry times on ticket from ticket dispenser. Display fee on LCD monitor. Accept payment by cash and credit card. Compute change. Program timer for closing barrier gates.
3. 4. 5. 6. C
Inserting ticket into exit ticket reader results in the following actions: 1. Valid Exit Ticket Exit ticket reader captures ticket and automatically sends signal to raise barrier gates. Invalid Exit Ticket: Exit ticket reader computes and displays fee on
2.
111200 - 8
LCD screen. Gate arm will not be raised until correct fee has been paid. D Cabinets: Shall be fabricated of material that is strong and durable such as, but not limited to composite, stainless steel, aluminum alloy or welded 12gauge steel. Weld seams and grind smooth. All surfaces shall be corrosion resistant and exterior of cabinet shall be finished in a color chosen by the Owner. 1. Provide weatherproof, gasketed access doors with flush-mounted locks; furnish two keys for each unit, keyed alike.
2.08 PARKING FACILITY MANAGEMENT COMPUTER A Provide one small mini-tower computer capable of the following: 1. Processor: 2.66 GHZ Intel Core Duo 2 Processor 2. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or newer operating system Office Software: Microsoft Office XP Professional with Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Memory: 1GB Dual Channel DDR2 SDRAM at 667MHz - 2 DIMMs Keyboard: Enhanced Performance, USB (8 Hot Keys) Mouse: Logitech , USB, Optical (2-button, w/scroll) Modem: 56K,v.92 data/fax modem, PCI Monitor: 19-inch Analog flat panel Graphics Card: 256MB nVidia Geforce 7300LE TurboCache, dual monitor VGA capable
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Speakers: 30 Watt 2.1 stereo speakers 11. Hard Drive: 250GB Serial ATA 3Gb/s Hard Drive (7200RPM) 12. Floppy Drive: 3.5 inch 1.44MB Floppy Drive 13. CD-ROM Drive: 48X CDRW with Roxio Easy CD Creator 14. Ports: Two Serial and One Parallel 15. Digi-Board: 8 Port 16. Backup: Hard Drive and UPS Battery 2.09 PARKING FACILITY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A Provide manufacturer's standard software/licenses that are compatible with the facility computer system and that provide facility monitoring, supervision, and remote control of peripheral equipment from one or more selected locations. Provide the following modules: (McGann Software)
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 1. 2. 3.
111200 - 9
MPS 760 McGann Professional Count and Monitoring Software MPS 4052 Mcgann Access and Control Software McGann I/O Panel
EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Examine surfaces, substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements of other sections in which that related work is specified, and determine if surfaces, substrates, and conditions affecting performance of the work of this Section are satisfactory. Do not proceed with work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces, substrates, and conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION A Provide templates for anchor bolts and other items encased in concrete or below finished surfaces so as not to delay the Work.
3.03 INSTALLATION A General: Install parking control equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and placement drawings. 1. Coordinate placement of anchors and accessories encased in concrete with Division 3 Sections. B Automatic Barrier Gates: Anchor cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion anchors and mount barrier-gate arms. Loop Detectors: Cast-in wire loop according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to related equipment operated by detector. Ticket Dispensers, Attach cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion anchors. 1. 2. E Connect equipment to remote computer Load ticket dispenser with supply of tickets.
Access Control System: Mount per manufacturers specifications. 1. Ensure that reader and antenna are correctly installed to accurately read transponders presence.
Fee Computers: Install computers at locations indicated, including connecting to peripheral equipment.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Manufacturers Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B
111200 - 10
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Each electrical test and visual mechanical inspection shall be stated in NETA ATS Section 7.15 and compliance with test perimeters shall be certified. Operational test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, units shall be started to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Controls and safeties shall be tested and adjusted. Report and damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
2.
3.
Remove and replace parking control equipment where test results indicated it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A After installing clean finished surfaces, touch up shop-applied finishes as required to restore damaged areas. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure parking control equipment is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. Remove barrier-gates during the construction period to prevent damage, and install them immediately before Substantial Completion.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION A Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel on proper operation and maintenance of parking control equipment. Train personnel on procedures to follow if operation fails or malfunctions. Include 8 hours of training.
SCHEDULE 3.01 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE Provide parking control equipment for each lane as follows: Lane 1 (Entry Lane): (1) - Entry Station (TD) (1) - Card Reader (CR) (1) - Access Card System (AVI) (1) - Intercom (I) (2) - Vehicle Detectors (AL/CL) Lane 2 (Exit Lane): (1) - Pay-In-Lane Station (PS) (1) - Card Reader (CR) (1) - Access Card System (AVI) (1) - Intercom (I) (2) - Vehicle Detectors (AL/CL)
Lane 3 (Exit Lane):
(1) - Pay-In-Lane Station (PS) (1) - Card Reader (CR) (1) - Access Card System (AVI) (1) - Intercom (I)
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT (2) - Vehicle Detectors (AL/CL) Lobby (Grade Level): (2) - Pay-On-Foot Pay Stations
111200 - 11
END OF SECTION
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 3
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes electric traction passenger elevators. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry and for grouting elevator entrance frames installed in masonry walls. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for the following: a. b. c. d. 4. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. Divider beams. Hoist beams. Cants in hoistways made from steel sheet.
1.2 A. B.
3.
5. 6.
Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including disconnect switches at machine room door and standby power source, transfer switch, and connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer switch to controller. Division 16 Sections for telephone service for elevators. Division 16 Sections for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers.
1.3 A. B.
DEFINITIONS Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual,
142100 - 4
unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. C. 1.4 A. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for the following: 1. 2. B. Car enclosures and hoistway entrances. Operation, control, and signal systems.
Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control station and standby power operation control panel. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection. Samples for Verification: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal equipment; 3-inch- square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim members. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel.
C. D.
E.
F.
G. H. I.
Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized
1.5 A.
142100 - 5
representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cabs, and entrances, manufactured by a single manufacturer.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1. 1. Effective peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is less than 0.10 (seismic risk zones 0 and 1).
D.
Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Texas Accessibillity Standards and Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Handle according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration, or soiling. COORDINATION Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; machine beams if applicable; and electrical service, electrical outlets,
E.
1.6 A. B.
1.7 A.
B. C.
142100 - 6
lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms, and/or hoistways. 1.8 A. WARRANTY Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. 1.9 A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. 2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: Two hours or less.
B.
Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard five-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.2 A. KONE Inc. Otis Elevator Co. Schindler Elevator Corp. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where
142100 - 7
components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system. B. Elevator Machines: Provide variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines. Provide solid-state power converters. 1. 2. C. Provide nonregenerative system. Provide line filters or chokes to prevent electrical peaks or spikes from feeding back into building power system.
Fluid for Oil Buffers: If oil buffers are used, use only fire-resistant hydraulic fluid containing antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Hydro Safe (FR)" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc.
D.
Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Section. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials and fabrication. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. Guides: Provide roller guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. Pit Ladders: As required by Authorities having jurisdiction. OPERATION SYSTEMS General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each group of elevators as required to provide type of operation system indicated. Group Automatic Operation with Demand-Based Dispatching: Provide group automatic system that assigns cars to hall calls based on a dispatching program designed to minimize passenger waiting time. System automatically adjusts to changes in demand for different traffic conditions including heavy incoming, heavy two-way, heavy outgoing, and light off-hours as variations of normal two-way traffic. Group Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators and elevator groups where indicated:
E.
F. G. H. 2.3 A.
B.
C.
142100 - 8
1.
2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, cars are returned to a designated floor and parked with doors open. One car is returned at a time, with priority given to loaded cars. If a car cannot be returned after two attempts, it is removed from the system. When all cars have been returned or removed from the system, one car is automatically placed in service. If car selected for service cannot operate within 60 seconds, the system removes car from service and places another car in service. Cars can be manually put in service on standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at main lobby. Manual operation causes automatic operation to cease. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds an adjustable percentage of rated capacity, doors will begin closing. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while the car load is less than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls and predetermined weight can be adjusted. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car control station removes car from group operation and allows it to respond only to car calls. Key cannot be removed from keyswitch when car is in independent service. When in independent service, doors close only in response to door close button. Loaded-Car Bypass: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, car will respond only to car calls, not to hall calls. Distributed Parking: When cars are not required for response to calls, they are parked with doors closed, distributed in predetermined zones throughout the building. One zone shall include the main floor and adjacent floors; remaining floors shall be divided into approximately equal zones.
2.4 A.
DOOR REOPENING DEVICES Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy. FINISH MATERIALS General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish.
B.
2.5 A.
B.
142100 - 9
C. D. E. F. G.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD-3 including 2005 requirements for wear resistance, Type HGS for flat applications Type BKV for panel backing. CAR ENCLOSURES General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. 2. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1. Provide finished car including materials and finishes specified below.
2.6 A.
B.
Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. 2. 3. Subfloor: Underlayment grade, exterior plywood, 5/8-inch nominal thickness. Floor Finish: Resilient Flooring To be selected by Architect.. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's standard core with plastic-laminate panel backing and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread index of 75 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. Plastic-Laminate Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by laminating plastic laminate to exposed faces of enameled cold-rolled steel doors and covering edges with protective edge trim matching return panels. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick with integral sill support angles. Ceiling - Flush, Vandal Resistant Canopy: Provide flush, enameled steel canopy fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet. Provide solid diffuser, vandal resistant, fluorescent light fixture complying with ASME A17.1 flush mounted in the canopy. a. Canopy Color: Match Architects Sample.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9.
142100 - 10
10.
Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.
2.7 A.
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
B.
2.8 A.
SIGNAL EQUIPMENT Swing-Return Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations mounted on rear of hinged return panel adjacent to car door and with buttons, switches, controls, and indicator lights projecting through return panel but substantially flush with face of return panel. Provide full width, manufacturer's mini-swing not acceptable. 1. Mark buttons and switches with standard identification for required use or function that complies with ASME A17.1. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car control station, either integral with car control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Buttons: Stainless Steel with illuminated halos
2.
3. B.
Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: If required by
C.
142100 - 11
authorities having jurisdiction, provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm." D. Car Position Indicator: Provide digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 1. E. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.
Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing for each single elevator or group of elevators, but not less than one station for each four elevators in a group. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. 1. 2. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel. a. 3. Buttons: Stainless Steel with illuminated halos.
F.
If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 16.
G.
Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide the following: 1. Units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing.
H.
Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on each car.
I.
Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by ASME A17.1, where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed. For each elevator with doors that cannot be seen from switch location, provide illuminated signals that indicate when they are operational and when they are at the designated emergency return level with doors open. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having
J.
142100 - 12
jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 A. ELEVATORS Elevator Description: 1. Elevator Number(s): 1, 2, and 3. a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Elevators 1 and 2: Single Door at front. Elevator 3: Door at Front and Door at Rear.
Type: Geared traction. Machine Location: Machine room above hoistway. Rated Load: 3500 lb . Rated Speed: 350 fpm for elevators 1 and 2 and 450 fpm for elevator 3. Operation System: Group automatic operation. Auxiliary Operations: a. b. c. d. e. Standby power operation. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. Nuisance call cancel. Loaded-car bypass. Distributed parking.
8.
Car Enclosures: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. Inside Width: 80 inches for elevators 1 and 2 and 92 inches for elevator 3 from side wall to side wall. Inside Depth: 65 inches for elevators 1 and 2 and 65 1/2 inches for elevator 3 from back wall to front wall (return panels). Inside Height: 108 inches to underside of canopy, no suspended ceiling. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Door Faces (Interior): Plastic laminate. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. Ceiling: Flush, vandal resistant canopy with recessed flush vandal resistant fluorescent light fixture. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round, at rear of car for elevators 1 and 2 and at sides of car for elevator 3. Floor prepared to receive resilient tile (to be selected by Architect). Floor Thickness, Including Setting Materials: 1/4 inch or less above plywood subfloor.
9.
Hoistway Entrances: As follows:

142100 - 13
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 10. 11.
Width: 42 inches for elevators 1 and 2 and 48 inches for elevator 3. Height: 84 inches. Type: Single-speed center opening. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Sills: Aluminum, mill finish.
Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were found to be satisfactory. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2.
3.2 A. B.
INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to minimize transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby minimize structure-borne noise from elevator system. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.
C.
D.
142100 - 14
E.
Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing using integral support angles. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. Anchor Pit Ladders securely in locations acceptable to authorites having jurisdiction. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor.
F. G. H. I.
2. 3. 3.3 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. PROTECTION Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
B.
3.4 A.
142100 - 15
7.
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3.5 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
B.
C.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: General: This Section specifies several categories of provisions for mechanical work, including: 1) Certain adaptive expansions of requirements specified in Division 1; 2) General performance requirements within the mechanical systems as a whole; and 3) General work to be performed as mechanical work, because of its close association. Drawings: Refer to the Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings for graphic representations, schedules, and notations showing mechanical and plumbing work. Specifications: Refer to this Division 15 for the primary technical specifications of mechanical and plumbing work. Work Included: This Work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, apparatus, and appurtenances required for complete installation of operating heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, and fire protection systems as indicated and specified, in place and ready for service. Work of Other Sections: Requirements given within this Section apply to the Work of all Sections of this Division. The actual performance of the Work stays within the Section in which it occurs; but subject to the requirements of this Section to the extent applicable. Finish painting is specified in Division 9. Prime and protective painting are included in the Work of this Division.All black iron and steel piping, fittings, and accessories exposed to outside conditions shall be painted with an epoxy chromate primer. All equipment furnished under this Division shall be factory-finished. Any damage to this finish during shipment, storage, and installation shall be repainted, both prime and finish, with the same paint as used by the equipment supplier. Concrete housekeeping pads and supporting structures are specified under Division 3. Provide pads under each piece of floor-mounted mechanical equipment, and size so that pad extends 4 inches beyond each edge in plan. Final dimensional requirements will be determined by the equipment furnished. Pads shall be a minimum of 4 inches high.
MEJ & Associates, Inc. 0932
15010 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Pits for sewage ejectors, storm water, and other pumps are specified in other Divisions. Correct dimensions and locations shall be the responsibility of this Division. Subsurface drainage up to and including pump pits are specified in other Divisions. Correct dimensions and locations shall be the responsibility of this Division. DESIGN CONDITIONS: General: Components of the heating and air conditioning systems have been designed and selected according to the following design conditions: Indoor Conditions: Office and Lobbies Summer 75 F & 60% RH (max) 85 F Winter 75 F (no humidity control) 65 F
Elevator Machine Rooms Outdoor Conditions: Summer: Winter: 98 F DB* 24 F DB* *
(100F& 78F WB for outside air and fluid coolers)*
Values listed are representative. Maximum coincident values are determined by load program.
COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL WORK: General: Refer to Division 1 for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the mechanical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and electrical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Arrange mechanical work in a neat, well organized manner with services running parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7 feet-0 inches overhead clearance where possible. Prior to installation, notify Engineer of locations in accessible areas where pipe or conduit will be installed less than 7'-0" above the floor in areas without ceilings. It is intended that there be a 7 clear zone above the ceiling for the installation of lighting fixtures and other equipment. Refer to the Drawings for a detail of space distribution in the ceiling plenum. Clearly show on the ductwork shop drawings any areas where an 7 clear zone cannot be maintained. The Contractor and its sub-contractors shall coordinate their work so as to install equipment as high as possible. Where equipment is installed that has
Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 05/17/10 MEJ & Associates, Inc. 0932
15010 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
limitations on its vertical location (e.g., storm drains) it shall be installed first after careful coordination with all other trades. Failure to properly coordinate the installation of the Work may result in the removal and re-installation of portions of completed Work to achieve the results described above. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance, and for proper Code clearances. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of mechanical work (equipment). Coordination Drawings: For location where several elements of mechanical (or combined mechanical and electrical) work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the installation. Coordination Drawings shall include but not be limited to Elevator Equipment rooms, Ceiling Plenums, and additional areas as required. Ceiling Plenums shall define planes of work and clearly indicate allotted space for light fixtures, sprinkler pipe, duct, piping, and other possible obstructions. Prepare and submit coordination drawings prior to purchase-fabrication installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. Mechanical equipment shown on the drawing shall be the same equipment and size as shown on equipment shop drawings. Any sleeves and major piping runs shall be shown on the drawings. CODES, PERMITS, AND FEES: General: Comply with the most recently revised versions of all applicable laws, rules, regulations, and ordinances of Federal, State, and Local Authorities. Modifications required by the above said Authorities shall be made without additional charge to the Owner. Where alterations to and deviations from the Contract Documents are required by said Authority, report the requirements and secure approval before starting work. Precedence: Where Contract Document requirements are in excess of Code requirements and are permitted under the Code, the Contract Documents shall govern. FEES AND PERMITS: This Contractor shall secure all permits, licenses and inspections required for his work, and shall pay all fees in accordance with such permits, licenses, and inspections. SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION: General: Become familiar with the Drawings and Specifications, examine the premises, and understand the conditions under which the Contract shall be performed.
15010 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Site: Be informed of the existing conditions, verify locations of existing equipment, and determine exact requirements and provisions for connection. DRAWINGS: General: The Drawings are schematic in nature and indicate approximate locations of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and plumbing equipment, fixtures, and piping systems, except where specific locations are noted and dimensioned on the Drawings. All items are shown approximately to scale and attempt to show how these items should be integrated into the building construction. Locate all items by on-the-job measurements, conformance with drawings and code requirements. Cooperate with other trades to ensure project completion as indicated. Location: Prior to locating diffusers, grilles, and other exposed air devices, and plumbing fixtures, fire hose cabinets, and plumbing items, obtain approval as to exact location. Locations shall not be determined by scaling drawings. Plumbing fixtures, fire hose racks, and cabinets shall be mounted at the heights directed by the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for costs of redoing work of trades necessitated by failure to comply with this requirement. DISCREPANCIES: Clarification: Clarification shall be obtained before submitting a proposal for the Work under this Division as to discrepancies or omissions from the Contract Documents, or questions as to the intent thereof. Contractor Agreement: Consideration will not be granted for misunderstanding of the amount of work to be performed. Tender of a proposal conveys full Contractor agreement of the items and conditions specified, shown on the drawings, scheduled, and/or required by the nature of the project. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: Conference: Upon the award of this Contract, and prior to commencing any work, the Contractor and his designated major subcontractors, shall confer with the Architect and Engineer concerning the Work under this Contract. The conference shall be at a mutually agreeable place and time. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: General: Maintain project record documents at the site as specified in Division 1. Site Prints: Maintain one set of the Contract Documents at the job site which shall be used for recording the final size, location, interrelation, and similar items of all work under this Division. This set of Documents shall be corrected daily as the Work progresses.
15010 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
"As Built" Record Drawings: The Record Drawing shall indicate exact "as built" locations of all concealed piping, valves, and other equipment and devices. Record dimensions shall clearly and accurately delineate the work as installed; locations shall be suitable identified by at least two dimensions to permanent structures. Prior to final acceptance of the Work of this Division, the Contractor shall submit properly certified "Record Drawings" to the Architect for review and shall make changes, corrections, or additions as the Architect may require to the "Record Drawings". Upon approval, the Contractor shall have all data transferred to record sepias, which shall be scanned and submitted to the Architect for final review (both electronic and hard copies). Accuracy: The project record documents shall indicate exact locations of all concealed and visible piping, valves, ductwork, and equipment that are not installed at locations shown. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS: General: Refer to Division 1 for general administrative and procedural requirements related to compliance with codes and standards. Standards: This work shall meet the standards set forth in the applicable portions of the following recognized codes and standards: American Standard Codes, ASME, AGA, AMCA, ASA, ANSI, ASHRAE, and ARI. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Factory Mutual (FM). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). National Electrical Code (NEC). National Electrical Contractors' Association (NECA). National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). National Plumbing Code (NPC). Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Uniform Building Code, Latest Adopted Edition. Uniform Mechanical Code, Latest Adopted Edition. Uniform Plumbing Code, Latest Adopted Edition. BOCA Basic Building Code, 1981 Edition. City of Austin Building Code SMACNA State of Texas Texas Senate Bill 773 (Barrier Free Construction). SUBMITTALS: General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements concerning work-related submittals (refer to other Division -Sections for administrative submittals). Shop drawings shall have the Engineer's final review prior to equipment ordering or
15010 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
fabrication. All reports or information requiring certification shall be certified by an authorized officer of the manufacturer, or testing agency. Obtain, check, certify, and submit complete Shop Drawings and product data for all materials and equipment specified herein. Furnish certified shop drawings showing dimensions, loading details, anchor bolt locations, and all inserts required for each piece of equipment set on concrete in sufficient time to cause no delay in the Work. Certify that data and details set forth on each shop drawing complies with the Contract Documents for this Project. Unless certified, shop drawings will not be reviewed, and will be returned unchecked to the Contractor. Check all materials and equipment after their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer's office each time a shop drawing, product data, and/or samples are submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling his Work. The Engineer's review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be contained therein, or for deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents. Noting some errors, but overlooking others, does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings, the Contract Documents shall govern the work. Electronic Media: Electronic Media for the project is available in AutoCad. Copies of the Electronic Media will be available on CD-ROM disks. The Electronic Media is for the intended use of this project only and shall not be used by any party, in whole or in part, for any other project. Contractor shall have an acceptance period of 10 working days to review and accept CAD files delivered. The Electronic Media is intended to assist the Contractor in the preparation of shop drawings for this project and is to be considered as guide only. The Electronic Media as provided does not relieve the Contractor of any contract responsibilities as defined in the contract documents and specifications. The Electronic Media provided shall be modified as required by the Contractor to reflect only the items being submitted and shall be the Contractors responsibilities for completeness and coordination as defined by the contract documents and specifications. The Contractor agrees to provide the Owner and Architect/Engineer an Electronic Media copy of the approved shop drawings in the same format as the provided backgrounds. The Contractor agrees to warrant the CAD files as submitted for a 60 day acceptance period, and any CAD files not accepted shall be resubmitted.
15010 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
The Contractor agrees to compensate the Engineer for time and materials associated for the Electronic Media requested by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit all requests in writing to the Engineer for Electronic Media. Shop Drawings and Product Data Brochures: Submittals shall contain all necessary information for review, including additional information when requested. Product Data Brochures shall contain only information relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. Unless all irrelevant information is deleted or unless relevant information is clearly marked, including all performances curves, sound data, recommended installation details, accessories, ratings, appurtenances, and sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with the Contract Documents, including proper sizes, clearances, dimensions, capacities, materials, and finishes as required, submittals will be returned marked "Revised and Resubmit". Verify that the equipment will fit the available space. List on all submittals any deviations from equipment or materials specified. Where more than two reviews are required for a given submittal (i.e. two rejections), the submitting contractor will be invoiced for extra services at a rate of $150.00 per hour for the review of the third and subsequent submittals. Shop drawings will not be released by the Engineer until the invoice for extra services has been paid. Submittals for the Work shall include, but not be limited to: Fluid Coolers: Include dimensioned drawings of fluid coolers showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all capacities, electrical characteristics, weights, and pad requirements. Relief air and intake hoods. Self-Contained Water-Cooled Fan Coil Units and all accessories: Include dimensioned drawings of fan coil units and accessories showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all fan curves, electrical characteristics, filter requirements, coils, weights, mounting requirements, and accessories. Lobby base-board hot water heating coils, electric boiler, pump and compression tank. Fans: Include dimensioned drawings of fans showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all fan curves, electrical characteristics, filter requirements, weights, and curb or mounting requirements. Fan coil units: Include dimensioned drawings of fan coil units showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all fan curves, electrical characteristics, filter requirements, coils, weights, and mounting requirements. Unit heaters: Include dimensioned drawings of unit heaters showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all capacities, electrical and/or gas characteristics,
15010 - 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
weights, and mounting requirements. Coils. Air filters. Variable frequency drives: Include dimensioned drawings of variable frequency drives accurately showing scaled drives, their layout, and relation to associated equipment. Piping materials. Valves and fittings. Pipe hangers and supports. Gages, thermometers, and meters. Pressure and temperature taps. Ductwork and plenums (fabrication drawings): Include dimensioned drawings for fabrication drawings accurately showing scaled ductwork and plenums, their layout, and relation to associated equipment or systems. Include verification that the ductwork and plenums have been coordinated with other systems (e.g., plumbing and electrical). Access doors. Fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers. Constant volume fan-powered mixing boxes: Include dimensioned drawings of constant volume fan-powered mixing boxes and accessories showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all fan curves, electrical characteristics, filter requirements, weights, mounting requirements, and accessories. Variable volume boxes: Include dimensioned drawings of variable volume boxes and accessories showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all fan curves, electrical characteristics, weights, mounting requirements, and accessories. Domestic hot water equipment: Include dimensioned drawings of domestic hot water equipment showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all capacities, electrical characteristics, weights, and pad/mounting requirements. Electric drinking water fountains. Grilles, diffusers, registers, and similar air distribution devices: Include dimensioned drawings of grilles, diffusers, registers, and similar air distribution devices and accessories showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all air and sound
15010 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
criteria, finish, mounting requirements, and accessories. Ductwork flexible joints. Flexible ductwork. Thermal insulation. Automatic temperature controls and interlock wiring diagrams: Include shop drawings showing automatic temperature controls and interlock wiring diagrams. Include certification that this Division has fully coordinated all automatic temperature controls and interlock wiring to work of other Divisions. Submit all temperature control components and accessories, system operation, hardware, software, wiring diagrams, electrical requirements, dimensioned drawings of equipment, equipment locations, and equipment mounting requirements. Vibration isolation. Sound isolation. Plumbing fixtures and trim. Roof and floor drains. Fire protection systems, fire department hose valves, pumps, sprinkler piping and cabinets: Include shop drawings showing fire protection systems, fire department hose valves, pumps and accessories, and dimensioned drawings of the system. Include certification that this Division has fully coordinated all fire protection systems alarm system signal and control connections to work of other Divisions, including but not limited to, automatic fire alarm system, automatic temperature controls, and elevators. Complete shop drawings shall be submitted to the Austin Fire Department for approval. Shop drawings submitted for review shall bear the approval stamp of all authorities having jurisdiction. Motor furnished with equipment or as separate items Coordination Drawings: As required by Section 15010. Housekeeping Pads: Include location and dimensions of housekeeping pads, including blockouts and anchor bolts. Firestops: Include all firestop materials for the project, indicating intended use and UL fire rating where applicable. Certifications and Test Reports: Submit 7 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. Prior to
15010 - 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
conducting tests and certifications, submit proposed test procedures and recording forms for review by the Architect. Necessary test and certifications are described under the appropriate section of this Division 15 unless set forth hereinbelow. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: Air Balance No asbestos or PCB's installed in Work of this Contract. Plumbing systems Fire protection sprinkler system Warranties (Guarantees): Submit 7 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices, and materials (this includes 2 copies for maintenance manuals). Extended Warranty: When the manufacturer offers an extended warranty for an item or system, this warranty, and all benefits accruing thereunder, shall be transferred to, or written in the name of the Owner. Maintenance Manuals: Submit 4 copies; including complete description of each system, item of equipment, and apparatus provided under this Division, including ratings, capacities, performances, data and curves, characteristics identifying name and number, locations, and wiring diagrams; temperature control wiring diagrams complete with instructions outlining each sequential step in the start-up and shutdown of the heating/cooling system, and include precautions and instructions for servicing each item of the system; maintenance and operating instructions; fully detailed parts lists, including all numbered parts, of each item of equipment and apparatus provided under this Division; manufacturer's printed instructions describing operation, service, maintenance, and repair of each item of equipment and apparatus; typewritten record of all tests made of materials, equipment, and systems included under this Division and such records shall state the dates the tests were conducted, name(s) of person(s) making witnessing the tests, and citing any unusual conditions relevant to the tests; and copies of all other submittals required by this Division 15. Organize each maintenance manual with Table of Contents, Index, and thumb-tab marked for each section of information. Bind in 2-inch, 3-ring binders, vinyl covered, with pockets to contain folded sheets. Properly label contents on spine and face of binder. Samples: Submit 2 samples, upon request, of mechanical items and materials for review by the Architect. Samples will be returned upon written request of the Contractor. Approval: Materials installed or work performed without approval of materials shall be done at the risk of the Contractor and the cost of removal of such material or work which is judged unsatisfactory for any reason, shall be at the expense of the
15010 - 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Contractor. Tools: Provide and deliver to the Owner's authorized representative any special tools required for maintenance of systems, equipment, and apparatus installed under this Division prior to requesting final acceptance of the installation. TEMPORARY FACILITIES: General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements on temporary facilities. MECHANICAL PRODUCTS: General: Refer to Division 1 sections for general requirements on products, materials, equipment, and substitutions. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the mechanical work, and with other work requiring interface with the mechanical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed mechanical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work. Determine in advance of purchase that equipment and materials proposed for installation will fit into the confines indicated, leaving adequate clearance as required by applicable codes, and for adjustment, repair, or replacement. Substitutions: Materials and products of manufacturers other than those listed in this Specification require approval of the Architect in writing prior to submittal of shop drawings and product data. SCOPE SPECIFICATIONS: These Specifications are issued in conjunction with the Drawings which indicate that general scope of the Project in terms of the architectural design concept, the dimensions of the building, the type of structural, mechanical, electrical, and utility systems, and outline notes of major architectural elements of construction. As "Scope" documents, the Drawings and Specifications do not necessarily indicate or describe all work required for the full performance and completion of the Work. Contracts may be let on the basis of such documents, only if approved by the Architect, with the understanding that the Contractor is to furnish all items required for proper completion of the Work without adjustment to Contract Price. It is intended that the Work be of sound and quality construction and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the inclusion of adequate amounts to cover installation of all items indicated, described, or reasonably implied. Decisions of the Architect as to the items of work reasonably included within the "scope" of these Specifications shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
15010 - 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
PART 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION SPACE REQUIREMENTS: General: Determine in advance of purchase that the equipment and materials proposed for installation will fit into the confines indicated, leaving adequate clearances for adjustment, repair, or replacement. Clearance: Allow adequate space for clearance in accordance with the Code requirements, and the requirements of the local inspection department. Responsibility: Since space requirements and equipment arrangement vary for each manufacturer, the responsibility for initial access and proper fit rests with the Contractor. Review: Final arrangements of equipment to be installed shall be subject to the Architect's review. MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP: General: All materials and equipment shall be new and of best grade and quality, and standard products of reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials and equipment. Workmanship: Work shall be executed and all materials installed in accordance with the best practice of the trades in a thorough, substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen, presenting a neat appearance when completed. Manufacturer's Recommendations: With exceptions as specified and/or indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean, and condition manufactured articles, materials, and equipment per manufacturer's current printed recommendations. Keep copies of such printed recommendations at job site, and make them available as required. EQUIPMENT SCHEDULED: General: The design is based on the equipment scheduled; therefore, equipment furnished by other manufacturers named in the Specifications shall have prior approval of the Engineer. Materials and equipment shall be new and in good condition. The commercially standard items of equipment, and the specified names mentioned herein are intended to identify standards of quality and performance necessary for the proper functioning of the Work. Since manufacturing methods vary, reasonable minor variations are expected; however, performance and material requirements are the minimum standard selections other than those scheduled, the Contractor shall bear all costs for any structural and/or Architectural modifications required for substituted equipment.
15010 - 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING: Piping: General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, color-coded, plastic-sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. Markers shall indicate service or system according to the symbols, or as directed. Markers shall incorporate flow directional arrows. Letters and arrows shall be black on color-coded background conforming to ANSI A13.1. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 inches including insulation (if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4-inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 inches. Installation: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting, or other covering or finish, including finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting and prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Location: Locate pipe markers and color bands near each major control device, on 20-foot centers on straight pipe runs, at entries to walls and floors, and where pipe enters an accessible area. IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT: Equipment: Provide plastic laminate nameplates, or stenciled lettering, on all items of heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing equipment such as water heaters, roof top air handling units, fans and similar items. Size shall be 1/16-inch thick by width (minimum 3 inches) and height (minimum 1 inch) necessary for identification wording and number. Lettering shall be 1/2-inch high for double line and 7/8-inch high for single line. Nameplate shall have black letters (core) engraved in a white background (face). Nameplates shall include the name and item number for each piece of equipment. Permanently attach nameplate to equipment in conspicuous places with self-tapping stainless steel screws, or contact adhesive where screws cannot be used. Standard Symbols and Words: Symbols and abbreviations shall be those shown on the Contract Drawings. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Nameplate Corp., W.H. Brady Co., or Westline Co. Prohibited Markings: Markings which are intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from which the material has been obtained are prohibited for
15010 - 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
installation within the public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices which bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters' Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of mechanical facilities. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre-printed or hand printed. Tags shall convey the message example: "DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BURNER IS OPERATING". PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: General: Ensure that all mechanical equipment, devices, and materials arrive at the site in good condition, intact in factory package or crate. Any equipment found to be damaged shall be removed from the project site. Storage: Store all mechanical equipment and materials in factory containers or package until ready for use. Storage facility shall be a clean, dry, indoor space which provides protection against weather. Avoid damage by condensation by providing temporary heating when required. Handling: Handle all mechanical equipment and materials carefully to prevent breakage, denting, or scoring of the finish. Damaged materials shall be removed from the project site. CUTTING AND PATCHING: General: Place all equipment in time to avoid cutting new construction. If cutting and patching is required, comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Except as individually authorized by the Architect/Engineer, cutting-and-patching of mechanical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted. Approval: If holes or sleeves are not properly installed and cutting and patching becomes necessary, it shall be done at no additional expense to the Owner. Undertake no cutting or patching without first securing approval. All patching shall create a surface which is structurally and aesthetically equal to the surface surrounding the area patched. EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK: General: The work hereunder includes whatever excavating and backfilling is
15010 - 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
necessary to install the mechanical work. Coordinate the mechanical work with other work in the same area, including excavating and backfilling, dewatering, flood protection provisions, other temporary facilities, other underground services (existing and new), landscape development, paving, and floor slabs on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavating and backfilling. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the applicable provisions of Division 2 for mechanical work excavating and backfilling. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before proceeding with the Work. Replacement of Other Work: Where it is necessary to remove and replace landscape work, pavement, flooring, and similar exposed finish work, engage the original Installer to install the replacement work. If the work existed prior to the work of this Contract, engage only experienced and expert firms and tradespersons to replace the work. ROTATING SHAFTS: General: Shafts for rotating equipment, such as fans, shall be designed, sized, and fabricated so that the shaft will not pass through the first critical speed when accelerating from rest to normal operating speed. This provision shall include the effect of the driven equipment, such as fan blades and related appurtenances, that may influence performance. BELT AND COUPLING GUARDS: General: Provide metal belt guards for all belt-driven equipment. Guards shall be constructed sufficiently rigid to provide the required protection and shall be noise free when the equipment is in operation. Provide coupling guards for all flexible couplings. Coupling guards and belt guards may be perforated metal to allow visual inspection. Belt guards shall have openings to allow measurement of pulley RPM without removal of the guard. NOISE AND VIBRATION: General: Warrant the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and their component parts to operate without objectionable noise or vibration. Noise from systems or equipment which results in noise within occupied spaces above the recommended noise criteria (NC) curves (refer to ASHRAE Handbook) shall be considered objectionable. Vibration shall not be apparent to the senses in occupied areas of the building. Objectionable noise, vibration, or transmission thereof to the building shall be corrected. Sound Testing: Equipment shall be sound tested as specified in the individual Sections. The test data shall be expressed in sound power levels with decibels
15010 - 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
referenced to ten to the negative twelfth power watts, and in octave bands as set forth in ANSI Standard S1.6-1967. The sound testing shall be performed in a reverberant room. The room effect defined as the sound power level (db re ten to the negative twelfth power watts) minus sound pressure level (db re 0.002 microbar) shall be established at 10 db. The additive "allowance for multiple air outlets" for the purpose of the sound test shall be considered as 5 db in determining the sound power level per air terminal. The final sound pressure level test results shall be based on the above requirements, and shall not exceed the noise criteria curve limitations specified herein. Noise Level: Except in special areas listed separately, the noise level in occupied spaces shall be equal to, or less than, the "highest value in the range" of the noise criteria curves for the particular space in accordance with Table 19, Chapter 32 of the 1984 "Systems" Edition of the ASHRAE Guide and Data Book. The noise criteria values shall be based on ANSI Standard S1.6-1967 octave bands, and a sound pressure level in decibels referenced to 0.002 microbars. Sound levels within the occupied spaces must meet the criteria described above with all building, wall partition, floor and ceiling construction in place. The attenuation through boundary construction of equipment rooms must be considered in selecting equipment for acceptable noise level.
MECHANICAL WORK CLOSEOUT: General: Refer to Division 1 for general closeout requirements. Maintain a daily log of operational data on mechanical equipment and systems through the closeout period; record hours of operation, assigned personnel, power consumption, and similar information; submit copy to Owner. Coordination with Electrical Work: Coordinate closeout operations with closeout of electrical systems, elevators, and other power-consuming equipment. Support Services: Test run mechanical equipment in coordination with test runs of electrical systems. Clean and lubricate operational equipment. Instruct Owner's operating personnel thoroughly in the operation, sequencing, maintenance, and safety/emergency provisions of the mechanical systems. Turn over the operations to Owner;s personnel at the time(s) of substantial completion. Until the time of final acceptance of the total Work of the Contract, respond promptly with consultation and services to assist Owner's personnel with operation of mechanical system. CLEANING, ADJUSTING, AND START-UP: Start-Up Services: Where specified for any individual item of heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing equipment, provide a factory authorized representative for testing, start-up of equipment, and instruction of Owner's operating personnel. Certify that these services have been performed by including a properly executed invoice for these services or a letter from the manufacturer.
15010 - 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Lubrication: Provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts. Extend a lubrication tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and suitably identify it where lubrication fittings are concealed or inaccessible. Lubricate all parts requiring lubrication until final acceptance by the Owner. FINAL REVIEW: General: Upon completion of the Work, perform a final test of the entire system. The system shall be operating properly with all water and air volumes balanced and all temperature controls adjusted. After the final test, any changes or corrections noted as necessary for the Work to comply with these Specifications and/or the Drawings, shall be accomplished without delay in order to secure final acceptance of the Work. The date for the final test shall be sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion date to permit execution, before expiration of the Contract, of any adjustments or alterations which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment. Any such modifications shall be completed within the number of days allotted for completion and shall be of such time duration as necessary to ensure proper functioning of adjusted and altered items. Retests shall not relieve the Contractor of completion date responsibility. Certificates, including certificates of occupancy from local authorities, and documents required herein, shall be completely in order and presented to the Engineer at least 1 week prior to the review. The final review is not intended to be a completion list for the contractor. The systems shall be complete and tested by the contractor and city prior to Engineers review. If the systems are not complete, and the contractor requires more than two reviews for a given system or area (i.e. two rejections), then the requesting contractor will be invoiced for extra services at a rate of $150.00 per hour and reimbursable expenses for the review of the third and subsequent field visits. Finial review reports will not be released by the Engineer until the invoice for extra services has been paid. Qualified Person: Individuals knowledgeable of the systems and persons approved by the Engineer, shall be present at this final inspection to demonstrate the system and prove the performance of the equipment. ALTERNATES: General: Provide add or deduct prices for mechanical alternates as listed in Division 1. END OF SECTION 15010
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK
15015 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15015 - ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ELECTRIC MOTORS: General: Motor voltages shall be as follows, unless specified otherwise: 3/4 HP and larger - 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz. Smaller than 3/4 HP - 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 hz. Start-up: All motors shall be started across-the-line, unless specified otherwise. All motors shall have copper windings. Motors shall be selected with low starting current and shall be designed for continuous duty to attain the running torque and pull-in torque required to suit the load. All motors shall be energy saver type in compliance with IEEE test method 113B. All motors shall be single speed of speed scheduled on drawings, and shall have standard dripproof enclosures, unless otherwise specified. All motors exposed to the weather shall be of the totally enclosed, fan cooled, or totally enclosed, air-over type. All motors shall be rated at 1.15 service factor. Motor shall have sealed-type ball bearings, unless noted otherwise. Field-lubricated motors shall have grease fittings. A field-lubricated motor is one with the bearing cage drilled and tapped with a plug to accommodate a grease fitting. All dripproof motors shall conform to NEMA dimensional Standards, Type B, 40 degree C insulation. TEFC, TEAO, and TENV shall conform to NEMA dimensional standards, Type F, 40 degree C insulation. Motor main frame and end bells shall be constructed of cast-iron on poly-phase motors. Nameplate: A motor nameplate shall be securely affixed to each motor, and shall clearly indicate the class of insulation, winding material, and service factor, in addition to the usual electrical data. Motor Requirements: Refer to various Sections of this Division for additional motor requirements. Single Phase Motors: Single phase motors shall be capacitor start with starting, pull-in, and running characteristics selected to suit the load served. Motors except TEFC and TENV types, shall have class "A" insulation which limits the temperature
15015 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
rise to 60 degree C with a service factor of 1.15 when temperature is determined by the thermometer measuring method or 90 degree C with class "B" insulation and a service factor of 1.15 as determined by the resistance measuring method. All Totally enclosed fan-cooled and totally enclosed air-over single and three-phase motors shall have a service factor of 1.0, class "F" insulation, epoxy coated, cadmium plated hardware and cast iron housings. Manufacturers: Provide motors manufactured by the following: Baldor Century/Gould General Electric Louis Allis Reliance U.S. Westinghouse Energy Efficient Motors: All motors over 5 H.P. shall be premium energy efficient type. Motors shall have a minimum efficiency as follows:
Horsepower 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 Horsepower 5 7.5 - 10 15 20 - 25 30 - 40 50 - 100
Single Speed 90.2% 91.0% 91.7% 92.4% 93.0% 93.0% 93.6% 94.1% 94.1% 93.6% 94.1% 94.1% Efficiency 90% 91% 92% 93% 94% 95%
Minimum Efficiency Variable 88.5% 91.7% 91.7% 92.4% 93.0% 94.1% 94.5% 94.5% 95.5% 95.4% 95.4% 95.8%
15015 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Motor efficiency shall be based upon dynamometer testing per IEEE 112 Test Standard, Method B, as set forth by NEMA MG 1-12.53 standard for efficiency testing. Motors shall be Baldor Super-E motors or an approved equal. Motor Controllers: Motor controllers shall be furnished and installed under Division 16, except controllers furnished as an integral part of a piece of equipment. All starters shall conform to the requirements of Division 16. Controllers furnished as an integral part of equipment shall be rigidly mounted on steel members. Variable Frequency Drives: Variable frequency drives shall be furnished by Division 15 and installed by Division 16. Refer to Division 16, Section 16490, for variable frequency drive specifications. All variable frequency drives shall conform to the requirements of Division 16.
PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL: General: Motors shall be leveled, set in true angular and concentric alignment with driven equipment, and bolted firmly to the motor base, if not mounted on equipment. Motors factory-mounted on equipment shall be checked for alignment to driven equipment, and mounting bolts shall be checked to ensure bolts are tightly fastened. END OF SECTION 15015
SCOPE OF WORK
16010 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15020 - SCOPE OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: General: Provide all labor, materials, tools, machinery, equipment, appliances, and services necessary to complete the specified mechanical work of this Division. Coordinate Work with other trades to prevent conflicts without impeding job progress. Utility Charges: The Contractor shall pay all fees, tap charges, meter charges, and special fees assessed by the local utilities or local authorities. Work Included: The Work includes, but is not limited to, the following systems, equipment, and services: Water source heat pumps: Fan section with motor Cooling coils Compressors Filters Controls Vibration isolation, insulation, and drain piping. Package Fan Coil Units (air-cooled and water-cooled): Integral controls Drain pans Drain piping Condenser water piping Air distribution systems:
SCOPE OF WORK
16010 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Sheet metal ductwork Combination Fire/Smoke dampers Fire Dampers Grilles, registers, and ceiling outlets Insulation Acoustical treatment of ducts Sound attenuating equipment (lined duct, elbows and transfer ducts). Automatic temperature controls systems: All wiring to interconnect and interface components DDC control devices Electric controls and damper operators Various relays and sensors. Software and hardware. Ventilating systems: Exhaust fans Dampers and similar items. Plumbing system: Plumbing fixtures and trim Domestic hot water supply piping Domestic cold water supply piping, including connections to the water service Domestic electric water heaters Sanitary waste piping, including connection to sanitary sewer system
SCOPE OF WORK
16010 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Storm drain piping, including roof drains, overflow drains, risers and connection to storm sewer system Floor drains Sewer and water main extensions Insulation, controls, safety devices, vibration isolation, and similar items Fire Protection system: Fire Pumps Fire Department connections Automatic sprinkler systems Alarms and flow switches Connection to water mains. Connection of all equipment furnished under other Divisions. Connection of any equipment furnished by the Owner and indicated on the Plans. All water services. All sewer services. All water treatment. Balancing and adjusting of mechanical systems as specified herein. TENANT ALLOWABLE: The Contractor shall include in the base bid tenant allowables if so directed by the Owner's representative or the Architect. Temperature Sensors: Provide room sensors with a minimum of 30 feet of spare control wiring coiled in the ceiling plenum above each control zone (i.e., near the center of the area being controlled). Sensors shall be operational (i.e., complete with wiring and final connection to their respective devices). Installation of sensors in final tenant location shall be part of future tenant improvement contract; do not include in base contract. Air Balance: Complete final balancing of interior zone supply and return air systems. Balancing procedures shall be as specified in Section entitled "Testing", Balancing
SCOPE OF WORK
16010 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
and Adjusting". Balance supply and return grilles provided as part of this Contract to air quantities indicated. For terminal units with no secondary ductwork, provide sufficient downstream static loss (e.g., duct extension with orifice) to set scheduled airflows and demonstrate proper operation of terminal unit at scheduled static pressure. TENANT AREA COMPLETION: General: The areas shown on the Drawings shall be completed under this Contract. END OF SECTION 1502
MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
150600- 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
SECTION 15060 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide complete operating mechanical and plumbing piping systems including all pipe, tube, fittings, and appurtenances, as indicated and in compliance with these Specifications. Applications: Applications of piping systems include, but are not limited to, the systems as listed below: Working Pressure 150/300 50/300 150 150/350 ---Operating Temperatures 50 to 105 55 to 80 90 to 120 55 to 80 40 to 60 ---
System* Condenser Water System Domestic Cold Water Domestic Hot Water Fire Protection Condensate Drainage Sanitary Drainage Storm Drainage QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders, and operators in accordance with ANSI B3.1.1, Paragraph 127.5, for shop and job site welding of piping work. Make welded joints on the piping system with continuous welds, without backing rings, and with pipe ends beveled before welding. Gas cuts shall be true and free from burned metal. Before welding, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned. The piping shall be carefully aligned and no weld metal shall project inside the pipe. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PIPING MATERIALS: General: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint, grade, size, and weight (wall thickness, schedule, or class) indicated for each service. Comply with applicable governing
150600- 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
regulations and industry standards. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 black or hot dipped galvanized as specified. Pipe shall be manufactured by one of the manufacturers listed in the latest edition of the API. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type "K", "L", or "M" copper water tube as defined by the Copper and Brass Research Association. Ductile-Iron Pipe: ANSI A21.51, Class 150 with bell and spigot ends for push-on joints. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, standard weight, hub and spigot type. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe: CISPI 301-78, standard weight with spigot bead ends for coupling assembly. PVC Pipe [Direct Burial Only]: AWWA C900, ASTM D-1869, E-474, ASTM D-1599. PIPE/TUBE FITTINGS: General: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class, and pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe, tube, valve, and equipment connections. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations, industry standards, and, where applicable, with pipe manufacturer's instructions for selections. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, Class 125 or 250, black or galvanized as specified, including bolting and gasketing. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4 or ASTM A126, Class 125 or 250, black galvanized as specified. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150 or Class 300, black or galvanized as specified. Malleable Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.39; select for proper piping fabrication and service requirements including style, end connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze, or brass), plain or galvanized as specified. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing, buttweld end connections and raised-face. Forged-Steel Socket-Welding and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, rated to match schedule of connected pipe.
150600- 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. Cast-Iron Drainage Fittings:ANSI B16.22 galvanized with pitched threaded ends. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe, except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1/2-inch. Do not thread nipples full length (no all-thread nipples). Wrought-Copper/Bronze Solder-Joint Fittings: CISPI 301-78 and comply with governing regulations. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 74. Compression Gaskets: CISPI HSN-75. Grooved-End Fittings: Fitting housings shall be cast of malleable iron conforming to ASTM-A47 or ductile iron conforming to ASTM-A536. Gaskets shall be EPDM grade "E" with green color code identification, conforming to ASTM-D2000 designation 2CA615A15B44F17Z for water service to 230F. Bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel conforming to ASTM-A183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi. Hinge pins/locking pins shall be cold rolled steel conforming to AISI-1212. Couplings style 77 and 791, elbows, tees, reducing tees, strainers, butterfly valves, and check valves are acceptable. Reducing couplings will NOT be accepted. Fittings shall be equal to those produced by Victaulic. Flanged Fittings: Comply with ANSI B16.15 for bolt-hole dimensioning, materials, and flange-thickness. Flange Bolts: Bolts shall be carbon steel ASTM A-307 Grade A hexagon head bolts and hexagonal nuts. Where one or both flanges are cast-iron, furnish Grade B bolts. Cap screws utilized with flanged butterfly valves shall be ASTM A-307 Grade B with hexagon heads. Flange Bolt Thread Lubricant: Lubricant shall be an anti-seize compound designed for temperatures up to 1000 degree F, and shall be Crane Anti-Seize Thread Compound, or approved equal. PVC Fittings [Direct Burial Only]: AWWA C900, ASTM D-1869 and 1599. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products: Welding Materials: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section II, Part C, for welding materials.
150600- 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Soldering Materials: 95-5 Tin-Antimony solder, ASTM B32. Alloy Grade 95 TA. Any material used for hot or cold domestic water systems must be acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction for use with potable water systems. Brazing Materials: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section 9, for brazing materials. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: l/16-inch thick for all pipe size 10 inches and smaller, and 1/8-inch thick for all pipe size 12 inches and larger. Ring type shall be used between raised face flanges and full face type between flat face flanges with punched bolt holes and pipe opening. Gaskets shall be equivalent to Johns-Manville Style 960 or 961 compressed non-asbestos with a non-stick clean surface and factory applied parting agent applied to both sides of the gasket. Acceptable manufacturers are Crane, Johns-Manville, or Garlock. Insulating (Dielectric) Unions: Provide dielectric unions at all pipe connections between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Unions shall be "Delvin" as made by Pipeline Seal and Insulator Co. or "EPCO" as made by Epco Sales, Inc., and shall have nylon insulation. Gasket for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C564, neoprene, compression type. Push-on-Joints: ANSI A21.11, rubber compression type, "Tyton Joint" as manufactured by U.S. Pipe or equal. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Stack and Riser Connections: FM 1680 Class 1, 24 GA., Type 304 stainless steel torqued to at least 100 in./lbs. with one piece neoprene gasket. Branch Connections: CISPI 310, stainless steel corrugated shield and clamp assembly over one-piece neoprene sealing sleeve. PART 3 - EXECUTION PIPE INSTALLATION: General: Industry Practices: Install pipe, tube, and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without failure or degradation of service. Install each run with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions or flanged connections to permit disassembly for maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16-inch misalignment tolerance.
150600- 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Coordinate piping locations with other trades to avoid conflict. Give ductwork preference unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. System: Install all piping parallel or perpendicular to lines of building, true to line and grade, and with sufficient hangers to prevent sags between hangers. Provide fittings at all changes in direction. Piping in finished areas shall be concealed, except in mechanical rooms. Where pipes of different sizes join, provide reducing elbows, tees, or couplings. Bushings will not be acceptable. Expansion and Contraction: Install loops, offsets, sizing joints, and expansion joints, as necessary, to avoid strain resulting from expansion and contraction of piping systems on fixtures and equipment. Expansion Loops and Offsets: Provide expansion loops and offsets in piping systems for not less than 1-inch expansion or contraction per 100 feet of pipe. Victaulic Couplings: Provide Victaulic connections where indicated on the Drawings and Specifications to reduce vibration at equipment connections. Provide expansion joints in piping systems by Victaulic connections where specifically indicated on the Drawings. Steel Pipe: Ream steel pipe after cutting and before threading. Thread with clean-cut taper threads of length to engage all threads in fittings and leave no full-cut threads exposed after make-up. Use John Crane, or approved equal, or Teflon-thread tape applied only to male threads to make-up joints. Copper Pipe: Cut copper pipe square and ream to remove burrs. Clean fitting socket and pipe ends with sand cloth, No. 00 cleaning pads, or wire brush. Coat socket inside and pipe end with flux containing zinc and ammonium chlorides prior to soldering. PVC Pipe: Cut PVC pipe square and remove all burrs. Clean fittings and pipe butt prior to installation. Install all PVC piping in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Final Connections to Equipment Furnished by Owner or Under Other Divisions of these Specifications: Where Drawings show equipment to be furnished under other Divisions of these Specifications or by the Owner, such equipment will be delivered to the site, uncrated, assembled, and set in-place under those other Divisions of these Specifications or under the separate contracts. Any required automatic control valves shall also be provided under those other Divisions of these Specifications or other separate contracts. Make all final connections of chilled water, hot water, condenser water, gas, domestic water, waste, and vent as shown. Provide valves, unions, strainers, check valves, and traps as required for proper operation of systems and equipment. Equipment not shown or noted on the piping drawings shall not be included in the scope of this requirement.
150600- 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Excavation, Installation, and Backfill for Underground Pipe: Layout: Pipes shall be laid and pipe joints made in presence of the Architect and field measurements, layouts, batterboard alignment, grade establishments, and similar locations, shall be performed by a Professional Engineer in the employ of the Contractor. The Contractor's Engineer shall be on-the-job during all underground Work. A "Bench-Mark" reference for use by the Contractor shall be provided by the Architect. Piping Grading: Lay and maintain all pipes at required lines and grades during the course of the Work to comply with the Drawings. Trench: Excavate the trench to the depth required. Properly brace and dewater the trenches and keep it free of water during installation, testing pipe, and backfilling. No water shall be discharged onto the street or freeway without approval by the Architect. Excavation: The trench shall be at least 18 inches wider than the maximum diameter of the pipe, or largest bell, and the pipe shall be laid in the center of the trench. The trench shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide for pipe cushions or supports as specified herein. Trench width may be increased as required, and piling left in place until sufficient compacted backfill is in place. Properly sheet and brace all open trenches to render them secure and remove all such sheeting and bracing before completing the backfill. Comply with local regulations or, in the absence thereof, with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. The quality of excavation required to install sheeting, and the installation and removal of sheetings and bracings will not be regarded as extra work, and all costs incurred for this excavation, and the installation of sheeting, shall be included in the Contract Price. Grading: Upon completion of excavation, and prior to the laying of the pipe, the trench bottom shall be brought up to the required elevation with a pipe cushion, except where the cushion has been eliminated by the Architect. Pipe cushions shall be select material deposited in the trench, and shall be a compacted, leveled off, and shaped to obtain a smooth compacted bed along the laying length of the pipe. Pipe cushion material shall be as follows: Domestic Water Pipes: Material for pipe cushion shall comply with local codes. In absence of local code requirements, the cushion shall be bank sand or select backfill material approved by the Architect. Any material used shall pass a 1-inch screen. Fire Protection Piping: Same as "Domestic Water Pipes". Sanitary and Storm Sewers: Same as "Domestic Water Pipes". Heating Hot Water Piping: Same as "Domestic Water Pipes" except material shall
150600- 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
pass screen. Anchors: Cast-iron pipes shall have concrete anchors at each change in direction, and/or as directed. Any change in direction exceeding 15 degree shall be anchored. Concrete anchors shall rest against solid (virgin) ground with the required area of bearing on pipe and ground to provide suitable anchoring. Backfill: Trenches shall be backfilled only after piping has been inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect.All backfill material shall be placed in the trench either by hand, or approved mechanical methods. The compaction of backfill material shall be accomplished by tamping with hand tools or approved pneumatic tampers, by using vibratory compactors, by puddling, or by any combination of the three. The method of compaction shall be approved and all compaction shall be done to the satisfaction of the Architect. Backfill completely around pipe, including 18 inches above the pipe, with suitable bank sand, tamped in 4-inch layers under, around, and over pipe. Water down backfill as required. The remainder of the backfill for all pipes shall be select backfill material tamped at intervals of no more than 12-inch depths, to attain a 95% Proctor Compaction Density. All materials to be used as selected material backfill shall be approved by the Architect. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the excavated material does not meet the requirements of selected material, the Contractor shall be required to screen the material prior to its use as selected material backfill. Material used in the upper portion of the backfill, or subgrade, shall not contain stone, rock, or other material larger than 6-inches in its longest dimension. No wood, vegetable matter, or other material, which in the opinion of the Architect, is unsuitable shall be included in the backfill. The upper 24 inches of backfill may be water jetted, if desired. Backfill shall be brought up to finish grade identified on the Architectural Drawings, including additional backfill required to offset settlement during consolidation. When removal of unsuitable, excavated material creates a shortage of backfill material, the Contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, furnish material as specified in this Section in the amount required to complete the backfill. Existing Surfaces: Existing streets, driveways, and sidewalks damaged during the excavating work shall be restored to acceptable condition, subject to approval by the Architect. Safety: Provide all streets and sidewalks excavations with approved barricades, warning lights, and coverplates as required by City. PLUMBING SERVICES: General: Install the various piping systems as described hereinafter, and as required by the local plumbing inspection department. Install a main shut-off valve and drain on the building incoming cold water system. The exact location shall be co-ordinated with the architect and engineer if it is not shown on the drawings.
150600- 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Slope domestic hot and cold water piping to drain and provide with hose valves (drain valves) at low points. Install soil, waste, and vent piping with horizontal lines pitched in accordance with local codes, but in no case less than 1/4-inch per foot for pipe 3 inches smaller and 1/8-inch per foot for pipe 4 inches and larger. Install soil, waste, and vent piping with hubs of each length of piping in the upstream position. Make-up "Ty-Seal" or "Dual-Tite" gasketed joints using lubrication and joining tools as instructed by the manufacturers. Base of stacks, horizontal runs under pressure, and all gasketed pipe 5 inches and larger shall be made up using "Lubrifast" joining material. Torque "No-Hub" joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not install "No-Hub" joints below ground. Provide chrome-plated piping at each fixture installed in a finished space. Install with proper strap wrenches to avoid marking or defacing. Provide proper restraints on all riser and stack offsets. Chase and Wall Piping Supports: All piping whether sanitary or water shall be rigidly installed in all chases or walls. Test for rigidity shall be that the piping is virtually immovable by hand short of deforming the piping. Valve, stop and fixture penetrations thru chase or fixture mounting walls shall be firmly supported from just inside the wall or chase prior to penetration to the room-side of the chase or wall. Support inside the chase or wall for Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping shall be accomplished by utilizing fixture carrier bolt-downs, "UNI-STRUT" or similar structural bracing system, "U-bolts", nuts and lock-washers, all bolted to the floor and to the piping system. Support for Water Piping or other similar service piping shall be accomplished by using a "system" designed for that purpose. An approved system shall consist preformed steel supports which shall be installed between studs or joists and preformed non-metallic pipe holder inserts which are designed to rigidly support or hold the piping to the steel supports. In no case shall Sanitary Sewer Waste or Vent Piping depend on blocks, brick, stone or wood sleepers for its final support. In no case shall Water Piping or similar service piping depend on its final support on "tie-wires", soldering or brazing to metal studs or joists, copper tube soldered to risers and tied to joists or other methods which do not have the written approval of the Engineer.
150600- 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Support system shall be as manufactured by "HOLDRITE" or an approved equal. Plumbing Connections to Fixtures and Equipment: General: Provide necessary pipe and fittings. Make final connections to provide cold water make-up and natural gas supply to mechanical equipment. Locate cold water make-up and gas supply where shown and connect with suitable stop valves. Cold Water Make-Up: Provide cold water make-up to chilled water circulating systems, condenser water circulating systems, and hot water heating systems. Provide manual bypass around solenoid valves to allow manual fill if solenoid is not operational. DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING SYSTEMS: Water Piping from 5-0" Outside Building to Main Shut-Off Valve Inside Building: Class 150 AWWA cast-iron conforming to ANSI A21.8, coated inside and outside with coal-tar pitch varnish, joined by mechanical joints having Neoprene "O" ring gasket in conformance with ANSI A21.1 or similar approved joining method. Interior Hot and Cold Water Piping: Piping 3 inches and smaller, copper tube; Type L, hard-drawn temper; wrought copper fittings, 95/5 solder joints.. Piping 4 inches and larger, Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A-53 with galvanized malleable iron fittings, or galvanized cast-iron flanged fittings. Provide isolation fitting whenever dissimilar materials are used. Option: At the Contractor's option, for piping 4 inches or larger, Victaulic Style 77 couplings, Victaulic fittings and tees may be used in lieu of the above, if Victaulic groove depth control tool is used for field-grooving. Victaulic flanges and reducing couplings shall not be installed. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide piping runouts to fixtures sized to comply with governing regulations. Where not otherwise indicated, provide runouts sized to comply with the following: lavatories - 1/2-inch hot, 1/2-inch cold; water closet flush valves - 1-inch cold; urinal flush valves - 1-inch cold; drinking fountains - 3/8-inch cold. Each fixture shall be provided with a shut-off valve for each supply line. All exposed lines shall be chromium-plated. Air Chambers: Riser Air Chambers: At the top of each main hot and cold water riser, provide an air chamber two pipe sizes larger than riser pipe and 24 inches high.
150600- 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Fixture Air Chambers: At each hot and cold water supply pipe at each fixture, provide an air chamber the same size as the fixture branch and not less than 18 inches high. Shoktrols: Shoktrols specifically sized for the application may be used in lieu of the specified air chambers. UNDERGROUND DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE AND FIRE PROTECTION PIPING: Piping 2 Inch and Smaller: Type "K", copper tubing with wrought copper solder end fittings. Piping 3 Inch and Larger: Ductile iron bell and spigot, push-on joint, pressure water pipe. Joints shall be of the push-on type employing a molded rubber gasket retained in a ring recessed into the inside of the bell. Pipe and joints shall be manufactured by Tyler Pipe and Foundry Company, or equal. Coat pipe and fittings inside and outside with the manufacturer's standard coal tar enamel suitable for domestic water service. STORM AND SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM: Soil, Waste and Vent Piping Underground: Service weight cast-iron soil pipe and fittings with neoprene gasket joints made up with "Lubrifast" joining material. Option: At Contractors option, Schedule 40 PVC underground sanitary piping may used with flowable backfill. Flowable backfill is a cement-poor mix (cement, fly ash, river sand) with 8 slump.
Storm Drainage Piping Underground: Same as soil, waste and vent piping underground. Option: At Contractors option, underground garage storm drain piping only may be Schedule 40 PVC with flowable backfill. Flowable backfill is a cementpoor mix (cement, fly ash, river sand) with 8 slump. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping Above Ground: Service weight cast-iron soil pipe and fittings with neoprene gasket joints, or hubless cast-iron pipe fittings with coupling assembly. Option: At the Contractor's option, for branch piping only, galvanized malleable iron fittings for vent piping and galvanized cast-iron drainage fitting for soil and waste piping may be used in lieu of the above. Storm Piping Above Grade: Same as soil, waste and vent piping above ground.
150600- 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Option: At Contractors option, above ground garage storm drain piping only may be Schedule 40 PVC. Provide necessary protection from damage by automobiles. Cleanouts: Finished Floor: Zurn Z-1400, cast-iron adjustable assembly with nickel bronze cover and tapered thread bronze plug. Provide clamping collar when installed in floors having waterproofing membrane. Provide brass carpet marker when installed below carpet. Unfinished Areas: Zurn Z-1441 Supremo cleanout with cadmium-plated, cast-iron plug. Walls: Zurn Z-1443, cast iron with nickel bronze, square, smooth, access cover, vandalproof screws. Outside: Zurn Z-1400, non-slip, vandalproof cover with anchoring lugs. Locations: In each change of direction of soils and wastes, each 90-foot length of horizontal straight run, and where shown. Fixture Connections: Water Closets: Galvanized cast-iron nipples. Urinals: Copper or cast-iron nipples with suitable adapters. Lavatories: Copper or cast-iron nipples with suitable adapters. Service Sinks: Brass or cast-iron nipples with suitable adapters. Drinking Fountains: Copper or cast-iron nipples with suitable adapters. NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM: Code-Compliance Products: Comply with applicable Codes and NFPA regulations which require the products used for gas piping work to be selected from lists in certain published standards or coded as indicated therein. Gas Piping: All gas piping intended for operation at pressures of 5 psig or greater shall be ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel joined by Schedule 40, black welding fittings. All gas piping, 2-1/2-inch and smaller, intended for operation at pressures equal to or less than 5 psig shall be ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black steel joined by Class 150 pound, banded, black malleable iron, threaded fittings. All gas piping, 3-inch pipe size and larger, intended for operation at pressures equal to or less than 5
150600- 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
psig shall be ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black steel joined by Schedule 40, black welding fittings. Concealed Piping and Protection: All gas piping run concealed in walls, chases, or above ceilings shall be installed in chases ventilated to the outside atmosphere at top and bottom, or in metal sleeves or conduit vented to the outside atmosphere. Inaccessible piping shall be all welded. Underground Piping: Gas piping installed below grade shall be coated with Republic Steel Corporation (US) "X-Tru-Coat" high density polyethylene extruded coating, factory-applied with a fluid mastic to a minimum thickness of 0.040-inch. Field welds, joints, and fittings shall be protected with mastic undercoat and by wrapping at least two layers of "X-Tru-Tape" installed as instructed by manufacturer. CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS: Pipe: Copper, Type K, up to 3. Black steel, Schedule 40, from 4 up to 12 inches, and standard weight for 12 inches and above. Fittings: Service-Pressure at or Less than 150 psig: Fittings, 2-1/2 inches in diameter and smaller, threaded, Class 150 rated, black, banded, malleable iron. Fittings, 3 inches in diameter and larger, factory-fabricated, Class 150, weld type. Flanges, Class 150, forged steel weld neck. Copper - brazed joints or Pro-Press fittings Service-Pressure Greater Than 150 psig: Fittings, 2-1/2 inches in diameter and smaller, threaded, 300 psig, black, banded, malleable iron. Fittings, 3 inches in diameter and larger, factory-fabricated, weld type, rated for greater than 300 psig. Flanges, 300 psig, weld neck, welding flanges at valves and all flanges connections. Copper - brazed joints or Pro-Press fittings Taps and Branches: "Weld-O-Lets", "Thread-O-Lets", "Branch-Lets" or shaped nipples may be employed at locations where taps or branches join line pipe, provided
150600- 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
the tap or branch piping is two sizes or more smaller than the main piping. Factory-fabricated wye and tee fittings may be welded into the main. Piping Option: At the Contractor's option, for piping 4 inches or larger, Victaulic Style 07 couplings, Victaulic fittings and tees may be used in lieu of the above, if Victaulic groove depth control tool is used for field-grooving. Victaulic flanges and reducing couplings shall not be installed. Cold Springing: Cold springing of piping will not be permitted. Pitch: Install chilled and condenser water piping with an upward pitch in direction of flow of not less than 1-inch in 40 feet. Risers: Chilled water risers using Victaulic couplings shall be installed to allow riser contraction when cooled. Automatic Air Vents: Automatic air vents shall be installed where required, and shall be suitable for the system used, and for the system working pressure and temperature. Vents shall be designed to eliminate air from the system automatically without permitting the passage of any water, and shall be similar, and approved equal to the following: 150 psig working pressure service - Sarco Type 13W, or approved equal. Automatic air vents shall have a 3/4-inch IPS inlet connection and 3/8-inch outlet. Provide 3/8-inch OD hard drawn, Type L copper tubing from vent outlet for overflow in case of defective action. Copper tubing shall run to a suitable drain. Provide 3/4-inch stop valve in vent line for servicing of automatic air vent.
CONDENSATE DRAINAGE: General: Provide a condensate drain pipe to connect each cooling unit drain pan and secondary drain pan to extend to and discharge into an open-type drain in the plumbing system. Assembly: Use hard drawn copper tubing with matching fittings, or Schedule 40, galvanized, threaded fittings. Assemble fittings to form a trap with depth equal to or greater than operating pressure of the unit served. Drains shall be of the sizes indicated, but not less than the full size of the drain pan connection. Air-handling unit drains shall have deep seal traps to permit unit pan drainage. The deep seal trap shall be installed for each blow-through, or draw-through air-handling unit to maintain the water seal.
150600- 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
SUB-SOIL DRAINAGE: General: See Architectural and Structural Drawings for size, type of pipe, and installation details. Coordinate plumbing connections to subsoil drainage system. CLEANING, FLUSHING, TESTING, AND INSPECTING: Cleaning: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems and prepare surface for application of any required coatings. Flushing: Flush piping systems with clean water prior to performing any required tests. Piping Tests: General: Equipment shall be blanked off during tests. Tests shall be performed before piping is enclosed in walls, floors, partitions, or in any other way concealed from view. Tests may be performed in sections. Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and local inspectors and results presented to the Engineer for acceptance and approval prior to concealing piping from view. Provide all necessary equipment for testing, including pumps and gages. Domestic Water Systems: Test hot and cold water systems hydrostatically to a pressure of 100 psig or 1-1/2 times working pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of 4 hours. Repair all leaks, replacing materials as necessary, and repeat tests until systems are proven tight. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping System: Test soil waste and vent piping by plugging all openings and filling system to height required by City Plumbing Inspector, but not less than 20 feet. Inspect all joints for leaks, repair any leaks found, and retest until piping is demonstrated to be free from leaks. In addition to water test, apply peppermint or smoke tests, if required by local code. Storm Drainage Piping System: Test storm drainage piping same as specified for Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping System. Disinfection of Water Systems: Disinfect hot and cold water systems as follows: Fill systems with water solution containing 50 ppm available chlorine; allow to stand for 4 hours, opening and closing all valves several times during this period; thoroughly flush; refill and place system in service; ensure a residual chlorine content of 2.5 ppm. Condenser Water Systems: Test the cooling water piping systems as specified for the domestic water system. Natural Gas Piping System: Test natural gas piping with compressed air or nitrogen to a pressure at 5 times the expected service pressure, but not less than 15 psig, for
150600- 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
a period of one (1) hour. Provide additional tests as required by local authorities. Repair all leaks, replacing materials as necessary, and repeat test until systems are proven tight. Cleaning and Adjusting: Thoroughly clean and disinfect all plumbing fixtures, including all exposed trim. Adjust all flush valves for proper flushing, but without excess use of water. Demonstrate to the Engineer that the entire plumbing system and all components thereof are functioning properly. Inspecting: Visually inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, adequate hangers and supports, and inclusion of accessories and appurtenances. END OF SECTION 15060
VALVES
15100 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15100 - VALVES VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide valves as specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: General: All valves shall be similar and approved equal to numbers listed. Approved equal valves by Milwaukee, Nibco, Powell or Stockham will be acceptable. All similar type and size valves shall be products of one manufacturer. Ball valves shall be by Milwaukee or Powell. Butterfly Valves: All butterfly valves shall be full tapped and threaded lug-type, manufacturer certified for bubble tight, dead end shut off from either direction at design working pressure and temperature. All valves shall have enclosed, self-locking worm gear type operators, waterproof, and factory lubricated. Gear segment shall be manganese bronze or ductile iron with a steel or ductile iron worm and oil impregnated bronze bushing, or worm shaft. Operator shall have built-in adjustable mechanical stops and position indicators. Valves used for balancing shall be certified suitable for continuous throttling service. Ball Valves: All ball valves shall be designed to permit repacking while valve is in line. Valve shall be furnished with blowout-proof stems. Valves used for chilled water service shall be insulated as specified for the pipe in which the valve is installed. All ball valves shall be full-lined size to prevent flow restriction through the ball. Gate Valves: All bronze gate valves shall have packing boxes with adequate depth to allow space for sufficient amounts of stem packing. Malleable iron handwheels and gland followers shall be furnished on all bronze gate valves. All gage valves shall have Teflon stem packing. OSY, IBBM gate valves shall be furnished with a stem lubrication fitting on all sizes. All gate valves shall be designed to permit repacking while the valve is in line. Marking of Valves: Comply with MSS SP-25.
VALVES
15100 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Valve Dimensions: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged or welding-end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10. VALVES: Valves For Service at or less than 150 psig: Block (Stop) Valves: 2 inches and smaller ball valves, shall be red brass, cast bronze, or yellow forged bronze with brass, stainless steel, or bronze ball and stem, 150 psig non-shock WOG at 200 F, Milwaukee Fig. No. BA-125. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be butterfly type, 150 psig non-shock WOG at 200 F, ANSI Class 150 with ductile iron lug body. The replaceable resilient elastomer seat shall be Buna N or EPDM. The disc shall be silicon or aluminum bronze, and shaft shall be 316 or 416 stainless steel. Secondary O-ring seals shall be provided at the top and bottom of the upper and lower shafts to guarantee zero leakage to the shaft, Milwaukee "C" series, lug body. Balancing Valves: Valves shall comply with the general requirements specified for block valves. Valves used for balancing shall have adjustable memory stops or position indicators, Milwaukee Fig. No. BA-125. Gate Valves: 2-1/2 inches and smaller, Milwaukee Fig. 1150, 300 psig water, oil, gas (WOG) bronze body with screwed bonnet and ends. 3 inches and larger, Milwaukee Fig. F-2885, 200 psig WOG. Globe Valves: 2 inches and smaller, Nibco Fig. T-235 or Fig. S-235, bronze body, bronze rising stem, screw-in bonnet, renewable seat, and screwed or solder ends. 2-1/2 inches and larger, Milwaukee Fig. F-2981, 200 psig WOG, outside screw and yoke (OSY), iron body, bronze trimmed, renewable seat, Class 125, ANSI B16.1 flanged ends. Valves for Service over 150 psig: Block Stop Valves: 2 inches and smaller ball valves, shall be rad brass cast bronze, or yellow forged bronze with brass, stainless steel, or bronze ball and stem, 300 psig non-shock WOG at 200 F with Teflon packing and gaskets, Milwaukee No. BA-125. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be 300 psig non-shock WOG, with Class 300 ANSI B16.5 flanges, full tapped and threaded cast steel lug body. Valves shall have 300# body drilling and shall be suitable for service indicated on the Plans. Disc shall be cast steel, and the shaft shall be 416 stainless steel. Secondary O-ring or gland seals at the top and bottom of the upper and lower shafts shall guarantee zero leakage to the shaft. Seals and backing rings shall be TFE or Viton. Seal retainer rings shall be 316 stainless steel. Posi-Seal and Control Seal shall be considered acceptable manufacturers for valves as specified. Balancing Valves: Valves shall comply with the general requirements specified for block valves. Valves used for balancing shall have adjustable memory stops or position indicators.
VALVES
15100 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Gate Valves: 2-1/2 inches and smaller - Milwaukee Fig. 1150, 300# WOG, bronze body, rising stem, with screw bonnet and screwed ends. 3 inches through 12 inches Milwaukee Fig. No. F-F-2894, 500# WOG, OS and Y valves with Class 250 ANSI B16.1 flanged ends, cast-iron body and bronze trim. Globe Valves: 2-1/2 inches and smaller, Nibco Fig. T-275, 400# WOG, bronze body and trim, rising stem, union bonnet, renewable seat and screwed ends. 3 inches through 8 inches, Milwaukee Fig. F-2983, 500# WOG, iron body, bronze trim rising stem, OS and Y Class 250 ANSI B16.1 flanged ends. Check Valves: In condenser and domestic water pipes 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be spring-loaded, quiet, globe type as manufactured by Milwaukee or Nibco. Valve shall be full-threaded, lug body, or flanged body. 2 inches and smaller, Milwaukee Fig. 510 threaded valves installed at pump discharge shall have its shaft perpendicular to the pump shaft. Valves located in pumped sewage pipes, shall be Milwaukee Fig. F2974 outside lever and weight, 200# WOG, iron body, bronze trimmed, swing check design. Approved equal by Nibco or Stockham will be acceptable. Valves for Water Make-up Connections: 2 inches and smaller, Milwaukee Fig. B125. 2-1/2 inches and larger, Milwaukee "C" series, lug body, butterfly valve . Relief Valve: Temperature and pressure, self-closing, lever operated with thermo-bulb extensions, 3/4-inch, ANSI B2.1 taper thread male inlet connection, 210 degree F (98.8 degree C) and 125 psig setting, ANSI Z1.22, Type No. 40XL Watts Regulator Company. Combination Pressure Reducing and Relief Valve for Make-up Water: Bell and Gossett Model Number 3, dual unit. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: Backflow preventer shall be Hersey FRP-2 for sizes 2 inches and smaller, Hersey 6CM for 2-1/2 inches and larger, reduced pressure principal backflow preventer or approved equal, with dual "Y" pattern spring-loaded check valves, and independent relief valve located between checks. Backflow preventers shall be rated for pressure up to 150 psig working pressure at 140 degree F (60 degree C). Domestic Water Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts 223S or Clayton 90G-01. Pressure and flow schedule as indicated on the Drawings. FIRE PROTECTION VALVES: Check Valves: 2 inches and smaller, threaded end Milwaukee Fig. 510. 2-1/2 inches and larger, Stockham Fig. G-940 flanged, iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM) swing check, 175 psig WOG, with renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and/or Factory Mutual (FM) approved as required. Where ball drip is required, provide Grinnell Fig. F789.
VALVES
15100 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
OS and Y Valves: 2 inches and smaller, Stockham Fig. B-133, 175 psig WOG, threaded, all bronze, gate valves, UL approved. 2-1/2 inches and larger, Stockham Fig. G-634, 175 psig WOG, flanged, gate valve, IBBM, solid wedge, UL, and FM approved. Provide OS and Y valves with tamper switches installed where indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements. Valve Stems: Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal plane. Swing Check Valves: Swing check valves shall be installed in horizontal piping only. Chain Operators: In fan or mechanical rooms where condenser water valves are installed over 8 feet above floor, provide chain operators. Unions and Companion Flanges: Provide unions or companion flanges where required to facilitate dismantling of valves and equipment. Access Doors and Panels: Verify the location and quantity of access doors or panels required to provide full valve access. END OF SECTION 15100
PIPING ACCESSORIES
15120 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15120 - PIPING ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - Specification section, apply to work of this section as well as Section 15010. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide all piping accessories as specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ESCUTCHEON PLATES: General: Provide escutcheon plates on all exposed piping where piping penetrates the walls, floors, or ceilings of finished or semi-finished rooms. A semi-finished room shall be defined as a room having any floor covering, paint or any other finish on walls, or has a ceiling. A finished room shall be defined as a room which has any floor covering, paint or other finish on walls, and a ceiling. Type: Escutcheon plates shall be Dearborn Brass Company Fig. No. 1149 through 1152. SLEEVES: General: Provide sleeves for all piping passing through walls, floors, and roofs. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to permit pipe, or pipe and insulation, to pass through and leave an annular space for caulking. Sleeves through concrete construction, interior partitions, and ceilings shall be 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. Masonry construction and exterior penetrations both above and below grade shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Floor sleeves shall extend 2 inches above floor. Outside Walls Below Grade: Where pipes pass through outside walls which are below grade, provide galvanized steel pipe with water stop. When pipe is in place, seal with "Link-Seal" Unit with EPDM links as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan, or approved equivalent. Fire-Rated Floor and Wall Penetration: Provide fire rated thermal shields/sealing systems on all pipe passing through fire walls or floors. Fire rated sealing materials shall be listed by UL for the intended application. Manufacturers written instructions
PIPING ACCESSORIES
15120 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
shall be carefully followed during installation. FLASHING: Flashing shall be provided under other Divisions of this Specification. DRIP PANS: General: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal, 20 gage or heavier, all welded seams and joints, edges turned up 2-1/2-inches. Reinforce top edge with 1x1x3/16 structural angle or by rolling top over a 1/4-inch rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at the low point for watertight joint and 1-inch drainline connection. TRAP PRIMERS: General: Provide trap primers at all floor drains and floor sinks a shown on the drawings or required by local code. The primer shall be equal to Precision Plumbing Products Inc. "New" Prime-Rite Trap Primer Valve unless indicated otherwise. For primer valves serving more than one drain use a Precision Plumbing Products "Trap Primer Distribution Unit" to distribute the water to the drains. Note that trap primers in typical toilet rooms are connected to flush tubes on water closets. Fire Pump Room: These areas shall be provided with a time clock controlled solenoid valve type assembly fabricated by the Contractor. The assembly shall consist of a Dayton Model 3A434 solenoid valve and a Watts Model 288A vacuum breaker. The solenoid valve shall be controlled by a Intermatic Model ET100 Electronic Programmable timer. Refer to the Drawings (air handling unit rooms, elevator machine rooms, penthouse, plus locations in garage and at ground floor). Multiple floors can be served with one assembly. At the Contractors option, an approved factory assembled unit may be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Pipe Sleeves: Size and install sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in the sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, except as noted in "SLEEVES" section stated above. Pack and caulk or otherwise seal between pipes and sleeves as specified under "SLEEVES'. Thermal Shields: On insulated lines, butt end of adjoining insulation with vapor barrier mastic and seal joint with 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape. Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 3 feet horizontally of
PIPING ACCESSORIES
15120 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
electrical equipment. Hang from structure with rods. Brace to prevent sagging, or swaying. Connect 1 inch drain line to drain connection and run to nearest floor drain or elsewhere as indicated. Trap Primers: Install a shut off valve on the line serving the primer unit, ahead of the unit, so it can be serviced by turning off the water. END OF SECTION 15120
PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS
15140 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15140 - PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide all pipe hangers, supports, and required appurtenances as specified and indicated. MSS Standard Compliance: Provide pipe hangers and supports of which material, design and manufacturer comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58, SP-69, SP-89, and SP-90. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: General: Provide pipe hangers and supports as shown or specified, or both, herein. Comply with local codes and standards for pipe and equipment support and anchorage. Pipe supports shall be of material that will prevent electrolytic action. Inserts: Provide Grinnell No. 282 inserts for concrete construction. Piping in Multiple Parallel Runs: Provide Grinnell No. 45 or 50 with Grinnell No. 137 U-bolt pipe clamps or structural channels or angles with U-bolt clamps, supported as trapeze hangers where multiple parallel runs of piping are shown. Select and size all members for weights to be carried and span dimensions between supports. Piping in Single Runs: Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 239 or Grinnell No. 260 clevis hanger. Hanger Rod: Provide cadmium coated, or galvanized hanger rods of length required. Rod diameters shall be as follows: Pipe Sizes in Inches Rod Diameter in Inches 3/4 through 2 2-1/2 through 3 4 through 5 6 8 through 12
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8

15140 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
14 through 18
Riser Clamps: Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 241 riser clamps. Riser clamps for copper tube shall be copper-plated. Saddles and Shields: Saddles for Horizontal Insulated Piping without Vapor Barrier: At each hanger or support on horizontal runs, provide Grinnell No. 160 or Fee and Mason Fig. 171, 1710, 1712, or 172 saddles, as applicable. Shields as described below may be used in lieu of the saddles. On heating water systems below 140 degree F (60 degree C), hangers may be sized for the pipe size, and of a material compatible with the pipe. Where dissimilar materials are used, provide dielectric separation. Carry insulation over the hanger and seal where hanger is sized for pipe. Shield for Horizontal Insulated Water Piping with Vapor Barrier: At each hanger or support for water piping, provide a half section of preformed 6 PCF density fiberglass or rigid calcium silicate, with jacket of adjacent insulation brought across unbroken, supported on semi-circular 16-gage shields. Shields for pipe 4 inches and smaller shall be 12 inches long; shields for pipe 5 inches to 8 inches shall be 168 inches long; and shields for larger pipe shall be 24 inches long.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Independent Support: Support fire sprinkler and standpipe piping independently of other piping in accordance with NFPA-approved methods and local codes and standards. Provisions for Movement: Movement: Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to any pipe or connected equipment. Pipe supports shall properly transmit the weight of the pipe and its contents to the building structure, or to independent posts, piers or foundations. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.
15140 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through the insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold, chilled, or heating water piping, install coated protective shields. For pipe 8 inches and over, install rigid calcium silicate insulation between saddles and pipe. Spacing: Install hangers and supports in piping systems to remove stress from equipment flanges and rotating equipment. Space hangers and supports as follows: Trade Pipe Size (inches) 1/2 3/4 1 and 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Maximum Spacing (feet) 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 14 16 17 19 22 23 25 27 28
Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles, or use hangers as indicated in "SADDLES AND SHIELDS" above. Guides: Install pipe guides complying with the manufacturer's published product literature. Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe guides near expansion loops, expansion joints, and ball joints. Anchors: Install anchors at the proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent the transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. Anchors shall include vibration isolation in accordance with the pipe support system specified. Where the piping system is floating, the anchors shall be termed restraints or braces. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with the expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to the maximums recommended by the manufacturer of each unit. Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at the ends of principal pipe runs, and
15140 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. Leveling: Adjust hangers and supports and place grout as required under supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. Hangers: Refer to Section 15245, "Vibration Isolation", for additional information and support requirements. Pipe hangers made of wood, wire, or sheet iron shall not be permitted. Riser Supports: Vertical piping shall be secured at sufficient close intervals to keep the pipe in alignment and carry the weight of the pipe and contents. Cast-iron soil pipe shall be supported at the base and at each story level, but in no case at intervals greater than 20 feet. Steel pipe shall be supported at the base and at not less than every other story level, but in no case at intervals greater than 28 feet. Copper tube shall be supported at each story level, but in no case at intervals greater than 12 feet. Plastic pipe shall be supported at mid point between floors and at ceiling to prevent movement, but in no case at intervals greater than 8 feet. END OF SECTION 15140
METERS AND GAGES
15150- 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15150 - METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide meters, gages, taps, and accessories as specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS GAGE AND THERMOMETERS: Gages: Gages shall be Ashcroft, Trerice, Weksler, Moeller, or U.S. with 4-1/2-inch dial face, phenol case, stainless steel movement with Grade A phosphor bronze bourdon tube, and micrometer-type calibration adjustment screw. Accuracy shall be 1/2 of 1 percent of full scale. Provide a gage cock and pulsation dampener in pressure tube to gage. Graduation shall be one pound or less. Thermometers: Thermometers shall be Trerice, Weksler, Moeller, or Scientific, red-reading mercury type with 9-inch case, minimum 3-1/2-inch union stem and complete with separable brass or stainless steel socket well. Thermometers shall be straight, incline, recline or adjustable selected and installed as best suited for ease in reading. Range and Graduations: Gages and thermometers shall be selected to give range and graduations best suited for quantities to be measured. Generally, gages and thermometers shall be selected so that normal operating pressures and temperatures are not more than two-thirds nor less than one-half of the range, scale division shall be 2 degree F or less. Typical ranges shall be: Thermometer Wells: Thermometer wells shall be located so that the sensing bulb will give a true and correct reading. Thermometer wells shall be installed so as not to cause undue restriction in small piping. Where wells are located in pipelines 1-1/2 inches and smaller, provide a section of pipe of such diameter that the net area of the pipe line will not be reduced by the thermometer well. All wells shall be filled with Silicon, and complete with caps and chains. PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TAPS:
METERS AND GAGES
15150- 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Location: Provide pressure and temperature taps at all coil connections and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings. Taps: Taps shall be 1/2-inch solid brass fittings which will receive either a pressure or temperature probe, with valve core of Nordel, and fitted with a color coded cap and gasket. Taps shall be "Pete's Plug" (Peterson Engineering Co., P.O. Box 217, Richardson, Texas 75080, 214/235-8393) or "Sisco P/T Plugs", (Sisco, P.O. Box 197, Riverton, N.J. 09077, 609/829-8686) No. 710, rated at 275 degree F and 1000 psig. Instruments: Furnish two each No. 500 "Pete's Plug" pressure gage adapters with four gages and probes and four each 5-inch stem pocket thermometers; two "Pete's Plug" or "Sisco P/T Plug" No. 601 with 25 degree F range for chilled, heating, and condenser water and two "Pete's Plug" No. 603 with 0 degree F to 220 degree F range for heating water. GAGE COCKS: Location: Gage cocks to be used for test gages shall be provided in the entering and leaving piping to all equipment, coil, coil control valve, orifice metering flange, and at other locations indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturer: Gage cocks shall be Crane No. 88 needle valves, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install meters and gages in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated. Position meters and gages so that they are easy to read and accessible for inspection and maintenance. END OF SECTION 15150
PUMPS
15160 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15160 - PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide pumps as specified and indicated. Work of Other Sections: Refer to Division 16 for electrical connection work required in conjunction with pump motors (not work of this Section), controllers, and alarms. Refer to Section 15250 for piping and equipment thermal insulation work required in conjunction with pumps. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: Allis-Chalmers Corp. Armstrong Aurora Pump Co. Bell and Gossett Grundfos PACO Patterson Pump Company Peerless Pump Taco Weil Pump Co. Weinman Pump Mfg. Co. Electrical Standards: Provide electric motors and products which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and comply with National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) standards. Refer to Section 15015 for motor requirements in conjunction with pumps. Certification, Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performance, under specific conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
PUMPS
15160 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
PART 2 - PRODUCTS FIRE PUMPS: Capacity: Fire pumps shall deliver the capacity listed at the available suction pressure. The pumps shall also deliver not less 150 percent of rated capacity at a pressure not less than 65 percent of rated head. Shutoff pressure shall not exceed 120 percent of rated pressure. Type: Fire pumps shall be horizontal split case, full ballbearing, grease-lubricated, two stage, double suction type. Accessories: Fire pumps and accessories shall meet all requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 20 and shall be UL listed. System Head: Pumps, casings, and seals shall be suitable for operation with the system head listed. Baseplate and Coupling: Pumps and motors shall be mounted on a common cast-iron baseplate with drip base connection for drain. Pump coupling shall be flexible coupled. Motor: Pump motors shall be open drip-proof type. Locked rotor current shall not exceed the values specified in NFPA No. 20. Each motor shall be of such capacity that at rated voltage under any pump operating condition, the full load ampere rating shall not be exceeded except as permitted by the service factor stamped on the motor nameplate. Motor Control: Motor control equipment shall be completely assembled, wired, and tested at the factory. The assembly shall be specifically approved for fire pump purposes by the UL. Controller shall be marked FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER. All equipment shall be enclosed in one or more approved driptight enclosures. Controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic reduced voltage, closed transition, star delta type incorporating the following: Disconnect Switch: Externally operable quick make-break type. Circuit Breaker: Time delay type with trips in all phases set for 300 percent of motor full-load current. Interrupting capacity breaker shall be at least 150,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480 volts. Motor Controller: Firetrol FTA-1350, or approved equal, UL listed, with a RVNR, wye-delta type starter capable of being energized automatically through the pressure switch or manually by an externally operable handle. Pressure Switch: Set to sense _____ psig at pump discharge for starting pump and to maintain system pressure of 100 psig at the top of the system.
PUMPS
15160 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Running Period Timer: Set to operate motor when started automatically for a minimum running period of 1 minute for each 10-hp motor rating, but not to exceed 7 minutes. Alarms: Provide UL-listed alarm relays and accessories to provide for the following: A controller mounted 120-volt alarm gong. Gong shall sound continuously whenever the fire pump is running, and shall be energized from the fire pump feeder via a control power transformer. Alarm relay to indicate a fire pump input power failure or circuit breaker open position. This relay shall energize a remote audible and visual alarm at the Engineer's office and shall be energized from an independent power source. Contacts and pilot lights in controller to indicate power available and circuit breaker "OPEN" and "CLOSED". Pilot lights shall be energized from an independent power source. Output contacts to provide fire pump running and input power failure/circuit breaker open inputs to the fire alarm system furnished under Division 16. Control Power: Provide control power transformers with fusing and disconnect switches where required. Test Link and Studs: Ammeter test links and voltmeter test studs. Manual Selection Station: A two-position pushbutton marked "Start-Stop", and an emergency start handle shall be provided on the enclosure. Transfer Switch: Provide transfer switch as specified in Section 16690 as a part of the controller enclosed gear. Miscellaneous: See Division 16, Electrical, for other motor controller requirements. FIRE JOCKEY PUMPS: Capacities: Fire jockey pumps shall deliver the capacities listed. Type: Pumps shall be multi-stage, bronze fitted, bronze impeller, with stainless steel shaft and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Rating: Pumps, casings, flanges, and mechanical seals shall be rated for operation with the working pressures scheduled. Coupling: Pump shall be flexible coupled. Controls: Fire jockey pumps shall be complete with controls to automatically maintain pressure on the standpipe system to prevent the fire pumps from operating
PUMPS
15160 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
on drops in pressure of 5.0 psig or less. Controller shall be Firetrol FTA 500A, or approved equal. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1, wall-mounted, factory-assembled, wired, tested, and shall be finished with a baked enamel coating. Panel shall include at least the following equipment: 1 - non-fused disconnect switch mounted on panel door. 1 - FVNR combination magnetic motor starter with circuit breaker. 1 - HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch mounted on panel door. 120 volt control power transformer, and fused disconnect switch to operate switches and controls in the panel. Power failure alarm contact with panel-mounted alarm bell and light and contact for remote annunciation at the BCS. Base: Pumps and motors shall be mounted on a common cast-iron baseplate with drip base connection for drain. Relief Valve: Fire jockey pump shall be furnished with a factory-mounted bypass relief valve complete with piping. Relief valve shall be set to relieve at a pressure of 25 psig above design total dynamic head to prevent motor overload and system damage. Motor: Pump motors shall be open dripproof type with 115 percent service factor. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSPECTION: General: Installer shall examine the bases upon which and conditions under which pumps are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. INSTALLATION OF PUMPS: General: Install pumps where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with NEMA standards and requirements of NEC. Alignment: Check alignment and, where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within tolerances recommended by manufacturer. Vibration Isolation: Install units on vibration mounts as shown. Comply with manufacturer's indicated installation method and with other applicable Sections of this
PUMPS
15160 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Division. Pump Base Grout: Pump bases shall be grouted with a epoxy resin flow grout equal to Marweld M-44. Grout shall be mixed and applied per the manufacturers instructions. Pressure Test: Field pressure test all pumps to 1-1/2 times rated working pressure. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: Grounding: Provide positive electrical pump and motor grounding in accordance with applicable requirements of the NEC. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Field Test: Upon completion of pump installation, and after motor has been energized from normal power source, bleed air from pump casing and test pump to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field-correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
VIBRATION ISOLATION
15245 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15245 - VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide vibration isolation work as specified and indicated, including the following: Support isolation for motor-driven mechanical equipment. Inertia base frames in conjunction with equipment isolation. Support isolation of air-handling housings. Isolation including support isolation for piping risers. Support isolation of piping. Flexible ductwork connections. Work of Other Sections: Refer to other Sections of these Specifications for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets, and other work related to vibration isolation work. QUALITY ASSURANCE: General: Except as otherwise indicated, obtain support isolation units from a single manufacturer. Supervision: Manufacturer shall provide technical supervision of the installation of support isolation units produced by him and of associated inertia bases. Manufacturers: Provide vibration isolation support units manufactured by one of the following: Amber-Booth Vibrations Mounting and Controls, Inc. Korfund Dynamics Corp. Peabody Noise Control Mason
VIBRATION ISOLATION
15245 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Manufacturer Certification: Where vibration isolation support units are indicated for a minimum static deflection, provide manufacturer's certification that units have been tested to and comply with the indicated requirements. SUBMITTALS: Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, detailed drawings, performance characteristics data, and installation instructions for each type of unit required. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, natural frequency, and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment. Test Report: Where required, include independent test agency certified report of test results for each type of unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCT MATERIALS: Suspended Air Units and Fans: Isolate with not less than four Amber/Booth Type PBSR combination spring and rubber-in-shear vibration isolators having deflections of 2 inches for motor horsepowers 20 and larger and 1 inch for motor horsepowers less than 20. Suspended Fan Coil Units: Suspend from overhead construction by no less than four stems, each complete with Amber/Booth Type BRD-1 rubber-in-shear vibration isolators having 0.35-inch deflection. PART 3 - EXECUTION PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS: General: Comply with the minimum static deflections recommended by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, including the definitions of critical and non-critical locations, for the selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. INSTALLATION: General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for the installation and load application of vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections, do not bottom out
VIBRATION ISOLATION
15245 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. Secure Attachment: Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation, to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. Adjustment: Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. Isolation Hangers: Locate isolation hangers as near the overhead support structure as possible. Airtightness: Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK: Examination and Reporting: Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe the installation of other work related to and connected to vibration isolation work. After completion of other related work (but before equipment start-up), he shall furnish a written report to the Contractor, with copy to the Engineer, listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: Equipment installation (performed as work of other Sections) on vibration isolators. Ductwork connections including provisions for flexible connections. Passage of piping which is to be isolated through walls and floors. Correction and Start-Up: Do not start-up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the vibration isolation Installer. DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS: Report: Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment deflections for each major item of equipment as indicated. Submit all reports to the Engineer for final review. FIELD SERVICES: Representative: The isolation materials manufacturer shall provide the services of an authorized representative to supervise and ensure correct installation of isolators and sound attenuation materials and proper adjustment of the isolators after installation.
VIBRATION ISOLATION
15245 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EQUAL LOADING: General: All equipment installed on vibration isolating mountings shall be level after load is applied. Further, vibration isolating mountings shall be selected and installed to compensate for unequal loading. Spring isolators with coils touching during equipment start-up or operation will not be acceptable. END OF SECTION 15245
SYSTEM INSULATION
15250- 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15250 - SYSTEM INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide piping, ductwork, and equipment system insulation as specified and indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: The following listed manufacturer's products are acceptable subject to compliance with the requirements of these Specifications: Armstrong Cork Co. Certain-Teed Corp. Insulation Materials Corp. of America Manville Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Quality: The type of insulation and its installation in accordance with this Section of the Specifications for each service and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Fire Rating: All insulation shall have a composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard, as tested by ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, and UL 723, which does not exceed: Flame Spread - 25 Smoke Developed - 50 Accessories: Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, tapes, and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed hereinabove. Labels: All products and their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed indicating that flame spread and smoke developed ratings do not exceed the above
SYSTEM INSULATION
15250- 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
requirements.
INSULATION THICKNESS: Minimum: Insulation thickness shall not be less than the following: Thickness* Inches
Equipment Surface
Piping Condenser water piping Condensate drains (above finished ceilings and in occupied areas) Roof drains (underside), horizontal downspouts, chilled water waste lines, branch lines, and underside of drains receiving cooling coil condensate Domestic hot water lines Heating hot water (above ground) Domestic cold water lines (subject to freezing) Emergency generator muffler and exhaust pipes 1/2 1/2
1/2
1/2 1 1
Ductwork Supply ductwork, external (where not lined) Supply ductwork, acoustical lining (unless noted otherwise) 1-1/2
*Where exposed to outdoor ambient temperature, or in unconditioned plenums, or when conveying unconditioned outside air, increase insulation thickness by 1/2 inch in addition to that indicated. For piping, increase size of insulation to allow for installation of electric heating cable. EQUIPMENT:
SYSTEM INSULATION
15250- 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Domestic Water Heaters: Factory-insulated. PIPING: Condensate Drains: Insulate piping inside building and not exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures with Manville "Flame-Safe" AP-T fiberglass insulation of thickness shown above with kraft-scrim-foil vapor barrier jacket, or Armstrong "Accotherm" of equivalent thickness. K factor shall be 0.23 Btu/inch degree F-per hour. Provide jacket complete with lap with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive protected by strip of release tape. Insulate valves, including bonnets, and fittings, including unions and flanges, with premolded or shop fabricated fiberglass insulation covered with premolded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jackets by Zeston or approved equal. Roof Drains and Horizontal Leaders: Insulate piping with Manville MicroLoc 650AP or AP-T fiberglass insulation of thickness shown above with kraft-scrim-foil vapor barrier jacket. Provide insulation with butt strip with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive protected by strip of release tape. Insulate fittings, including unions and flanges, with premolded or shop fabricated fiberglass insulation covered with premolded PVC jackets by Zeston or approved equal. At Contractors option, this piping may be insulated the same as described for exterior insulation for supply air ducts. Domestic Hot Water Lines: Insulate same as noted for roof drains and horizontal leaders except with no option for ductwrap. Heating Hot Water: Insulation material same as noted for roof drains and horizontal leaders (except with no option for ductwrap). Fire Lines (Wet Pipe) Exposed to Ambient Temperatures: All piping above ground and exposed to outside ambient temperatures shall be insulated as specified for domestic cold water lines subject to freezing, and covered with an approved 0.016-inch thick aluminum-jacket with Z-joint longitudinal seal. Circumferential butt joints shall be sealed with 2-inch wide "snapstraps" lined with permanent plastic sealing compound and secured with outer holding band, 12-inches on center. Valves, including bonnets, and fittings, including flanges and unions, shall be insulated with premolded or shop fabricated fiberglass insulation covered with premolded PVC jackets by Zeston or approved equal. Condenser Water, Make-up Water, Fluid Cooler Drain, Basin Filtration and Water Treatment Piping Exposed to Outdoor Temperatures: Same as fire lines exposed to ambient temperatures. Emergency Generator Exhaust Pipes and Muffler, Boiler Stack and Breeching: Insulate emergency engine-generator exhaust pipes, including mufflers, boiler stack and breeching, and converter with Manville "Thermo-12" hydrous calcium silicate of thickness shown above by scored block or beveled block form as best suited for the
SYSTEM INSULATION
15250- 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
intended use. Where exposed to the weather, provide "Thermo-12" with Manville "Metal-On" jacket. DUCTWORK: Exterior Insulation for Ductwork: Externally insulate all ducts supplying conditioned air, unconditioned outside air duct systems and other systems shown on the Drawings, or specified herein to be externally insulated, with Manville, R-Series, 1.0 pcf density "Microlite" flexible fiberglass duct wrap with kraft-scrim-foil vapor barrier jacket [k-0.26 at 75 F mean temperature]. Exterior insulation may be omitted when ductwork is internally lined. Acoustical Duct Lining for Primary Ductwork: Provide all rectangular supply air ductwork inside mechanical rooms and the first 15 FT downstream of mechanical room walls with acoustical duct lining, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Liner shall be 3.0 PCF density Schuller "Permacote Linacoustic R-300 rigid fiberglass with black acrylic polymer and anti-microbial growth coating [Max. k-0.23 BTUin/(hrft2F) at 75F mean temperature]. Thickness shall be 2 inside mechanical rooms and 1 for first 15 FT outside mechanical rooms or as indicated on the Drawings. Provide insulation stops in ductwork at changes of liner thickness and where insulation changes from internal to external. Acoustical Duct Lining for Secondary/Return Ductwork: Provide rectangular supply and return air ductwork with acoustical duct lining, where shown on the Drawings or specified herein, 2.0 pcf density (or as specified on Drawings) Manville "Linacoustic" fiberglass duct liner with anti-microbial black plastic-coated mat facing [k-0.26 at 75 F]. All return air transfers into mechanical rooms shall be lined with 2 inch thick liner. All horizontal exhaust ducts above toilet rooms shall be lined with 1-inch thick 1-1/2 pcf duct liner. The first six feet of discharge duct downstream of every fan-powered and single zone VAV box shall be lined with 1 liner. Do not line exhaust riser. Exterior insulation may be omitted when ductwork is internally lined. Do not line shower exhaust. Provide insulation stops in ductwork at changes of liner thickness and where insulation changes from internal to external. Outdoor Duct Insulation: All rectangular supply and return ductwork installed outdoors, shall be externally insulated with 3.0 pcf density Manville 814AP "Spin-Glas". K factor shall be 0.23 BTU/inch at 75 degree F mean temperature. Ductwork exposed to weather shall be coated with glass fabric and mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install insulation products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that the insulation serves its intended purpose. All surfaces to be insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned, and all tests completed prior to insulation.
SYSTEM INSULATION
15250- 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
PIPING APPLICATION: Piping: Apply insulation to clean, dry pipes after all pressure tests have been completed. Firmly butt all joints of insulation. Where insulation is interrupted by fittings, unions, flanges, valves, or hangers, and at intervals not exceeding 25 feet on straight runs, form an insulating seal between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe by liberal applications of Insul-Coustic No. 215 vapor barrier adhesive to the exposed joint faces of the insulation carried down to and along 4 inches of the pipe and up to and along 2 inches of the insulation jacket. Seal laps with Insul-Coustic No. 215 vapor barrier adhesive, and cover butt joints with 3-inch wide strips of vapor barrier jacket material sealed with Insul-Coustic No. 215 vapor barrier adhesive. Provide oversized insulation where heat tracing is installed. Hangers on insulated piping shall be installed outside pipe insulation. Protective shields, saddles or blocking shall be installed to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide inserts of cellular glass or high density foam at each pipe hanger on suspended A/C condensate pipe. Vapor seal and finish to match adjoining pipe insulation. Valves and Fittings: Insulate and cover valves, tees, elbows, and other fittings the same as flanges and unions except secure covers in place by Zeston "Z-tape" or approved equal. Emergency Generator Exhaust Pipes and Muffler: After all pressure tests have been completed, apply Thermo-12 to clean, dry metal surfaces, which have not been factory insulated, and hold in place with 1-inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh with edges laced together. Where necessary to achieve snug fit of insulation on large surfaces, install weld clips 18 inches on center to surfaces before installation of insulation, and tie to wire mesh with 20-gage galvanized wire. Where not exposed to weather, cover insulation with insulating cement troweled to a smooth finish. When cement has cured, apply a layer of 20 x 20 mesh glass fabric adhered with Insul-Coustic IC 102 and then give a flooding brush coating of IC 102.
DUCTWORK APPLICATION: Exterior Insulation On Low Velocity Ductwork: After preliminary air tests, cover ductwork where required. On ducts over 18-inches wide, apply weldclips or stickclips, to bottom of duct, spaced 18-inches on center each way, maximum. Seal all longitudinal and transverse seams and all punctures caused by weldclips or stickclips with 2-inch wide SMACNA-labeled duct tape and mastic. Acoustical Duct Lining For Low Velocity Ductwork: Before sheet metal is broken, apply duct liner to sheet metal in a continuous layer of insulation cement, and, in addition, on ducts over 18-inches wide, apply weldclips or stickclips, spaced 18 inches each way, maximum. Allow l/8-inch excess duct liner at each end of each
SYSTEM INSULATION
15250- 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
section of ductwork. Just before sections of ductwork are hung, coat end laps of duct liner with insulation cement and hang immediately. Outdoor Duct Insulation: Insulation shall be applied to the exterior surface of supply and return ducts and attached with gripnail fasteners, spaced not more than 12 inches each way, maximum. After insulation is installed, apply a coat of Foster 30-35 white mastic, embed glass fabric cloth in the mastic, and finish with a second layer of Foster 30-35 white mastic, troweled to an even, smooth finish. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles, cement adhesives, pounds as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated. Surfaces: Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Butt Joints: Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. Vapor-Barrier: Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect barrier to prevent puncture and other damage. Penetrations: Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. Corner Angles: Install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing. END OF SECTION 15250
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
15300 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide a complete fire protection automatic dry standpipe system, and sprinkler system for Level 1, including all pipe, tube fittings, and appurtenances as indicated, and in compliance with these Specifications. Applications: Application of the fire protection system shall include, but are not limited to, the systems as listed below: Supply mains, risers, valves, and drains. Standard pattern 3-way connections. Fire hose valves. Flow switches. Fire pump, controllers, and accessories. Jockey fire pump, controllers, and accessories. Wet pipe hydraulically designed sprinkler system. Dry Pipe Sprinkler System Quality Assurance: Refer to Section 15060. All materials shall be installed in accordance with NFPA No. 13 and NFPA No. 14. All valves, fittings, hose, sprinkler heads, and equipment shall be FMRC approved. All necessary points of city connections shall be matched to city equipment. All hose threads shall conform to local Fire Department requirements. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Support all fire protection pipe with UL listed and approved hangers and support devices. Provide any special hangers or supports that may be required. The design, selection, spacing, and application of horizontal pipe hangers, supports, restraints, anchors, and guides shall be in accordance with the NFPA No. 13 and NFPA No. 14. Vertical pipes shall be supported at least every other floor with approved riser clamps. Automatic Standpipe System: The automatic dry standpipe system shall consist of risers with 2-1/2 inch hose valves
15300 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
on each floor at the stairways, and a wet pipe sprinkler system to provide complete coverage for retail spaces on Level 1. Elevator machine rooms shall be served by valved branch pipe with high temperature heads. System piping shall be hydraulically designed throughout all areas in accordance with the rules and regulations of NFPA No. 13, using the following design densities: Retail - Ordinary Hazard (0.20 over most remote 1500 sf with 250 gpm hose stream allowance included in calculations) Lobbies, Mechanical/Electrical Rooms - Ordinary Hazard (0.15 gpm/sf over most remote 2500 sf with 250 gpm hose stream allowance included in calculations) Sprinkler piping shall be installed and coordinated with the ductwork and other mechanical and electrical services in the ceiling cavities by the Contractor, to provide the clearances for lighting fixtures as indicated on the Drawings. If any departures from the Drawings are necessary to comply with any NFPA requirements, or the authority having jurisdiction, such revisions and/or departures shall be detailed and submitted for approval. All such revisions shall be made and the sprinkler systems installed in accordance therewith, without increased expense to the Owner. Departures shall not be made without prior written approval by the Engineer. The Drawings are preliminary, and do not indicate inferred details. This installation shall also meet the approval of the local Fire Marshal's Office. System shall include fire pump, jockey pump, required drain lines, test connections, spare heads, tools, fire department inlet connections, water motor alarm, circuit closers, monitor switches, alarm valves, isolation valves, and similar items. Sprinkler heads, valves, alarms, and similar items shall be as manufactured by Viking, Grinnell, Reliable or other approved manufacturer. Sprinkler heads shall be plain brass, upright or pendant type, in unfinished areas. Sprinkler heads in finished areas with ceilings shall be the concealed type and in finished areas without ceilings shall be pendant type. Verify with the architect the color for all heads in finished areas. All material and equipment used in the installation of the sprinkler systems and standpipes shall be listed and approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and Factory Mutual, and shall be the latest design of the manufacturer. Riser control valves and sprinkler floor control valves shall be provided with valve tamper switches. Location shall be coordinated with Division 16. Valves: Valves shall be FM listed and approved for the pressures at which they are installed. Check valves shall be swing-type with iron body, bronze trim, cast-iron disc, bolted cover, and screwed or flanged ends. Check valves in the pump discharge may be
15300 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
spring loaded, quiet type, as specified in Section 15100, if FM listed. Swing check valves may be installed in horizontal pipe only. Supervised valves sizes 1 inch through 2-1/2 inches, shall be slow-close butterfly valves with "built-in" supervisory switch, "UL" and "FM" approved as manufactured by Milwaukee Valve Company (or approved equal). Supervised valves sizes 3 inch through 4 inches, shall be butterfly valves with "built-in" supervisory switch, "UL" and "FM" approved as manufactured by Victaulic (or approved equal). All valves shall be ball or butterfly type where allowed by Code and if UL/FM approved for such use. If approved valves are not available or if not allowed by local authorities or referenced Codes, gate valves shall be used as described below. Gate valves 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze body, OS AND Y, and screwed ends. 150 psig valves shall have bronze trim, single disc, screwed bonnet, and bronze seats. 300 and 400 psig valves shall have bronze wedge disc, union bonnet, and bronze body seat rings. Gate valves over 2 inches shall be iron body, OS AND Y, bolted bonnet, bronze seats, ANSI 16.1, flanged ends. 150 psig valves shall have double or single disc, and bronze trim. 300 and 400 psig valves shall have wedge disc and brass stem. Supervised valves shall include valve tamper switches. Valve tamper switches shall be double-pole, single throw type with cast-aluminum housing and tamper-proof cover. Switch rating shall be at least 7 amperes at 125/250 volts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PIPING: Service Connection to Inside Building Wall: Refer to Section 15060. Pipe: Standpipe and sprinkler piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel and shall meet at least one of the following standards: ANSI/ASTM A53, ASTM A795 or ASTM A135. Where permitted by local code Schedule 10 black steel pipe may be used for sizes 2" and larger. All piping for dry pipe systems shall be galvanized steel pipe, with galvanized malleable iron fittings, or galvanized cast-iron flanged fittings. Fittings: Fittings shall be cast-iron threaded sprinkler fittings ANSI B16.4 or grooved ends fittings joined by Victaulic Style 77 couplings with Grade "E" gaskets or welded fittings, ANSI B16.9. Flanges shall be screwed or welded neck-type ANSI B16.5. Victaulic flanges and reducer couplings shall not be permitted. All fiitings for dry pipe systems shall be galvanized malleable iron sprinkler fittings, or galvanized cast-iron flanged sprinkler fittings. EQUIPMENT:
15300 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Fire Department Valve (Stairwells and Sprinkler Taps) - FDV: Potter-Roemer Fig. No. 4065 x 2-1/2" cast brass with red iron handwheel, female inlet x 2-1/2" male hose thread outlet, 300 lb. rating. For use up to 175 PSI. Furnish with cast brass cap with pin-lugs and chain. Fire Department Valve (Stairwells) - FDV: Potter-Roemer Fig. No. 4050 x 2-1/2" cast brass with red iron handwheel, inside screw rising-stem, internal parts of brass and stainless steel, 2-1/2" female NPT inlet x 2-1/2" female hose outlet with cast brass cap with pin-lugs and chain. Used to reduce pressures up to 300 psig back to 175 psi at each floor where required. Where pressures exceed 300 psig under any operating condition, a Fig. No. 4023 (400 psig) shall be used. Valve locations shall be determined by hydraulic calculations. Fire Department Valve (Sprinkler Taps): Potter-Roemer Fig. No. 4050 x 2-1/2" cast brass with red iron handwheel, inside screw rising-stem, internal parts of brass and stainless steel, 2-1/2" female NPT inlet x 2-1/2" male hose outlet with cast brass cap with pin-lugs and chain. Used to reduce pressures over 175 psi back to 175 psi at each floor where required. Where pressures exceed 300 psig under any operating condition, a Fig. No. 4036 (400 psig) shall be used. Valve locations shall be determined by hydraulic calculations using. Roof Manifold: Potter-Roemer No. 5887 rough brass roof manifold with three No. 4215, 200 lb. rough brass hose gate valves with caps and chains. Fire Department Test Connection ("FDTC): Potter-Roemer No. 5863-7 series flush fire department test connection with chains and caps, chrome-plated, size 6-inch x 2-1/2-inch x 3-way. Lettering shall indicate "Pump Test Connection". Fire Department Connection ("FDC") serving Level 1: Potter-Roemer No. 5030 series flush fire department connection (vertical) with chains and caps, chrome-plated, size 6-inch x 2-1/2-inch x 3-way. Lettering shall indicate "Auto Spkr.. Fire Department Connection ("FDC") for Automatic Dry Standpipe: Potter-Roemer No. 5030 series flush fire department connection (vertical) with chains and caps, chrome-plated, size 6-inch x 2-1/2-inch x 3-way. Lettering shall indicate Standpipe". Water Flow Switch: Reliable Model "A" or FM approved equal water flow switch, with adjustable retard feature in supply pipe to each floor of each riser for remote alarm. Switch shall be single pole, double throw type and shall be rated at least 7 amperes at 125 volts. Sight Flow Connection: Sight flow connection in all test lines shall be Victaulic Style 718 "TestMaster".
15300 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Dry Pipe Valve: Reliable Model D. Accelerator: Reliable Model B-1. Air Compressor: General Dry Air Pac, duplex, 2-5hp with automatic alternation. Ball Drip: Potter-Roemer No. 5984 or 5982, as required. Sprinkler Heads: Upright or pendant heads as required with ordinary temperature rating, except in specially designated areas of high temperature where heads shall be rated per NFPA-13. Heads in all spaces except unfinished areas, dock area and mechanical rooms shall be concealed type. Pendent heads in unfinished areas (e.g. mechanical rooms, janitor rooms, central plant) shall be bronze finished. Verify with Architect if special color finishes are required for heads in public areas. Furnish spare heads equal to 1 percent of total number of heads installed. The heads shall be representative of, and in proportion to the number of each type and temperature rating of heads installed. Spare head stock shall include spare sprinkler escutcheons for the quantity of heads stocked. Furnish spare head cabinet and wrench for each riser. Alarm Valves: Reliable Model E. Signage: Provide and install all signage required by NFPA and City Fire Department. Where choice of color is permitted by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, selection shall be by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEM: General: Comply with the requirements of the NFPA No. 13 and 14 for installation and testing of piping system. Exposed piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles to the column lines of the building wherever possible. Cold springing piping will not be permitted unless specifically called for. Install piping with adequate support to prevent strain on the equipment. All piping shall be concealed, except in mechanical equipment rooms, stairwells, or where otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Grade all piping to eliminate traps and pockets. Where air pockets or water traps cannot be avoided, provide hose bibbs for drainage. Install unions or flanges at equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated on the
15300 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Drawings. Welded joints on pipe runs shall be made with continuous welds, without backing rings, and with pipe ends beveled before fabrication. Piping shall be carefully aligned prior to welding, and no metal shall project within the pipe. Heads in public areas shall be installed in locations as shown on the architectural reflected ceiling plans. Piping shall be sized as required by applicable codes, and as indicated on the Drawings. Field grooving of pipe for Victaulic fittings shall use Victaulic groove depth control tool, and a hole cutting tool shall be used in lieu of burning a hole in the piping. Victaulic flanges, reducing couplings, and outlet couplings shall not be installed. Victaulic gaskets shall be UL approved for the service, and working pressure of the systems. Protection During Construction: Provide necessary fire protection during construction in accordance with NFPA and Local Codes. Inspection and Tests: All inspections, examinations, and tests required by the authorities and/or agencies specified hereinbefore shall be arranged and paid for by the Automatic Sprinkler Subcontractor, as necessary, to obtain complete and final acceptance of the system as installed. The certificates of inspection shall be in quadruplicate, and shall be delivered to the Architect for distribution. Periodic Inspection Service: After completion of the automatic sprinkler system, and at the beginning of the guarantee period, the Automatic Sprinkler Subcontractor shall execute the National Automatic Sprinkler and Fire Control Association, Inc., Standard Form of "Inspection Agreement", without charge to the Owner, calling for four (4) inspections of the sprinkler system during the warranty period. During the warranty period, inspections shall be as per the Inspection Agreement, plus the following maintenance to be performed during the course of the fourth inspection: Operation of all control valves. Lubrication of operating stems of all interior valves. Operation of water gong, electric alarms, supervisory panels, alarm trip switches, flow switches, and similar items. Cleaning of alarm valves. Lubrication of Fire Department hose connection inlet. Inspection Report: The standard form of the National Automatic Sprinkler and Fire
15300 - 7
1 2 3 4 5
Control Association, Inc., "Report of Inspection", shall be filled out in triplicate after each inspection, and the copies sent to the Architect. END OF SECTION 15300
FLOOR, AREA AND ROOF DRAINS
15430 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15430 FLOOR, AREA AND ROOF DRAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide floor, area and roof drains as specified and indicated. Work of Other Sections: Division 7 Sections for flashings at floor and roof drains. Section 15060, "Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems". QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Josam Mfg. Co. J.R. Smith Mfg. Co. Tyler Pipe Co. (Wade) Zurn Industries Jonespec
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ROOF DRAINS: Refer to Drawings FLOOR DRAINS: Refer to Drawings. AREA DRAINS: Refer to Drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Coordination: Coordinate flashing work with work of other trades. Coordinate with roofing as necessary to interface roof drains with roofing work.
FLOOR, AREA AND ROOF DRAINS
15430 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Setting Locations: Install floor and roof drains in the low points of the surface areas to be drained. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor. Watertightness: Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing or flooring. Maintain watertight integrity of penetrated waterproof membranes. Accessibility: Position drains so that installed drains are accessible and easy to maintain. END OF SECTION 15430
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
15440 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified and indicated. Work of Other Sections: Section 15060, "Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems". QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: American Standard Eljer Kohler PART 2 - PRODUCTS WATER CLOSETS: Refer to Drawings LAVATORIES: Refer to Drawings ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS: Refer to Drawings URINALS: Refer to Drawings MOP SINK: Refer to Drawings HOSE BIBBS/WALL HYDRANTS: Refer to Drawings EMERGENCY EYE-WASH STATION, EW-A: Haws Model 7361
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION:
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
15440 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
Heights: Set fixtures at heights as directed and approved by the Engineer. Caulking: Where fixtures mount against wall or floor surfaces, caulk between the fixture and surface with white silicone sealer. END OF SECTION 15440
ELECTRICAL HEATING CABLE
15450- 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15450 - ELECTRICAL HEATING CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: General: The extent of electric heating cable work is as shown and scheduled, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. Types: The types of electric heating cable required for the project include the following: Parallel resistance heat tracing cable. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Chemelex Div., Raychem Corp. UL Standards: Electric heating cable shall conform to all applicable standards, and shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: Parallel Resistance Heating Tracing Cable: Provide parallel resistance heat tracing cable in the ratings shown, including watts/foot, and voltage, and in the amount and length shown, with Teflon or Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) jacket as required. Piping heat tracing cable shall be as manufactured by Raychem Corp. Electric Heating Cable Thermostat: Provide raintight NEMA 4 enclosure electric heating cable thermostat with temperature range from 0 degree to 90 degree F, single-or- double pole, single-throw switch with heavy-duty 600 volt AC, 20 ampere contacts, and as instructed by the cable manufacturer. Electric Heating Cable Accessories: Provide electric heating cable accessories,
ELECTRICAL HEATING CABLE
15450- 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
tape, hangers, clips, ties, and as instructed by the manufacturer for each particular application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install electric heating cable in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable portions of the NEC, and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions. Installation: Install electric heating cable where shown. Heat tracing system shall be designed to maintain a 50 degree F water temperature within the traced pipe, with an ambient temperature of 10 degree F, and a wind velocity of 20 miles per hour. Thermostats: Install thermostat sensing bulb on opposite side of pipe from electric heating cable to provide pipe heat sensing control. Insulation: Pipe insulation over heating tape and cable is furnished under Division 15. TESTING: General: Test heating tape and cable to demonstrate proper operation. Repair or replace malfunctioning or damage tape and cable. Retest to demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION 15450
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
15850 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15850 - ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Reznor Brasch Fostoria Markel Standards: Comply with UL Standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electric unit heater manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for a complete installation. Unit cabinet shall be draw-thru design to provide uniform temperature across heater element and forced air cooling of motor with ambient air. Units shall have single supply circuit with fuses as required by NEC for element and motor protection. Heating Elements: Except as otherwise indicated, provide elements of the indicated duty and rated for the indicated capacity, consisting of resistance elements in steel sheath with extended fins, or in spiral sheath. Provide automatic flow switch. Contactors shall provide disconnecting line break. Provide automatic reset thermal cutout for each element assembly to protect from overheating. Electric Heating Capacity: Size element for the indicated cfm and electric input (watts, voltage, phase). Cabinets: General: Provide cabinets braced and reinforced to provide required stiffness, and containing adjustable heating element supports. Include discharge air grilles consisting of individually adjustable louvers to direct discharge air as desired. All
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
15850 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
metal surfaces of the cabinet shall be protected by oven baked finish. Brackets shall be furnished for wall or ceiling mounting where shown on heater schedule. Motors: General: Motors shall have permanently lubricated bearings, built-in thermal protection and shall be completely enclosed.type. Separate motor supply circuits are not required. Fans: General: Fans shall be aluminum, propeller type, connected to the an extended fan motor shaft. Units 5 KW and larger shall have thermal fan delay to remove residual heat from heater cabinet and recirculate ambient air until temperature drops to 90 F. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Except as otherwise indicated, install cabinet heaters, including components required, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Location: Locate each unit accurately in the position indicated in relation to other work. Position unit with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, including clearance for cabinet removal. Damaged Fins: Comb out damaged, bent, or crushed fins before closing elements in cabinets. TESTING: General: Test electric unit heaters to demonstrate proper operation. Repair or replace cabinet heater as required. Retest to demonstrate proper operation. Replacement: Replace heater elements which have heavily damaged fins. Replace cabinets and accessories which are damaged beyond restoration to an acceptable condition. END OF SECTION 15850
WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
15855 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15855 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. Work Included: Provide field or factory-assembled water source heat pumps units and components as specified and indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturer: Provide products produced by the following: Trane McQuay ClimateMaster Water source heat pumps furnished shall operate at design conditions at sound power levels equal to or less than the scheduled equipment. SUBMITTALS: Manufacturer's Data: Include certified drawings showing overall dimensions of complete assembly, weights, support requirements, sizes and location of connections, accessories, and parts lists. Include the following information: Performance certifications (based on ARI Standards), fan curves, and test reports. (Note: The furnishing of ARI certifications of cooling coil performance shall in no way relieve the manufacturer of the responsibility of providing the minimum capacities scheduled on the Drawings, both sensible and latent, at the entering and leaving airside conditions scheduled while flowing the scheduled rate and temperature of condenser water.) Product warranties and guarantees. Wiring diagrams. Written instructions for installation including assembly where not factory-assembled. Manufacturer's recommendations on stocking of spare parts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15855 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
GENERAL: General: Furnish and install ClimateMaster Tranquility 20TM Water Source Heat Pumps, as indicated on the plans. Equipment shall be completely assembled, piped and internally wired. Capacities and characteristics as listed in the schedule and the specifications that follow. Horizontal / Vertical Water Source Heat Pumps: Units shall be supplied completely factory built for an entering water temperature range from 20 to 120F (-6.7 to 43.3C) as standard. Equivalent units from other manufacturers can be proposed provided approval to bid is given prior to bid closing. All equipment listed in this section must be rated and certified in accordance with American Refrigeration Institute / International Standards Organization (ARI / ISO) and Environmental Testing Laboratories for United States and Canada (ETL-US-C), and shall have CE Mark for 50Hz models. The units shall have ARI / ISO and ETL-US-C labels. All units shall be fully quality tested by factory run testing under normal operating conditions and water flow rates as described herein. Quality control system shall automatically perform via computer: triple leak check, pressure tests, evacuate and accurately charge system, perform detailed heating and cooling mode tests, and quality cross check all operational and test conditions to pass/fail data base. Detailed report card will ship with each unit displaying all test performance data. Note: If unit fails on any cross check, system shall not be allowed unit to ship. Serial numbers will be recorded by factory and furnished to contractor on report card for ease of unit warranty status. Basic Construction: Horizontal Units shall have one of the following air flow arrangements: Left Inlet/Straight (Right) Discharge; Right Inlet/Straight (Left) Discharge; Left Inlet/Back Discharge; or Right Inlet/Back Discharge as shown on the plans. Units must have the ability to be field convertible from straight to back or back to straight discharge with no additional parts or unit structure modification. Horizontal units will have factory installed hanger brackets with rubber isolation grommets packaged separately. Vertical Units shall have one of the following air flow arrangements: Left Return/Top Discharge, Right Return/Top Discharge, Left Return/Bottom Discharge, Right Return/Bottom Discharge as shown on the plans. If units with these arrangements are not used, the contractor is responsible for any extra costs incurred by other trades. All units (horizontal and vertical) must have a minimum of three access panels for serviceability of compressor compartment. Compressor section interior surfaces shall be lined with 1/2 inch (12.7mm) thick, dual density, 1-3/4 lb/ft3 (28 kg/m3) acoustic type glass fiber insulation. Air handling section interior surfaces shall be lined with 1/2 in (12.7mm) think, single
15855 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
density, 1-3/4 lb/ft3 (28 kg/m3) foil backed fiber insulation for ease of cleaning. Insulation placement shall be designed in a manner that will eliminate any exposed edges to prevent the introduction of glass fibers into the air stream. The heat pumps shall be fabricated from heavy gauge galvanized steel with powder coat paint finish. Both sides of the steel shall be painted for added protection. Standard cabinet panel insulation must meet NFPA 90A requirements, air erosion and mold growth limits of UL-181, stringent fungal resistance test per ASTMC1071 and ASTM G21, and shall meet zero level bacteria growth per ASTM G22. All horizontal units to have factory installed 1 (25.4mm) discharge air duct collars, 1 (25.4mm) filter rails with 1 (25.4mm) filters factory installed, and factory installed unit-mounting brackets. Vertical units to have field installed discharge air duct collar, shipped loose and 1 (25.4mm) filter rails with 1 (25.4mm) filters factory installed. If units with these factory installed provisions are not used, the contractor is responsible for any extra costs to field install these provisions, and/or the extra costs for his sub-contractor to install these provisions. All units must have an insulated panel separating the fan compartment from the compressor compartment. Units with the compressor in the air stream are not acceptable. Units shall have a factory installed 2 inch (25.4mm) wide filter bracket for filter removal from either side. Units shall have a 2 inch (25.4mm) thick throwaway type glass fiber filter. The contractor shall purchase one spare set of filters and replace factory shipped filters on completion of start-up. Filters shall be standard sizes. Cabinets shall have separate holes and knockouts for entrance of line voltage and low voltage control wiring. All factory-installed wiring passing through factory knockouts and openings shall be protected from sheet metal edges at openings by plastic ferrules. Supply and return water connections shall be copper IPT fittings, and shall be securely mounted flush to the cabinet corner post allowing for connection to a flexible hose without the use of a back-up wrench. Water connections that protrude through the cabinet or require the use of a backup wrench shall not be allowed. All water connections and electrical knockouts must be in the compressor compartment corner post as to not interfere with the serviceability of unit. Contractor shall be responsible for any extra costs involved in the installation of units that do not have this feature. Contractor must ensure that units can be easily removed for servicing and coordinate locations of electrical conduit and lights with the electrical contractor. Contractor shall install 2-inch (50.8mm) filter racks with removable access door and 2 inch (50.8mm) MERV11 pleated throwaway filters on all units. Provide UltraQuiet package which shall consist of high technology sound attenuating material that is strategically applied to the compressor and air handling
15855 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
compartment casings and fan scroll in addition to the standard ClimaQuiet system design, to further dampen and attenuate sound transmissions. The unit will be supplied with internally factory mounted two-way water valve for variable speed pumping requirements. A factory-mounted or field-installed high pressure switch shall be installed in the water piping to disable compressor operation in the event water pressures build due to water freezing in the piping system. Fan and Motor Assembly: Blower shall have inlet rings to allow removal of wheel and motor from one side without removing housing. Units shall have a direct-drive centrifugal fan. The fan motor shall be an ECM2 variable speed ball bearing type motor. The ECM2 fan motor shall provide soft starting, maintain constant CFM over its static operating range and provide airflow adjustment on its control board. The fan motor shall be isolated from the housing by rubber grommets. The motor shall be permanently lubricated and have thermal overload protection. A special dehumidification mode shall be provided to allow lower airflows in cooling for better dehumidification. The dehumidification mode shall be selectable via a jumper on the control board or may be controlled externally from a humidistat.
Refrigerant Circuit: All units shall contain an EarthPureTM (HFC 410A) sealed refrigerant circuit including a high efficiency scroll or rotary compressor designed for heat pump operation, a thermostatic expansion valve for refrigerant metering, an enhanced corrugated aluminum lanced fin and rifled copper tube refrigerant to air heat exchanger, reversing valve, coaxial (tube in tube) refrigerant to water heat exchanger, and safety controls including a high pressure switch, low pressure switch (loss of charge), water coil low temperature sensor, and air coil low temperature sensor. Access fittings shall be factory installed on high and low pressure refrigerant lines to facilitate field service. Activation of any safety device shall prevent compressor operation via a microprocessor lockout circuit. The lockout circuit shall be reset at the thermostat or at the contractor supplied disconnect switch. Hermetic compressors shall be internally sprung. The compressor shall have a dual level vibration isolation system. The compressor will be mounted on computer selected vibration isolation springs to a large heavy gauge compressor mounting tray plate, which is then isolated from the cabinet base with rubber grommets for maximized vibration attenuation. All units (except units with rotary compressors) shall include a discharge muffler to further enhance sound attenuation. Compressor shall have thermal overload protection. Compressor shall be located in an insulated compartment away from air stream to minimize sound transmission.
15855 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Refrigerant to air heat exchangers shall utilize enhanced corrugated lanced aluminum fins and rifled copper tube construction rated to withstand 625 PSIG (3101 kPa) refrigerant working pressure. Refrigerant to water heat exchangers shall be of copper inner water tube and steel refrigerant outer tube design, rated to withstand 625 PSIG (3101 kPa) working refrigerant pressure and 500 PSIG (3101 kPa) working water pressure. The refrigerant to water heat exchanger shall be electro-coated with a low cure cathodic epoxy material a minimum of 0.4 mils thick (0.4 1.5 mils range) on all surfaces. The black colored coating shall provide a minimum of 1000 hours salt spray protection per ASTM B117-97 on all external steel and copper tubing. The material shall be formulated without the inclusion of any heavy metals and shall exhibit a pencil hardness of 2H (ASTM D3363-92A), crosshatch adhesion of 4B-5B (ASTM D3359-95), and impact resistance of 160 in-lbs (184 kg-cm) direct (ASTM D2794-93). Refrigerant metering shall be accomplished by thermostatic expansion valve only. Expansion valves shall be dual port balanced types with external equalizer for optimum refrigerant metering. Units shall be designed and tested for operating ranges of entering water temperatures from 20 to 120F (-6.7 to 43.3C). Reversing valve shall be four-way solenoid activated refrigerant valve, which shall default to heating mode should the solenoid fail to function. Drain Pan: The drain pan shall be constructed of 304 Stainless Steel to inhibit corrosion. This corrosion protection system shall meet the stringent 1000 hour salt spray test per ASTM B117. If plastic type material is used, it must be HDPE (High Density Polyethylene) to avoid thermal cycling shock stress failure over the lifetime of the unit. Drain pan shall be fully insulated. Drain outlet shall be located at pan as to allow complete and unobstructed drainage of condensate. Drain outlet for horizontal units shall be connected from pan directly to IPT fitting. No hidden internal tubing extensions from pan outlet extending to unit casing (that can create drainage problems) will be accepted. The unit as standard will be supplied with solid-state electronic condensate overflow protection. Vertical units shall be furnished with a PVC slip condensate drain connection and an internal factory installed condensate trap. If units without an internal trap are used, the contractor is responsible for any extra costs to field install these provisions, and/or the extra costs for his sub-contractor to install these provisions.
Electrical: A control box shall be located within the unit compressor compartment and shall contain a 50VA transformer, 24 volt activated, 2 or 3 pole compressor contactor, terminal block for thermostat wiring and solid-state controller for complete unit operation. Reversing valve and fan motor wiring shall be routed through this electronic controller. Units shall be name-plated for use with time delay fuses or HACR circuit breakers. Unit controls shall be 24 Volt and provide heating or cooling as required by the remote thermostat / sensor.
15855 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Solid State Control System : Units shall have a solid-state control system. Units utilizing electro-mechanical control shall not be acceptable. The control system microprocessor board shall be specifically designed to protect against building electrical system noise contamination, EMI, and RFI interference. The control system shall interface with a heat pump type thermostat. The control system shall have the following features: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Anti-short cycle time delay on compressor operation. Random start on power up mode. Low voltage protection. High voltage protection. Unit shutdown on high or low refrigerant pressures. Unit shutdown on low water temperature. Condensate overflow electronic protection. Option to reset unit at thermostat or disconnect. Automatic intelligent reset. Unit shall automatically reset the unit 5 minutes after trip if the fault has cleared. If a fault occurs 3 times sequentially without thermostat meeting temperature, then lockout requiring manual reset will occur. Ability to defeat time delays for servicing. Light emitting diode (LED) on circuit board to indicate high pressure, low pressure, low voltage, high voltage, low water/air temperature cut-out, condensate overflow, and control voltage status. The low-pressure switch shall not be monitored for the first 120 seconds after a compressor start command to prevent nuisance safety trips. 24V output to cycle a motorized water valve or other device with compressor contactor. Unit Performance Sentinel (UPS). The UPS warns when the heat pump is running inefficiently. Water coil low temperature sensing (selectable for water or anti-freeze). Air coil low temperature sensing.
j. k.
l. m. n. o. p.
Units must provide the 8 safety protections of anti-short cycle, low voltage, high voltage, high refrigerant pressure, low pressure (loss of charge), air coil low temperature cut-out, water coil low temperature cut-out, and condensate overflow protections. Airflow selection shall be accomplished via 3 jumper switches on the ECM2 control board. Actual airflow shall be indicated by the CFM LED with each 100 CFM being represented by one flash of the LED. Airflow shall be automatically maintained (5%) by the ECM2 motor regardless of external static pressure up to its maximum output capacity. A jumper shall allow selection of a special dehumidification mode, which reduces airflow in cooling by 25% to increase the latent capacity of the unit. A terminal shall be provided on the control board to allow an external humidistat to activate dehumidification mode.
15855 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Solid state control system shall communicate with thermostat to display (at the thermostat) the unit status, fault status, and specific fault condition, as well as retrieve previously stored fault that caused unit shutdown. The Remote Service Sentinel allows building maintenance personnel or service personnel to diagnose unit from the wall thermostat. The control board shall provide a signal to the thermostat fault light, indicating a lockout. Upon cycling the G (fan) input 3 times within a 60 second time period, the fault light shall display the specific code as indicated by a sequence of flashes. A detailed flashing code shall be provided at the thermostat LED to display unit status and specific fault status such as over/under voltage fault, high pressure fault, low pressure fault, low water temperature fault, condensate overflow fault, etc. Multiple Protocol Control Units shall have all the features listed above and the control board will be supplied with a Multiple Protocol interface board. Available protocols are BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, or Johnson Controls N2. The choice of protocol shall be field selectable/changeable via the use of a simple selector switch. Protocol selection shall not require any additional programming or special external hardware or software tools. This will permit all units to be daisy chain connected by a 2-wire twisted pair shielded cable. The following points must be available at a central or remote computer location: a. space temperature b. leaving water temperature c. discharge air temperature d. command of space temperature setpoint e. cooling status f. heating status g. low temperature sensor alarm h. low pressure sensor alarm i. high pressure switch alarm j. condensate overflow alarm k. hi/low voltage alarm l. fan "ON/AUTO" position of space thermostat as specified above m. unoccupied / occupied command n. cooling command o. heating command p. fan "ON / AUTO" command q. fault reset command r. itemized fault code revealing reason for specific shutdown fault (any one of 7) This option also provides the upgraded 75VA control transformer with load side short circuit and overload protection via a built in circuit breaker. Warranty:
15855 - 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Climate Master shall warranty equipment for a period of 12 months from start up or 18 months from shipping (which ever occurs first). Provide extended 4-year compressor warranty covers compressor for a total of 5 years. Hose Kit Assemblies: Provide the following assemblies shipped with the valves already assembled to the hose described: a. Supply hose having Y strainer with blowdown valve, and ball valve with PT port; return hose having automatic flow regulator (Measureflo) with PT ports, and ball valve. DDC Sensors: a. Wall mounted DDC sensor with setpoint and adjustment override, LCD display, status/fault indication. PART 3 - EXECUTION Vibration Isolators: Heat pump and air handling unit fans/motors/compressors shall be provided with factory-installed vibration isolators and separated from the air ductwork with flexible connections. The vibration isolation system for each unit shall be designed to eliminate accelerations of building structure throughout the operating range of the fan. P-Traps: Provide P-traps on unit condensate drain connections with seal depths at least equal to the total static pressure of the unit as installed. Trap shall be of sufficient depth to prevent water standing in drain pan when unit is operational. P-traps shall be constructed of pipe and tees only, elbows shall not be used. All unused openings of tees shall be closed with removable plugs which shall serve as cleanouts. Extend condensate drains to nearest floor or hub drain. Motor Controller: Cooperate with Division 16 and transmit written certification of the required overload heater size, and the required motor controllers NEMA size and type as necessary to prevent job delays. Start-Up: Provide factory representative for start-up of units. END OF SECTION 15855
FANS, O.A. INTAKES, AND RELIEF AIR VENTS
15860 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15860 - FANS, O.A. INTAKES, AND RELIEF AIR VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide fans as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: Ratings: Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA certified ratings seal. Ratings of fans shall be not less than the values shown on the Drawings, based on 69.8 degree F and 29.92-inches of Hg atmospheric pressure. Construction: Fan construction shall be in accordance with AMCA classes of construction for the intended duty. Fan wheels, shafts, and drives shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory as a unit. Balance reports shall be factory-certified to the Engineer. Drives: Provide drives with a minimum belt horsepower capacity of 120 percent of the motor nameplate horsepower. All exhaust fans requiring 1-1/2 HP or larger motor shall include the fan drive selection calculations with the submittal. The selection calculations shall include the correction factor for arc of contact. The submittal data shall identify the source of the selection data. Motor Sheaves: Motor sheaves shall be Browning Type LVP, MVP, or approved equal, adjustable-type with double locking feature. Motor sheaves shall be selected for the rated fan RPM, and shall be adjustable to as close as 10 percent above and below the rated fan speed. Fan Sheaves: Provide non-adjustable sheaves with removable machined bushings. Sheaves shall be machined on all surfaces. Sheaves with over three grooves shall be dynamically balanced, and the manufacturer shall so designate on each sheave. Fan sheaves with 3 grooves or less shall be statically balanced, and weights required for balancing shall be welded to the sheaves. Manufacturers shall be Browning, Eaton, Yale, and Towne, Dodge Manufacturing Company, or Fort Worth Steel and Machinery Company.
15860 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Belts: Provide standard "V-groove" belts suitable for the service intended with the required capacities. The belts shall be closely matched and tagged prior to delivery to the job site. If the belts do not appear to be properly matched during operation, they shall be rechecked and, if necessary, replaced. Belts shall be manufactured by Gates, Durkee-Atwood, Goodyear, Browning, or Uniroyal. Bearings: Provide SKF, Sealmaster, Timken, or Fafnir, externally or internally mounted, grease-lubricated, self-aligning ball bearings. Bearings shall have grease-type zerk fittings. Motor Mount: Motors shall be mounted on an adjustable base rigidly supported on the fan, and shall have extended shaft to accommodate the adjustable pitch sheave. Motors: See Section 15015 for motor requirements.
CENTRIFUGAL FANS: General: Provide centrifugal fans of the single-width, single-inlet type with either forward or backward curved fan blades, and adjustable belt drives. Motors: Provide standard dripproof motors. Provide cast-iron housings for motors larger than 10 HP, riveted or spot-weld wheels with steel rims and hub plates. Fans: Blades shall be die-cut, die-formed, and hubs shall be machined close-grained cast-iron. Steel housings shall have lock-seam construction with discharge reinforcement, and shall be adjustable with continuous inlet collars. Provide weather-proof enclosure for motors and drive, if units are exposed to weather. Manufacturer: The equipment scheduled on the Drawings shall establish design requirements. Equipment that meets or exceeds these standards; manufactured by Buffalo Forge, Sturtevant, American Blower, Chicago, Trane, Barry, York, Cook, Greenheck Twin City, or Clarage will be acceptable. UPBLAST CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUSTERS: General: Fans shall be upblast centrifugal belt driven type. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Housings: Shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. Windbands shall have a rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to curbcaps with a welded seam. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring.
15860 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Motors and Drives: Motor shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be sealed for a minimum life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum catalogued operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment. Manufacturer: The equipment scheduled on the Drawings shall establish design requirements. Equipment that meets or exceeds these standards; manufactured by Acme, Cook, Greenheck or Penn acceptable. CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUSTERS: General: Provide centrifugal exhausters of the vertical or horizontal discharge design. Housing shall incorporate exterior windbands to enable velocity to discharge exhaust above the roof surface. A drainage area shall be provided at the bottom. Integral intake fan to force cool motor compartment through breather tubes. Motors: Provide standard drip proof motors. Fans: Fans shall be of the air-foil, non-overloading centrifugal type and shall be of aluminum and shall be spark proof. Provide U-belt drive for fan. Housing: Shall be of mill finish spun aluminum construction. Provide integral disconnect, UL rated, switch for fan motor. Provide diamond mesh aluminum expanded metal bird and debris guard. Provide backdraft damper.
15860 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Manufacturer: The equipment scheduled on the Drawings shall establish design requirements. Equipment that meets or exceeds these standards will be acceptable. SIDEWALL PROPELLER FAN: General: Provide belt driven axial sidewall exhaust fans as scheduled on the Drawings. Construction: Propeller construction shall be die formed blades attached to a spider hub. The spider hub shall consist of die formed steel arms fastened to a machined steel insert. A standard square key and two set screws shall lock the propeller to the shaft. A ground and polished steel shaft shall be mounted in permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing pillow blocks. All motor sheaves shall be adjustable and drives sized for a minimum of 165% of driven horsepower. Pulleys must be machined cast iron and keyed to shafts. The drive frame assembly shall be formed steel construction. Mounting members shall be slotted to allow adjustment and centering propeller. The fan panel shall have prepunched mounting holes, formed flanges with welded corners and a deep formed venturi. AXIAL FANS: General: Provide vane-axial and tube-axial fans constructed of heavy gage welded steel, hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Direct drive fans shall have motor support systems acceptable to the Engineer. Lubricated fittings shall be extended to the outside of the fan casing. Fan: Fan blades shall be individually adjustable. Each fan and fan wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced, and shall be so certified. Fans handling untreated air shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at 0 degree F and 100 degree F across the fan. Motors: Provide motors having totally-enclosed air over (TEAO) type, a service factor of 1.0, with Class F epoxy enameled copper windings. Accessories: Provide welded steel inlet and outlet cones, hot-dipped galvanized, and painted after fabrication, for each fan. Manufacturer: The equipment scheduled on the Drawings shall establish the design requirements. Equipment which meets or exceeds these requirements, and as manufactured by Buffalo, Sturtevant, Trane, Joy, Woods, or Flakt, shall be acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
15860 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
VENTILATING AND EXHAUST FANS: General: Ventilating and exhaust fans not having integral vibration isolation shall be mounted on or suspended by vibration isolators as specified under Section 15245. Where ductwork is connected to fans, Contractor shall provide UL labeled flexible duct connections. Curbs: Factory-fabricated roof curbs shall be supplied by Mechanical Contractor to the General Contractor for installation by the General Contractor. END OF SECTION 15860
FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES
15885 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15885 - FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide filters and accessories as specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AIR FILTERS: Throw-Away Filters: Provide 2-inch thick throw-away filters for fan coil units. Filters shall be shall be UL labeled with Class II rating, and shall be American Air Filter "Am Air" or Farr 30/30 with MERV 11 rating. AHU Filters: Provide 4"-inch thick filters for all air handling units as scheduled on the drawings. Filter shall be UL labeled with Class II rating, 4" deep, 60-65% efficient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION AIR FILTERS: Under no circumstances shall any air-handling unit or fan and coil unit which is shown or specified to be furnished with filters be operated without filters in-place. Filters on units used during construction shall be replaced as necessary to keep the inside of the units clean and as directed by General Contractor. In the event that units are operated without filters in-place or with filters which have been damaged so as to allow air to bypass filter, the Contractor shall steam clean all coils and fans in that particular system before balancing the system. In all cases, filters shall be of the proper size and installed in filter racks in such a manner that there will be no leakage of air around filters. Filters which have been torn, distorted, or damaged in any other way will not be acceptable. All testing and balancing of air-side systems shall be done using clean filters.
FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES
15885 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Upon completion of the project and before final acceptance, all disposable media filters shall be replaced with new media. This requirement is in addition to the requirement that a stock of replaceable filter media, sufficient to replace all media in the project one time, be left for the Owner's maintenance use.
DUCTWORK
15890- 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15890 - DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide ductwork as hereby defined to include sheet metal ductwork with velocities not exceeding 2500 fpm and static pressures not exceeding 2 inches w.g. Types: The types of ductwork specified in this Section include, but are not limited to the following: Air conditioning supply and return air systems Mechanical exhaust systems Outside air duct systems QUALITY ASSURANCE: SMACNA Standards: Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA), Fifth edition recommendations for fabrication, construction, details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in these Specifications. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) recommendations, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in these Specifications. NFPA Standards: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard of Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems". SUBMITTALS: Shop Drawings: Ductwork submittals shall include ductwork fabrication drawings and submittal data on ductwork specialties and construction details. Ductwork fabrication drawings shall be drawings to scale on building floor plans and shall indicate duct sizes, locations of traverse joints, fittings, ductwork bottom elevation, offsets, ductwork specialties and all other information required for coordination with other trades and fabrication of ductwork.
DUCTWORK
15890- 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Duct specialties and construction details shall include information on traverse and longitudinal joints, cross-breaking or traverse beading, dampers, flexible connectors, transitions, elbows, fire and fire/smoke damper connections, branch taps, turning vanes, access doors and other required duct specialties and construction details. Ductwork fabrication drawings shall be coordinated with other trades and building construction prior to submittal for approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains, discoloration, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Gages, Rectangular Ductwork: Fabricate steel ductwork, (galvanized and stainless, if any) from the minimum gages for sizes up to the corresponding maximum long-side dimensions as indicated in SMACNA Duct Manual "Low Velocity Systems". Gages, Round Ductwork: Fabricate steel ductwork (galvanized and stainless, if any) from the minimum gages for diameters up to the corresponding maximum dimensions as indicated in SMACNA Duct Manual "Low Velocity Systems". Sheet Metal: Fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet metal, unless otherwise indicated, complying with ANSI/ASTM A527, Lock forming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A525 G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed locations. MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of the types and sizes indicated, and where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. Duct Sealant: All traverse and longitudinal joints in all sheetmetal ductwork shall be sealed with a water base adhesive sealer designed for use in medium velocity duct systems. Sealer shall be effective against both negative and positive air losses. Sealer shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. Apply un-thinned with brush, trowel or caulking gun as per the manufacturer's recommendations and allow to dry for a minimum of 48 hours before air is applied to the system.
DUCTWORK
15890- 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Sealer shall be "Iron Grip Water Base Duct Sealant #601" as manufactured by Hardcast, Inc. or an approved equal. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim, and angles for support of ductwork. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASC-A-7001 by The Adhesive and Sealant Council, Inc. (see SMACNA standards). Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA. Flexible Duct (Low Pressure): Flexible duct shall be used downstream from VAV terminal units if and where shown on the drawings. All flexible duct shall be assumed to be low pressure unless noted as being high pressure. Where flexible duct is used it shall be limited to a maximum length of 8' per run. Where longer runs are required, provide rigid duct work. Insulated low pressure flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel or spiral aluminum helix. Seamless inner liner shall be composed of: 1, 2, or 3-ply aluminum, coated glass fabric; a combination of aluminum, fiber glass, and aluminized polyester; or "Tedler" film. Insulation shall be nominal 1-inch thick fiberglass with a maximum thermal conductance of 0.23 btu/hr/sf/degree F. The assembly shall be sheathed in a vapor barrier jacket. The flexible duct assembly shall be suitable for a minimum of 4" w.c. working pressure and shall be listed Class I by the Underwriter's Laboratory at a flame spread of not over 25 and a smoke developed rate of not over 50. Ducts shall also comply with NFPA Standard 90A. Flexible ducts shall be installed in a fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. Bends in any length of flexible duct shall not exceed a total of 135 degree. Where flexible duct length exceeds 72", horizontal support is required. Duct shall be suspended on 36 inch centers with a minimum 3/4 inch wide flat banding material and a minimum 6" wide sheet metal protective saddle. All joints and connections shall be made by turning back the insulation and securing the inner liner with 1/2-inch wide positive locking stainless steel or self-locking nylon straps as manufactured by Panduit Corporation, or approved equal, and sealing with an approved duct tape. The insulation shall then be placed over the joint and sealed on the exterior with an approved duct tape and another 1/2-inch wide positive locking stainless steel or self-locking nylon straps as manufactured by Panduit Corporation.
Insulated low-pressure flexible duct shall be one of the following: Flexmaster type 2, 3, or 3M
DUCTWORK
15890- 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
G.I. Industries type IHP-25 Clevaflex type 12FV, SVF or SFA Wiremold type 57K or CRK All round take-offs shall be made with a damper extractor spin-collar. Spin-ins shall be installed with a damper axis parallel to air flow. The damper shall be provided with an access door or remote regulator as specified for sheetmetal ductwork volume dampers for spin-ins installed in inaccessible locations. Flexible Duct (High Pressure): Flexible duct shall be used upstream from VAV terminal units if and where shown on the drawings. Insulated high pressure flexible duct shall be factory fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel or spiral aluminum helix. Seamless inner liner shall be composed of: 1, 2, or 3-ply aluminum; coated glass fabric; a combination of aluminum, fiberglass, and aluminized polyester; or "Tedler" film. Insulation shall be nominal 1-inch thick fiberglass with a maximum thermal conductance of 0.23 btu/hr/sf/degree F. The assembly shall be sheathed in a vapor barrier jacket. The flexible duct assembly shall be suitable for a minimum of 10" w.c. working pressure and shall be listed Class I by the Underwriter's Laboratory at a flame spread of not over 25 and a smoke developed rate of not over 50. Ducts shall also comply with NFPA Standard 90A. Flexible ducts shall be installed in a fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. Bends in any length of flexible duct shall not exceed 90 degree. Where flexible duct length exceeds 72", horizontal support is required. Duct shall be suspended on 36 inch centers with a minimum 3/4 inch wide flat banding material and a minimum 6" wide sheetmetal protective saddle. All joints and connections shall be made by turning back the insulation and securing the inner liner with 1/2-inch wide positive locking stainless steel or self-locking nylon straps as manufactured by Panduit Corporation or approved equal and sealing with an approved duct tape. The insulation shall then be placed over the joint and sealed on the exterior with an approved duct tape and another 1/2-inch wide positive locking stainless steel or self-locking nylon straps as manufactured by Panduit Corporation. Insulated high pressure flexible duct shall be one of the following: Flexmaster type 2 or 3M G.I. Industries type IHP-25 Clevaflex type 12FV, SVF or SFA Wiremold type CRK All round take-offs shall be made with a damper extractor spin-collar. Spin-ins shall be installed with their damper axis parallel to air flow. Flex Duct Connections to Air Devices and VAV terminal Units: Connections to air
DUCTWORK
15890- 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
devices and VAV terminal units with flexible duct shall be made by turning back the insulation and securing the inner liner with 1/2-inch wide positive locking stainless steel or self-locking nylon straps as manufactured by Panduit Corporation or approved equal and sealing with an approved duct tape. The insulation shall then be placed over the joint and sealed on the exterior with an approved duct tape and another 1/2-inch wide positive locking stainless steel or self-locking nylon straps as manufactured by Panduit Corporation. PART 3 - EXECUTION FABRICATION: Standards: Round and rectangular sheet metal ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with First edition 1985; "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" (Class 2" W.G.), ASHRAE Guide and Data Book, "Handbook of Fundamentals", latest edition, specifically Chapter 33; and NFPA Standard 90-A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". Duct sizes shown are clear inside dimensions. Where duct-liner is required, increase each dimension to accommodate that liner. DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS: Rectangular Ductwork: Joints and seams in ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with Table 1-4EX for 1-inch w.g. pressure and 1-5EX for 2-inch w.g., SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards". Drive slips for rectangular ductwork may be used on short side only, up to 18 inches maximum. Gage of drive slips shall be at least as heavy as ductwork on which they are installed. Bend drive slips over at least 3/4 inch at corners. At the Contractor`s option, ductwork may be joined with "Ductmate" connections as manufactured by Ductmate Industries of Pittsburgh, PA. Round Ductwork: Transverse joints for round ductwork shall be slip-type properly secured and sealed. Draw bands shall not be used on "spiral" ductwork. All Joints: Seal all transverse and longitudinal joints using SMACNA-approved mastic or non-hardening sealant. BRANCH CONNECTIONS AND TAKE-OFFS: General: Where square take-offs to diffuser within 18 inches are shown, provide extractors with external adjustment, Titus AG-45 with No. 2 operator or approved equal. ELBOWS AND TEES: General: Where radius elbows on rectangular ductwork are shown on ducts, centerline radius shall be 1-1/2 times duct width and radius of throats shall be equal to
DUCTWORK
15890- 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
duct width. Square throats for radius elbows will not be acceptable. Where square elbows on rectangular ductwork are shown, provide single-thickness, turning vanes constructed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Trailing edge single thickness vanes shall not be used. In duct over 36 inches high, multiple sections on single thickness vanes shall be used. Elbows in round ductwork shall be constructed with not less than the number of sections stipulated in SMACNA Standards. Turning vanes used in transition elbows shall be installed to cut smoothly into the air stream and direct air out of the elbow parallel to the sides of the duct. Use adjustable vanes where required. TRANSFORMATIONS: General: Where duct width increases, maximum angle of slope on a side shall be 20 degrees (1 inch in 2.7 inches). Where duct width decreases, maximum angle of slope on a side shall be 30 degrees (1 inch in 1.7 inches). INSULATION STOPS: Provide insulation stops whenever a duct transitions from lined to wrapped such that the inside surface of the lined duct is flush to the inside surface of the unlined duct and there is an even surface for air flow. Also, provide insulation stops whenever lined duct is terminated with an open end (e.g., return air boots). The sheet metal on all four sides shall be bent inward at 90 degrees in an amount equal to the thickness of the duct liner. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK: General: Flexible ductwork shall be provided as shown on Drawings. In no case shall total angularity of turns in any one section of flexible ductwork exceed 135 degrees, and radius of turns shall not exceed that recommended by the flexible ductwork manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the length of any one run of flexible ductwork shall not exceed 8 feet. FLEXIBLE JOINTS IN DUCTWORK: General: Provide flexible connections where ductwork connects to air-handling units, fans, and similar items, and where required for expansion and contraction of the ductwork or the building structure. Flexible connections shall be rigidly connected to metal work on each side and shall be airtight. Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK: General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve airtight and noiseless systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with a minimum of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8-inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of the type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and prevent buckling.
DUCTWORK
15890- 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as required to avoid delays in the work. Completion: Complete fabrication of work at the project as necessary to match stop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. Run Location: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space, or block access for servicing the building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. Limit clearance to 0.5 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork to assure 1.0 inch clearance of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate the layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. Flanges: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal the space between the construction opening and the duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of the same gage as the duct. Overlap the opening on all sides by at least 1-1/2-inches. Coordination: Coordinate duct installation with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls, and other associated work of the ductwork system. Ductwork Support: Support ductwork from building structure as required in SMACNA Duct Manual "Low Velocity Systems". Anchorage and support of all ducts and equipment shall comply with local codes and standards for support. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: General: Clean ductwork internally, section-by-section of dust and debris as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of the metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint damage. Repairs: Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish or replace ductwork portion wherever it has been damaged (tenant). Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at the time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent the entrance of dust and debris until such time that connections are to be completed.
DUCTWORK
15890- 8
1 2
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15910 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL: RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide ductwork accessories as required for the project including the following: Extractors Turning vanes Monitors Splitter dampers Access doors Straightening grids Fire dampers Fire/smoke dampers QUALITY ASSURANCE: SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) "High Pressure" and "Low Velocity" Duct Construction Standards. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. SUBMITTALS: Shop Drawings: Show modifications of indicated requirements, if applicable, made to conform to local shop practice, and show how these modifications ensure that the materials and weights are not reduced and that the fabricated units are equivalent to the specified requirements in every significant way.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES, MATERIALS, AND FABRICATION: General: Provide ductwork accessories which comply with the Sections 15890 and 15910 for applicable product requirements of ductwork materials.
15910 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: General: Flexible connections shall be UL labeled, 30 ounce glass fabric lined with insulation, and coated on both sides with Neoprene, complete with attachment accessories, "VentGlass" by Vent-Fabrics, Inc. or approved equal. DUCTWORK HARDWARE: General: Damper operators for concealed inaccessible ductwork shall be Young Regulator Co. Catalog No. 700 or No. 315 as shown. Non-insulated accessible ductwork shall be Young Regulator Co. Catalog No. 433. Accessible insulation ductwork shall be Young Regulator Co. Catalog No. 443. Approved equal units by Duo-Dyne, or Vent Fabrics, Inc. will be acceptable. Concealed operators must be accessible through grilles or lights without visible operators covers in ceiling. DIRECTION AND VOLUME CONTROL AND FIRE DAMPERS: General: Provide all direction and volume control and fire dampers shown or noted on Drawings. All damper control devices shall be installed so as to be fully concealed in finished rooms and spaces. Control Dampers: Splitter Dampers: Splitter dampers shall not be less than 16 gage. Splitter dampers shall be 1-1/2 times the width of narrowest duct leaving split, except not less than 12 inches long, and shall have not more than 1/4 inch less height than duct in which it is installed. Splitter dampers having area less than 2.25 square feet shall be adjusted by means of a locking quadrant mounted on end of shaft. Splitter dampers having larger area shall be adjusted by means of one or more push rods in accordance with SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards". Extractors: Provide extractors of the size and type indicated, with hex-key operated adjustable blades, with gang-operated galvanized steel blades on 1-inch centers. Pressure Taps: Where rectangular take-offs of branches from main ducts are shown with 45 degree entry, provide manual volume regulators with lockable operators, where shown or where required for balancing system. Round Taps: Where taps to main ducts or their branches are shown, provide 45 degree angle taps or 90 degree "spin-in" taps with manual volume dampers. Multi-Leaf Dampers: Where multi-leaf dampers are shown, provide opposed blade type in accordance with Fig. 2-15, SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards". Fire Dampers: Provide dynamic rated fire dampers at duct penetrations of floors, smoke partitions, fire walls, elsewhere as shown in the Drawings, and where required by City of Austin Building Code. Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in
15910 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
accordance with UL Safety Standards 555, 4th Edition. Each fire damper shall have a 212 degrees fusible link and shall include a UL Label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures. Manufacturer's literature submitted for approval prior to installation shall include comprehensive performance data developed from testing in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-89 and shall illustrate pressure drops for all sizes of dampers required at all anticipated air flow rates. Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the location shown. Fire dampers shall be installed in wall and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles, other materials and practices required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers were tested at UL. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555 and manufacturer's instructions. Fire dampers shall be Ruskin Type DIBD2, DIBD23, Style B or C as required. Provide factory furnished sleeves and mounting angles. Provide 1-hour-rated dampers where penetrations are in required 1-hour fire-rated assemblies. Provide 1-1/2-hour-rated dampers where penetrations are in required 2-hour fire-rated assemblies. Provide 3-hour-rated dampers where penetrations are in required 4-hour fire-rated assemblies; 4-hour occupancy separating walls are excepted. COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS: Furnish and install combination fire/smoke dampers at locations shown on plans, or as described in schedules and where required by Building Code. Fire/Smoke Damper shall be 1-1/2 hour rated or 3-hour rated fire damper (depending on wall rating) under UL standard 555, and shall further be classified by UL as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems by the latest version of UL 555S , bear a UL label attesting to same. Damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers required by this specification. Testing and qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL 555S shall be no higher than leakage class III. The dampers and their operators shall be qualified under UL 555S to a minimum elevated temperature of 250 F. Electric operators (120 volt) shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper operators shall be sideplate mounted out of the airstream and shall be normally closed (i.e.,fail closed upon loss of power). Each combination Fire/Smoke Damper shall be equipped with a fusible link which shall melt at 212 F causing the damper to close and lock in a closed position. Damper shall be Ruskin Model FSD-36, or equal by Air Balance. Provide a fire-stat for each smoke/fire damper associated with the smoke exhaust risers
15910 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING: General: Flashing and counterflashing shall be as specified in other Divisions of these Specifications. TURNING VANES: General: Provide turning vanes in the size and type indicated with the following additional construction features: Blades: 2-inch radius galvanized steel for up to an including 18-inch high ducts. Blades: 4-1/2-inch radius galvanized steel for ducts over 18 inches high. Construction: Single wall blades. Types: Fixed blades for 90-degree elbows, adjustable for transition elbows, and fixed for 45 degree elbows where shown. DUCT ACCESS DOORS: General: Provide hinged duct access doors, gasketed, and with insulation where ductwork is indicated to be insulated. Provide construction per SMACNA Standards. Access doors shall be at least 15-inches x 15-inches. Inspection Plates: Provide inspection plates as detailed on the Drawings. If not detailed, provide a minimum opening of 4-inches x 4-inches with a 6-inch x 6-inch coverplate. The coverplate shall be one gage heavier than the ductwork, gasketed and secured with a minimum of 8 sheet metal screws. MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: General: Provide miscellaneous materials for ductwork accessories, including hinges, refrigerator latches, sash locks, bolts and wing nuts, gaskets, and pitot tubes as recommended by the ductwork accessories manufacturer for the application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Access Doors: Install access doors so that the doors open against the system air pressure wherever feasible, and that their latches are operable from either side, except where the duct is too small to be entered. Provide access to each fire damper link to permit resetting. Comply with City of [Austin] Code and NFPA No. 96.
15910 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Inspection Plates: Install plates at each multi-zone zone damper and where otherwise indicated on the Plans. Multi-Leaf Dampers: Install multi-leaf volume dampers in each zone duct of multi-zone units and as otherwise required for balancing. Splitter Dampers: Install splitter dampers at all divisions of ductwork for proper air pattern control. Turning Vanes: The maximum unsupported vane length shall not exceed 36 inches. Vanes shall be installed in sections or tie rods shall be used to limit the unbraced vane length. TESTING: General: Check installed ductwork accessories for required operation and leakproof performance during the system's operational test. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. END OF SECTION 15910
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
15930 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 15930 - AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide air distribution devices as required for the project including the following: Ceiling air diffusers Grilles and registers Linear grilles Linear boot diffusers
QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Devices manufactured by Metalaire, Titus, Krueger, Anemostat/Waterloo, Aeronca, Carnes, or Barber-Colman will be acceptable if the devices furnished comply with these Specifications, the conditions scheduled, and are similar in appearance to the units scheduled. NFPA Compliance: Comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 90, as applicable to air diffuser construction and installation. Design Compliance: If so directed by the Engineer, test air outlets to determine compliance with these Specifications. Perform all revisions required to comply with terminal velocity, noise level, or maximum temperature variation requirements at no cost to the Owner. Air Distribution Equipment: Maximum space temperature variation shall not exceed 2 degree F through the conditioned area from 2 feet - 0 inches above the floor, to 7 feet 0 inches above the floor. The air outlets shall be selected by the manufacturer to suit the volume, throw, and noise level scheduled or shown on the Drawings, and maintain maximum terminal velocities of 50 FPM, unless otherwise indicated. SUBMITTALS: Manufacturer's Test Data: Include test data and results as specified herein. Certify test results by an authorized officer of the company.
15930 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
BALANCING ACCESSORIES: General: Provide factory-calibrated balancing cones for use in air balancing all types of ceiling outlets, linear diffusers, or any other special outlet. All cones shall be calibrated for use with Alnor velometer, and identified with air-flow factors permanently indicated on the sides of the cones. Cones shall be delivered to the Owner prior to Owner acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES: General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide air distribution devices of the size, shape, and type, constructed of materials and components, and with finishes as indicated in the schedule on the Drawings. Apply corrosion-resistant treatment to all surfaces prior to applying prime coat. Ceiling Diffusers: Provide diffusers with corrosion resistant treated surfaces, and finished in off-white baked enamel unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Provide volume control dampers with each supply air diffuser. Where applicable, provide adapters with diffusers to permit connection to round supply duct. Register and Grilles: General: Provide registers which contain a key-operated multi-louvered opposed blade damper operable from the face side. Supply Air Register: Provide all supply air registers of the double deflection type. Finishes: Anodize devices constructed of aluminum. Submit color selection to Architect for approval. Return Air Grilles and Return Air Registers: Provide grilles and registers which have fixed face blades and match the face of the supply air registers, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Perimeter Supply Slot Diffuser: Provide slot-type supply diffuser with length and width as indicated on the Drawings. The supply diffuser shall be installed above the ceiling and located as indicated on the Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. The perimeter supply linear boot diffuser shall have an internal, fixed, curved, aerodynamically-shaped outlet designed to provide the maximum amount of induced secondary room air. The supply air shall be discharged horizontally along the ceiling as indicated on the Drawings. The diffuser shall be designed, tested, and constructed in a manner so as to comply
15930 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
with the performance criteria and sound level requirements specified hereinafter. Plenum shall be constructed of at least 24 gage galvanized steel and shall be reinforced as required. The air volume, length, and duct connection size shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The plenum manufacturer shall coordinate the attachment, support, and similar features of the supply plenum with the ceiling Subcontractor. The entire assembly shall be tested as a unit at the manufacturer's laboratory. Coordinate testing to allow witnessing by the Engineer and other Owner representatives. Six certified copies of the test results shall be delivered to the Engineer for review. The test data shall include AK factors for an Alnor velometer, sound data, diffuser static pressure drop, horizontal air throw and drop for the air supply rates per lineal foot of diffusers indicated below. The test data shall be based on a 55 degree F air supply temperature, a 20 degree F temperature differential, and an 85 degree F heating supply air temperature. The plenum shall be painted flat black on interior surfaces, and the exposed surfaces as viewed from below the ceiling system shall be painted flat black. The perimeter ceiling supply diffuser shall be similar to the Titus model detailed on the Drawings. The Architect will have the option to witness additional tests after receipt of certified test results to verify compliance with these Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install air distribution devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended functions. Coordination: Coordinate with other trades, including ductwork and ductwork accessories, as necessary to interface air distribution devices properly with other work. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Test: Test installed devices to demonstrate satisfactory compliance with specified and indicated requirements. END OF SECTION 15930
HVAC CONTROL SEQUENCES
16985 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15985 - HVAC CONTROL SEQUENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Control sequence is hereby defined to mean the manner in which, and methods by which, the automatic temperature controls function.The requirements for each type of operation are specified in this Section. The controls in the Starr Garage will connect to the BCS being installed in the Starr Building Renovation. Refer to the Specifications for a description of that system. Work of Other Sections: The operating equipment, devices, and system components required for the automatic temperature control system are specified by Section 15966, "Digital Control System". Extent: The extent of this automatic temperature control system work is as shown on the Drawings and in schedules, and by the control performance requirements specified in this Section. ATC shall provide the provision of labor, materials, documentation and services required to implement the hereinafter described sequence of operations along with the point definitions shown on the Drawings. BCS control sequences shall execute only when the associated hands/off/auto motor control switches are in the auto position. Safety interlocks such as firestats, freezestats, smoke and fire detectors and interlocked dampers shall be wired by this subcontractor such that they are operational when the HOA switch is in both the HAND and AUTO position. Any safety interlocks shall not be overridden by BCS. Equipment Failure: A piece of equipment shall be considered to have "failed" in the event that its status, as monitored by the BCS does not correspond with the BCS commanded status. Whenever the BCS commanded and monitored status are different an alarm shall be generated and the system associated with that piece of equipment shall be shut down and placed in manual mode without affecting the action of any safety or protection interlocks. Start up of the system shall only be possible following a manually entered start command. The system shall not be started by automatic BCS generated commands.
16985 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
The terms "normally open or NO" and "normally closed or NC", when applied to DDC controlled devices in these specifications and on the drawings, mean that a device actuated to the indicated position by a stored energy device (e.g., a spring) upon a loss of power. An example of the use of such devices is to close outside air dampers (NC) to prevent freezing cold air from entering the building. SUBMITTALS: General: Refer to Division 1 and Section 15010 for required submittal procedures. Submittals on temperature control work are required for shop drawings, manufacturer's data, operating instructions, maintenance manuals, wiring diagrams, the system guarantee, and product warranties.
PART 2 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION Control Type A - Factory-Built Water Source Heat Pump Units -- Draw-Through Type: These units shall be of the draw-through type with a direct expansion cooling/heating coil. These units shall have a control system as follows: 1) Start/Stop Control: Unit is enabled thorough BCS. 2) Temperature Control: When the fan is operating, the coil capacity shall be controlled by a thermostat furnished by the heat pump manufacturer. 3) Outside Air Control: Pretreated outside air is ducted to the return air plenum at each unit. 4) Smoke Detector Control: Smoke detectors in the unit inlet air path shall deenergize the air handling fan when the presence of smoke or fire is detected. The smoke detectors will be furnished and installed under Division 16. A hardwired interlock shall shut down the FCU fan when a fire alarm is initiated. 5)Condensate Overflow Sensor: An overflow sensor located in the primary drain pan shall initiate an alarm at the BCS whenever the water level in the drain pan exceeds a normal operating level. Control Type B-Factory-Built Fan Coil Units--Air-Cooled Draw -Through Type: These units shall be of the draw-through, split system type with a direct expansion cooling coil and electric heat. These units shall have a control system as follows and as detailed in the Control Diagrams and Point Definitions on the Drawings: 1) Start/Stop Control: Unit is enabled by manual power switch. 2) Temperature Control: When the fan is operating, the cooling coil capacity and electric heating coil shall be controlled by a thermostat furnished by the
16985 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
fan coil unit manufacturer. Space temperature shall be monitored by analog inputs from space sensor which will alarm the BCS if space temperature rises above 80F (adjustable). 3) Outside Air Control: Not applicable 4) Smoke Detector Control: Smoke detectors located in the fan discharge duct from the unit and in the unit inlet air path shall de-energize the air handling fan when the presence of smoke or fire is detected. The smoke detectors will be furnished and installed under Division 16. A hardwired interlock shall shut down the FCU fan when a fire alarm is initiated. 5) Float Switch: A float switch in the primary drain pan shall initiate an alarm at the BCS whenever the water level in the drain pan exceeds a normal operating level. SAFETY CONTROLS: For each supply fan and exhaust fan handling over 2000 CFM, or additionally required by code, high temperature thermostats shall be located in the air stream. When the air temperature exceeds 125 degree F, the air-handling unit fan motor shall be de-energized. Where ionization smoke detectors are provided under Division 16, the high temperature thermostats may be omitted. Sump Pumps: Monitor float switches in sump pits. Float switches by ATC. Temperature Alarms: Monitor temperatures in the following rooms and alarm as indicated: elevator machine rooms (high), electric rooms (high), pump room (high/low). Generator Monitoring: Monitor status and alarms of standby generator located in garage. Coordinate number and type of alarms available with generator supplier. Project Completion: Prior to project substantial completion the following items must be completed: -Test each controller and its control function. -Verify that each VAV box damper is fully closed when signaled to be closed by the VAV box controller. -Adjust the damper linkage as required to obtain tight closure. -Test all system software. -Input all system setpoints. -Program all schedules. -Calibrate all VAV setpoints in conjunction with the testing and balancing subcontractor's work. -Verify full and complete communication between AHU controllers and BCS.
16985 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Provide a written report stating that all items listed above have been successfully completed listing the date, time and the person conducting the test. Provide a certification signed by a corporate officer that the report is accurate and that all testing has been successfully completed. Provide necessary test equipment and personnel to demonstrate the operation and calibration of selected system components to the Owner and Engineer, if so requested by the Owner. The Engineer shall select the components of the Temperature Control System to be demonstrated.
End of Section 15985
HVAC OPERATIONAL TEST-ADJUST-BALANCE
15990 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 15990 - HVAC OPERATIONAL TEST-ADJUST-BALANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Fully examine the Drawings and Specifications for this project and determine whether or not sufficient volume dampers, balancing valves, thermometers, gages, pressure and temperature taps, means of reading static and total pressure in duct systems, means of determining water flow, and other means of taking data needed for proper water and air balancing are shown or specified. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, any items have been omitted, notify the Architect in writing and receive clarification before submitting a proposal for this project. Tender of a proposal conveys full agreement to the system as designed and the balancing means provided. Provide all items required, but not shown, at no additional cost to the Owner. Test, adjust, and balance systems to optimize operating and comfort conditions. Record test data as outlined hereinafter and submit for review and approval. Systems shall be fully tested prior to Building acceptance. Conduct all tests as specified herein, and as required by authorities having jurisdiction, including Local Inspection Department, Owner, Architect, or Engineer. Repair or replace all defects discovered or resulting from the required tests to a like new condition. Coordinate and assist Special Inspection Testing Agency in its testing of the building smoke control systems. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Personnel: Submit evidence to show that the personnel who will actually balance the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) will be sufficient. The Architect reserves the right to require that the originally approved personnel be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in his opinion, the original personnel are not
15990 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
qualified or are not properly conducting the system balancing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS No products are required. PART 3 - EXECUTION TEST DATA: General: Record test data after all balancing has been completed, and deliver recorded data to the Architect for review and evaluation. Should deficiencies or discrepancies be found, repeat balancing procedures to achieve correct test data results. Certify the test and balancing data as being true and correct over the Contractor's signature. Execute the Certification by an authorized officer if the contracting firm is a corporation, by a partner if the firm is a partnership, by the firm's owner if the firm is a sole proprietorship, or by the authorized representative if the firm is a joint venture. Include a copy of the approved test and balancing data in the Owner's Manual. Test Forms: Record and submit test and balancing data on forms similar to those of the AABC or NEBB. CALIBRATION LIST: Submit to the Architect for approval a list of the gages, thermometers, velometer, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system. Submit evidence to show that the balancing devices are properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing. PRELIMINARY AIR TESTS: General: Preliminary air tests using smoke candles shall be performed before ductwork or equipment is enclosed in walls, floors, ceilings, chases, or in any other way concealed from view. Tests may be conducted on individual systems. Tests will be witnessed by the Engineer. Submit notification when systems are ready for preliminary air tests. Make all necessary arrangements to energize fan motors for the tests. Conduct the tests before the application of exterior duct insulation and installation of grilles or diffusers. Remove section of duct to allow design air flow at design static pressure where necessary. Tests: Demonstrate that there is no excessive leakage of the ductwork by visual inspection, that fans are operating at essentially the correct speed, that motors will not overload, and that equipment delivers design CFM. Correct any deficiencies found. Repeat preliminary air tests until tests have proven satisfactory.
15990 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Inspection: Inspection and acceptance of the Work shall, in addition to the foregoing requirements, be subject to the following conditions: Instruments: All test instruments, devices, and similar items, their accuracy and the methods by which instruments are employed, shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use at the job site.
FINAL AIR BALANCE: General: When all tests have been completed, and systems are complete and ready for operation, perform the following steps of final air balance and record the results. Motors: Verify correct rotation of all rotating equipment. Verify that properly sized thermal heater elements are installed in all starters. Verify that properly sized dual-element fuses, where specified, are installed in disconnect switches. Filters: Check air filters or filter media. Balance system only with essentially clean filters or filter media. Blower Speed: Read and adjust RPM at each fan or blower to design requirements. Ampere Readings: Read and record full load amperes for motors. Static Pressures: Read and record static pressure at each fan and blower suction and discharge. Air Flow at Each Unit: Read and record return, outside, and supply air CFM and temperature at each fan and blower. Coil Temperatures: Set thermostat for full cooling and for full heating loads. Read and record entering and leaving dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures at each cooling coil, heating coil, and powered mixing box. Variable Air Volume Boxes: Read, record, and adjust the cooling and heating cfm, inlet and outlet static pressures, stages of heating, and temperature rise. Zone Air Flow: Adjust each zone for design CFM. Provide openings in secondary duct if required to set CFM. Outlet Air Flow: Adjust each air exhaust inlet and supply diffuser, register, and grille to within plus or minus 10 percent of design air CFM. Dampers in diffusers may be used for only 10 percent adjustment from full open air flow. Include all terminal points of air supply, and all points of exhaust. READJUSTMENT:
15990 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
General: Once during 6 months to 1 year after Final Acceptance, adjust each fan and blower to a new rotative speed as selected by the Owner. Provide 2 sets of fixed drives and necessary labor for installation to accomplish all required fan-speed adjustments during this period. END OF SECTION 15990
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
16010 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - Specification section, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: General: This Section specifies several categories of provisions for electrical work, including: 1) Certain adaptive expansions of requirements specified in Division 1; 2) General performance requirements within the electrical systems as a whole; and 3) General work to be performed as electrical work, because of its close association. Drawings: Refer to the Electrical Drawings for graphic representations, schedules, and notations showing electrical work. Specifications: Refer to this Division 16 for the primary technical specifications of electrical work. Work Included: This work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, operators, and appurtenances required for complete installation of the major facilities as systems as follows: 277/480 Volt Power Distribution System 120/208 Volt Power Distribution System Lighting Systems Lighting Control Systems Grounding Telecom/Data Distribution Raceway System Electrical Connection to Equipment HVAC Control Wiring Standby Power System Fire Alarm System Lightning Protection System Additional items shown on Drawings, as specified herein, or as required for complete and functioning systems. Work of Other Sections: Requirements given within this section apply to the Work of all Sections of this Division. The actual performance of the Work stays within the Section in which it occurs; but subject to the requirements of this Section, the extent applicable. Finish painting is specified under Division 9. Prime and protective painting are included in the Work of this Division. Motors and motor starters that are an integral part of the equipment shall be furnished under Division 15 with the driven equipment. Variable Frequency Drives shall be furnished under Division 15 with the driven equipment. All other motor starters, electrical wiring, and connections shall be included in the Work of this Division. Equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices are specified under Division 15, except as herein specified
16010 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Access doors in finished surfaces are specified under Division 8. Locations are shown on the Drawings. Provide additional access doors as required to meet code requirements. Coordinate all access door locations with Architect prior to installation. Concrete housekeeping pads, generator pad, busduct water curbs, and conduit ductbank encasement are specified under Division 3. Dimensions and locations of pads, curbs, and ductbank shall be included in the Work of this Division. Refer to Section 16190. COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK: General: Refer to Division 1 for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and mechanical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with conduit and similar services running parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 8 feet - 0 inches overhead clearance where possible. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access and comply with application accessibility (ADA) requirements, and arrange entire electrical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance, and for proper Code clearances. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of electrical work (equipment). Coordination Drawings: Prior to or concurrent with submission of data for switchboards, automatic transfer switches, emergency generators, transformers, panelboards, and other substantial items of electrical equipment, submit = 1-0 scale plan drawings and elevations showing that all equipment fits in the spaces allocated with proper code required clearances. Submittals for this equipment will not be reviewed until these coordination drawings are submitted. For locations where several elements of electrical (or combined mechanical and electrical) work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the installation. Coordination Drawings shall include but not be limited to Electrical rooms, Switchgear rooms, Emergency Generator rooms, Central Plants, Elevator Equipment rooms, Ceiling Plenums (particularly corridor ceiling plenums where cable tray is being installed), and additional areas as required. Ceiling Plenums shall define planes of work and clearly indicate allotted space for light fixtures. Except as noted above, prepare and submit coordination drawings prior to purchase, fabrication, or installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. Electrical equipment shown on the drawing shall be the same equipment and size as shown on equipment shop drawings. Any sleeves and major conduit runs shall be shown on the drawings. CODES, PERMITS, AND FEES: General: Comply with the most recently revised versions of all applicable laws, rules, regulations, and ordinances of Federal, State, and Local Authorities. Modifications required by the above said Authorities shall be made without additional charge to the Owner. Where
16010 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
alterations to and deviations from the Contract Documents are required by said Authority, report the requirements to the Engineer and secure concurrence with proposed alterations and deviations before starting work. Precedence: Where Contract Document requirements are in excess of Code requirements and are permitted under the Code, the Contract Documents shall govern. FEES AND PERMITS: This Contractor shall secure all permits, licenses and inspections required for his work, and shall pay all fees in accordance with such permits, licenses, and inspections. SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION: General: Become familiar with the Drawings and Specifications and examine the premises and understand the conditions under which the Contract shall be performed. Site: Be informed of the utility companies from whom service is supplied; verify locations of utility services and determine the exact requirements and provisions for connection. DRAWINGS: General: The Drawings are schematic in nature and show approximate locations of feeders, circuits, panels, outlets, switches, fixtures, and other materials and devices of the electrical systems except where specific locations are noted and dimensioned on the Drawings. These items are shown approximately to scale and attempt to show how these items should be integrated with building construction. Locate all the various items by on-the-job measurements, conformance with Drawings, and Code requirements. Cooperate with other trades to ensure project completion as indicated. Homeruns or circuitry shown on drawings with no hash marks indicated shall contain two current carrying conductors, either a hot and a neutral or two switch legs, and a ground conductor. Homeruns or circuitry shown on drawings with no conduit size indicated shall have minimum conduit size indicated in Section 16110, unless otherwise specified. Location: Prior to locating light fixtures, coordinate with the Architect in writing as to the exact method of locating fixtures in the various areas. Fixture locations shall not be determined by scaling drawings. Fixture relocations and costs of redoing work of other trades necessitated by failure to comply with this requirement shall be born by the contractor with no additional costs to the Owner. Verify locations of outlets with Architect prior to rough-in installation. Relocation of outlets, switches, boxes, and other devices within 5 feet of location shown on Drawings shall be performed at no additional costs to the Owner when Contractor is informed of necessary relocation before work is begun on affected portion of the job. DISCREPANCIES: Clarification: Clarification shall be obtained before submitting a proposal for the Work under this Division as to apparent discrepancies or omissions from the Contract Documents, or questions as to the intent thereof. Contractor Agreement: Consideration will not be granted for misunderstanding of the amount of work to be performed. Tender of a proposal conveys full agreement of the items and conditions specified, shown on the Drawings, scheduled, and/or required by the nature
16010 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
of the project. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: General: Maintain project record documents at the site as specified in Division 1. Site Prints: Maintain one set of the Contract Documents at the job site which shall be used for recording the final size, location, interrelation, conduit routing, and similar items of all work under this Division. This set of Documents shall be maintained daily as the Work progresses. Failure to do so can result in the rejection of payment applications until the documents are updated. Record (As-Built)Drawings: Maintain a set of drawings at the site with all changes and deviations from the original drawings neatly marked thereon in contrasting color. This set, not used for construction purposes, shall be kept update as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection. Upon completion of the contract and before final payment, this set of as built shall be presented to the Engineer and become the property of the building Owner. Contractor shall provide Auto-Cad as-built drawings. Accuracy: The project record documents shall indicate exact locations of all concealed raceways installed and all pull and junction boxes that are not installed at locations shown. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS: General: Refer to Division 1 for general administrative and procedural requirements related to compliance with codes and standards. Standards: This work shall meet the standards set forth in the applicable portions of the following recognized codes and standards: ADA, Latest Edition. American Standard Codes, ASME, AGA, AMCA, ASA, ANSI, ASHRAE, and ARI. Americans with Disabilities Act Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC). Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) Factory Mutual (FM). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). Insulated Power Cable Engineering Association (IPCEA). National Electrical Code (NEC) Latest Adopted Edition. National Electrical Contractors' Association (NECA). National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). International Building Code, Latest Adopted Edition. Uniform Mechanical Code, Latest Adopted Edition. Uniform Plumbing Code, Latest Adopted Edition. International Fire Code, Latest Adopted Edition. BOCA Basic Building Code, Latest Adopted Edition. City of Austin Building Code State of Texas Elevator Code ANSI Elevator Code Texas Accessibility Standards SUBMITTALS:
16010 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements concerning work-related submittals (refer to other Divisions and/or Sections for administrative submittals). Shop drawings shall have the Engineer's final review prior to equipment ordering or fabrication. All reports or information requiring certification shall be certified by an authorized officer of the manufacturer, or testing agency. Obtain, check, certify, and submit complete Shop Drawings and product data for all materials and equipment specified herein. Furnish certified shop drawings showing dimensions, loading details, anchor bolt locations, and all inserts required for each piece of equipment set on concrete in sufficient time to cause no delay in the Work. Certify that data and details set forth on each shop drawing complies with the Contract Documents for this Project. Unless certified, shop drawings will not be reviewed, and will be returned unchecked to the Contractor. Check all materials and equipment after their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer's office each time a shop drawing, product data, and/or samples are submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling his Work. The Engineer's review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be contained therein, or for deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents. Noting some errors, but overlooking others, does not grant the Contractor authority to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings, the Contract Documents shall govern the work. Electronic Media: Electronic Media for the project is available in AutoCadd version 2009 format. Copies of the Autocadd files can be made available at the Contractors expense on CD-ROM disks. The Electronic Media is for the intended use of this project only and shall not be used by any party, in whole or in part, for any other project. Contractor shall have an acceptance period of 10 working days to review and accept CADD files delivered. The Electronic Media is intended to assist the Contractor in the preparation of shop drawings for this project and is to be considered as guide only. The Electronic Media as provided does not relieve the Contractor of any contract responsibilities as defined in the contract documents and specifications. The Electronic Media provided shall be modified as required by the Contractor to reflect only the items being submitted and shall be the Contractors responsibilities for completeness and coordination as defined by the contract documents and specifications. The Contractor agrees to provide the Owner and Architect/Engineer an Electronic Media copy of the approved shop drawings in the same format as indicated above. The Contractor agrees to warrant the Autocadd files as submitted for a 60 day acceptance period, and any Autocadd files not accepted shall be resubmitted. The Contractor agrees to compensate the Engineer for time and materials associated for the Electronic Media requested by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit all requests in writing to the Engineer for Electronic Media. Shop Drawings and Product Data Brochures: Submittals shall contain all necessary information for review, including additional information when requested. Product Data
16010 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Brochures shall contain only information relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. Unless all irrelevant information is deleted or unless relevant information is clearly marked, including accessories, ratings, appurtenances, and dimensions as required, submittals will be returned marked "Revise and Resubmit". Verify that the equipment will fit the available space. List on all submittals any deviations from equipment or materials specified. Where more than two reviews are required for a given submittal (i.e. two rejections), the submitting contractor will be invoiced for extra services at a rate of $150.00 per hour for the review of the third and subsequent submittals. Shop drawings will not be released by the Engineer until the invoice for extra services has been paid. Submittals for the Work shall include, but not be limited to: Cable, Wire, and Connectors: Refer to Section 16120. Electrical Raceways and Fittings: Refer to Section 16110. Electrical Boxes and Fittings: Refer to Section 16130. Panelboards and Enclosures: Refer to Section 16470. Electrical Gutters: Refer to Section 16115. Wiring Devices: Refer to Section 16140. Safety and Disconnect Switches: Refer to Section 1616440. Transformers: Refer to Section 16460. Fuses: Refer to Section 16475. Grounding System: Refer to Section 16450. Motor Starters: Refer to Section 16485. Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Control Wiring: diagrams for all miscellaneous electrical controls. Include control wiring
Microprocessor Based Instrumentation: Include control wiring diagrams for all microprocessor based instrumentation including switchgear, motor controllers, and generators. Include control wiring drawings and diagrams for all instrumentation connected to the PC provided by Division 15. Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts: Refer to Section 16510. Specialty Lighting Fixtures: Refer to Section 16510. Standby Emergency Generator Set: Refer to Section 16620. Lightning Protection System: Refer to Section 16670. Fire Alarm System: Refer to Section 16720. Coordination Drawings: As required above in this Section. Equipment Pads: Refer to Section 16190. Firestops: Include all firestop materials for the project, indicating intended use and
16010 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
UL fire rating where applicable. Certifications and Test Reports: Refer to individual Sections for testing requirements. Submit 7 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. Prior to conducting tests and certifications, submit proposed test procedures and recording forms for review by the Architect. Necessary test and certifications are described under the appropriate section of this Division 16 unless set forth hereinbelow. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: Wire and Cable Tests for Short Circuits and Insulation Resistance Values. Grounding System Tests. Ground Fault Protection System Test, including factory and field test results. Voltage and Current Values for Distribution and Equipment Feeders and Busducts. Transformer Insulation Resistance, Load, and Voltage Tests. Switchboard Insulation Resistance Test. Standby Power System Test. Busduct Insulation Resistance Test. Lightning Protection System Certification (Master Label C). All items listed in individual sections. Warranties (Guarantees): Submit 7 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices, and materials (Include 4 of these copies in the O&M manuals described below). Extended Warranty: When the manufacturer offers an extended warranty for an item or system, this warranty, and all benefits accruing thereunder, shall be transferred to, or written in the name of the Owner. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: Submit 4 copies, including wiring diagrams, maintenance and operating instructions, parts listings and copies of all other submittals required by this Division 16. Organize each O&M manual with Table of Contents, Index, and thumb-tab marked for each section of information. Bind in 2-inch, 3-ring binders, vinyl covered, with pockets to contain folded sheets. Properly label contents on spine and face of binder. Samples: Submit 2 samples, upon request, of electrical devices and materials for review by the Architect. Samples will be returned upon written request of the Contractor. Materials: Materials installed or work performed with materials that have not been reviewed and deemed acceptable by the Engineer shall be done at the risk of the Contractor and the cost of removal of such material or work which is judged unsatisfactory for any reason, shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Tools: Provide and deliver to the Owner's authorized representative any special tools
16010 - 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
required for maintenance of systems, equipment, and apparatus installed under this Division prior to requesting final acceptance of the installation. TEMPORARY FACILITIES: General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements on temporary facilities. ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS: General: Refer to Division 1 sections for general requirements on products, materials, equipment, and substitutions. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the electrical work, and with other work requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed electrical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work. Determine in advance of purchase that equipment and materials proposed for installation will fit into the confines indicated, leaving adequate clearance as required by applicable codes, and for adjustment, repair, or replacement. Substitutions: Refer to Division 1 for substitution requirements. Materials and products of manufacturers other than those listed in this Specification require submittal of a request for substitution prior to submittal of shop drawings and product data. SCOPE OF SPECIFICATIONS: These Specifications are issued in conjunction with the Drawings which indicate that general scope of the Project in terms of the architectural design concept, the dimensions of the building, the type of structural, mechanical, electrical, and utility systems, and outline notes of major architectural elements of construction. As "Scope" documents, the Drawings and Specifications do not necessarily indicate or describe all work required for the full performance and completion of the Work. Contracts may be let on the basis of such documents, only if approved by the Architect, with the understanding that the Contractor is to furnish all items required for proper completion of the Work without adjustment to Contract Price. It is intended that the Work be of sound and quality construction and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the inclusion of adequate amounts to cover installation of all items indicated, described, or reasonably implied. Decisions of the Architect as to the items of work reasonably included within the "scope" of these Specifications shall be final and binding on the Contractor. PARTS 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION: SPACE REQUIREMENTS: General: Determine in advance of purchase that the equipment and materials proposed for installation will fit into the confines indicated, leaving adequate clearances for adjustment, repair, or replacement. Clearance: Allow adequate space for clearance in accordance with the Code requirements, and the requirements of the local building inspection department. Responsibility: Since space requirements and equipment arrangement vary for each manufacturer, the responsibility for initial access and proper fit rests with the Contractor.
16010 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Review: Final arrangements of equipment to be installed shall be subject to the Architect's review. MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP: General: All materials and equipment shall be new and of best grade and quality, and standard products of reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials and equipment. Work shall be executed and all materials installed in accordance with Workmanship: the best practice of the trades in a thorough, substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen, presenting a neat appearance when completed. Workmanship on the project shall be in accordance with NECA Standard 1-2000. Manufacturer's Recommendations: With exceptions as specified and/or indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean, and condition manufactured articles, materials, and equipment per manufacturer's current printed recommendations. Keep copies of such printed recommendations at job site, and make them available as required. Include these printed recommendations in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals. EQUIPMENT SCHEDULED: General: The design is based on the equipment scheduled; therefore, equipment furnished by other manufacturers named in the Specifications shall require prior review and acceptance of the Engineer. (Refer to Substitutions paragraph above.) Materials and equipment shall be new and in good condition. The commercially standard items of equipment, and the specified names mentioned herein are intended to identify standards of quality and performance necessary for the proper functioning of the Work. Since manufacturing methods vary, reasonable minor variations are expected; however, performance and material requirements are the minimum standard selections other than those scheduled, the Contractor shall bear all costs for any modifications required by structural, architectural, mechanical, and/or other divisions of the work as a result of the requirements for any substituted equipment. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION: Refer to Section 16195. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: General: Ensure that all electrical equipment, devices, and materials arrive at the site in good condition, intact in factory package or crate. Any equipment found to be damaged shall be removed from the project site. Storage: Store all electrical equipment, devices, and materials in factory containers or package until ready for use. Storage facility shall be a clean, dry, indoor space which provides protection against weather. Avoid damage by condensation by providing temporary heating when required. Handling: Handle all electrical equipment, devices, and materials carefully to prevent breakage, denting, or scoring of the finish. Damaged materials shall be removed from the project site. CUTTING AND PATCHING: General: Place all equipment in sequences as required to avoid cutting new construction. If
16010 - 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
cutting and patching is required, comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as individually authorized by the Architect/Engineer, cutting-and-patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted. Approval: If holes or sleeves are not properly installed and cutting and patching becomes necessary, it shall be done at no additional expense to the Owner. Undertake no cutting or patching without first securing approval. All patching shall create a surface which is structurally and aesthetically equal to the surface surrounding the area patched. EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK: General: The work hereunder includes all excavating and backfilling that is necessary to install the electrical work. Coordinate the electrical work with other work in the same area, including excavating and backfilling, dewatering, flood protection provisions, other temporary facilities, other underground services (existing and new), landscape development, paving, and floor slabs on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavating and backfilling. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the applicable provisions of Division 2 for electrical work excavating and backfilling. All references to "pipe" in excavation and backfill paragraphs shall be considered as a reference to an electrical conduit. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before proceeding with the Work. Replacement of Other Work: Where it is necessary to remove and replace landscape work, pavement, flooring, and similar exposed finish work, engage the original Installer to install the replacement work. If the work existed prior to the work of this Contract, engage only experienced and expert firms and tradespersons to replace the work. NOISE AND VIBRATION: General: Warrant that the entire electrical system and its component items of equipment as installed shall operate without objectionable vibration or noise. Objectionable noise, vibration, or transmission thereof to the building shall be as determined by the Architect or Engineer and shall be corrected. ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT: General: Refer to Division 1 for general closeout requirements. Maintain a daily log of operational data on electrical equipment and systems through the closeout period; record hours of operation, assigned personnel, power consumption, and similar information; submit copy to Owner. Coordination with Mechanical Work: Coordinate closeout operations with closeout of mechanical systems, elevators, and other power-consuming equipment. Accurately record locations of primary (major) conduit which is underground or otherwise concealed. Support Services: Test run electrical equipment in coordination with test runs of mechanical systems. Clean and lubricate operational equipment. Instruct Owner's operating personnel thoroughly in the operation, sequencing, maintenance, and safety/emergency provisions of the electrical systems. Turn over the operations to Owners personnel at the time(s) of substantial completion. Until the time of final acceptance of the total Work of the Contract, respond promptly with consultation and services to assist Owner's personnel with operation of electrical system.
16010 - 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Thermographic Testing: Conduct a thermographic test using an infra-red temperature scanning unit. The test shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory (Shermco; BES, Inc.). Connections indicating higher temperature levels than are acceptable shall be tightened or corrected as required to eliminate the condition. Conduct test, using test reporting forms, between 6 and 8 months after beneficial occupancy, but in no case beyond the 1-year warranty period. Correct unacceptable conditions prior to end of the warranty period. FINAL REVIEW: General: Upon completion of the Work, perform acceptance testing as described in 16120, make all corrections required, and perform all retests before scheduling final review. Certificates, including certificates of occupancy from local authorities, and documents required herein, shall be completely in order and presented to the Engineer at least 1 week prior to the review. The final review is not intended to be a completion list for the contractor. The systems shall be complete and tested by the contractor and city prior to Engineers review. If the systems are not complete, and the contractor requires more than two reviews for a given system or area (i.e. two rejections), then the requesting contractor will be invoiced for extra services at a rate of $150.00 per hour and reimbursable expenses for the review of the third and subsequent field visits. Final review reports will not be released by the Engineer until the invoice for extra services has been paid. Qualified Person: Individuals knowledgeable of the systems and persons approved by the Engineer, shall be present at this final review to demonstrate the system and prove the performance of the equipment. END OF SECTION 16010
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
16110 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
SECTION 16110 - ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS: PART 1 - GENERAL: RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification sections, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide electrical raceway and fitting work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and specified. Types: The types of electrical raceway and fittings required for the project include the following: Rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit (IMC). PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Flexible metal conduit. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. Rigid non-metallic conduit. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of conduit and fittings to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Rigid Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. LTV Steel Corp. Wheatland Tube Co. Western Tube and Conduit Corp. PVC Coated Rigid Steel: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. OCAL LTV Steel Corp. EMT: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. LTV Steel Corp. Wheatland Tube Co. Western Tube and Conduit Corp.
16110 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Flexible Metal and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal: Alflex Corp. Anaconda Sealtite Electri-Flex Co. Rigid Non-metallic: Cantex, Inc. Carlon Certainteed Corp. Georgia Pipe JM Plastics Raceway Fittings: AFC Appleton Electric Co. Arlington Bridgeport Carlon Crouse Hinds Efcor Division Midwest Neer O.Z. Gedney Co. Raco, Inc. Steel City Thomas/Betts UL Label: All electrical raceways and fittings shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: METAL CONDUIT, TUBING, AND FITTINGS: General: Provide metal conduit, tubing, and fittings of the type, grade, size, and weight (wall thickness) as shown and required for each service. Where type and grade are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Section 16110 to fulfill the wiring requirements and complying with the NEC for the electrical raceways. Metal Conduit: Rigid Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: ANSI C80.1, hot-dip galvanized, UL Listed, NEC Articles 345 and 346. PVC Externally-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and NEMA Std. RN 1, hot-dip galvanized, UL Listed, NEC Article 346. Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit Fittings: ANSI C80.4, ANSI/NEMA FB 1, UL Listed, threaded type, material to match conduit.
16110 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
EMT: ANSI C80.3, galvanized, UL Listed, NEC Article 348. EMT Fittings: ANSI C80.4, ANSI/NEAM FB 1, galvanized, UL Listed. Set screw and compression type fittings shall be steel only (die-cast, zinc, or malleable iron shall not be acceptable). Set screw type fittings for conduit sizes 2 1/2 and larger shall be double set screw type. At the Contractor's option, EMT using "uni-couple" type connectors may be used in lieu of tubing and individual connectors. Flexible Metal Conduit: Type: Zinc-coated steel. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit comprised of single strip, continuous, flexible, interlocked, double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside; forming smooth internal wiring channel; with liquid-tight jacket of flexible PVC. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Liquid-tight, zinc-coated steel. Expansion Fittings: Galvanized, UL Listed, Allow for 4 of building expansion. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS: Rigid PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: NEMA Std. TC-2. PVC Conduit Fittings: NEMA Std. TC-3. Conduit Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit and tubing accessories including straps, hangers, and expansion joints as recommended by the conduit and tubing manufacturer and as specified in Section 16110. CONDUIT SUPPORTS: Refer to Section 16190. PART 3 - EXECUTION General: For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide a complete assembly of conduit, tubing, or duct with fittings, including, but not necessarily limited to, connectors, nipples, couplings, expansion fittings, bushings, locknuts, other components and accessories as needed to form a complete system of the type indicated. Rigid Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: Use rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit to run all electrical raceway systems where cast in concrete walls or floor slab which have waterproof membranes, and where cast in masonry walls. Use threaded type couplings and fittings. Split type couplings and fittings are not acceptable. Conduit smaller than 1/2-inch in diameter will not be permitted. Filed thread conduit shall have no less than five (5) full threads. EMT conduit may be used in lieu of rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit for feeder raceways, if the location is acceptable for use of EMT as described hereinbelow, and if a properly sized ground wire is included with the feeder conductors in the EMT raceways. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel: Use polyvinyl chloride (PVC) externally-coated rigid steel conduit and fittings for electrical raceway systems for branch circuits to cooling towers and
16110 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
other wet areas, where exposed outdoors, and elsewhere, as shown. Conduit smaller than 1/2-inch in diameter will not be permitted. Filed thread conduit shall have no less than five (5) full threads. EMT: Use EMT for branch circuit electrical raceway systems where concealed in furred ceilings or in walls, exposed interior locations where not exposed to physical damage, or where cast in concrete walls or floor slabs which do not have waterproof membranes. Use set screw or compression type couplings and fittings made-up tight for conduit sizes up to 2 inches in diameter and set screw type couplings and fittings made-up tight for conduit size 2 inches or greater. Use watertight couplings and fittings where required. Where cast in concrete and floor slabs, use concrete tight couplings and fittings and terminate conduit in a box cast in concrete, or with a rigid steel conduit turn-outs from concrete. Conduit smaller than 1/2-inch in diameter will not be permitted. Flexible Metal: Use flexible metal conduit and fittings for lighting fixture connections and for other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration. Use flexible metal conduit from outlet boxes to lighting fixtures in such lengths as required, 6 feet maximum. Conduit smaller than 1/2-inch in diameter will not be permitted except that 3/8-inch flexible metallic conduit may be used for lighting fixture "pigtails". Liquid-tight Flexible Metal: Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings for all motor connections and for other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration, and when subject to one or more of the following conditions: exterior location; moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate; corrosive atmosphere; subject to water spray; subject to dripping oil, grease, or water. Conduit smaller than 1/2-inch in diameter will not be permitted. Rigid Non-metallic: Use rigid PVC Schedule 40 conduit and solvent type fittings for electrical raceway systems where shown, with or without concrete encasement. Conduit shall be Type II designated for underground installation with or without concrete encasement. Conduit system shall be UL listed in accordance with Article 347 of the NEC. Conduit smaller than 1/2 inch in diameter will not be permitted. INSTALLATION: General: Install electrical raceways and fittings as shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of the NEC, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. Complete electrical raceway installation before starting the installation of cables. INTERIOR CONDUIT SYSTEM: General: Ground all metallic conduit in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of the NEC. Install all conduit as a complete system without conductors, continuous from outlet to outlet and from fitting to fitting. Make up threaded joints of conduit carefully in such a manner as to ensure a tight joint. Fasten the entire conduit system securely into position. A run of conduit between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting. Install approved expansion fittings in all conduit runs exceeding 150 feet or when crossing building expansion joints. Ream all ends of conduit properly to remove rough edges. Whenever a rigid steel or IMC conduit enters a switchboard, panelboard, enclosure, or J-box, it shall be securely fastened
16110 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
by the use of a locknut inside and outside and an approved insulating grounding bushing shall be installed. Whenever an EMT conduit enters a switchboard, panelboard, enclosure, or J-box, it shall be securely fastened by use of an insulated throat connector. Lay out and install all conduit systems as to avoid all other services or systems, the proximity of which may prove injurious to the conduit or the wires or conductors which the conduit confines. Conceal conduit systems in finished areas. Conduit may be exposed in mechanical rooms and where otherwise shown or indicated. On exposed systems, run the conduit parallel or perpendicular to the structural features of the building and rigidly support with malleable iron conduit clamps at intervals as required by NEC or on conduit racks, neatly racked and bent in a smooth radius at corners insofar as practicable. Conduit shall not be installed in a structural slab unless noted or indicated on the drawings. All conduit shall be run without traps. Where traps or dips are unavoidable, a junction or pull box shall be placed at each low point. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack of constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space and load capacity for 25% additional conduit. Support exposed raceway on galvanized channel using compatible galvanized fittings (bolts, beam clamps, and similar items) and galvanized threaded rod pendants to secure raceway to channel and channel to structure. Support single conduit runs using a properly sized galvanized conduit hanger with galvanized closure bolt/nut and threaded rod. All raceway support system materials shall be galvanized and manufactured by Kindorf, Unistrut, Superstrut, Caddy, or Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. Provide chrome or nickel-plated escutcheon plates on all conduit passing through walls and ceilings in finished areas. Metallic conduit sizes 2 inches and larger shall be supported at spacings not exceeding 10' and conduit sizes 1-1/2" and smaller shall be supported at spacings not exceeding 7'. Rigid metal conduits and intermediate metallic tubing shall be attached to supports at the required spacing by Unistrut pipe clamps (or approved equal). Perforated strap hangers are not permitted. Approved, manufactured one-hole straps or U-bolts may be used where desirable. Clamp-backs shall be used when strapping conduit to walls, column faces, or other such surfaces. PVC conduit sizes 1/2"-1" shall be supported at spacings not exceeding 3'; sizes 1-1/4"-2" shall be supported at spacings not exceeding 5'; and conduits larger than 2" shall be supported at spacings not exceeding 6'. Ceiling support cables shall not be used for the support of any conduit. Support all flexible conduits with Greenfield clips in accordance with the NEC, Article 350. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support prior to installation of wiring. Make all joints and connections to ensure mechanical strength and electrical continuity. PVC conduit shall be joined, or have fittings attached, by using a fusing (solvent) compound recommended by, and applied as instructed by, the conduit manufacturer. Run conduit to avoid proximity to heat producing equipment, piping, and flues, keeping a minimum of 8 inches clear. Whenever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water piping. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit horizontally in concrete slabs without
16110 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
written approval. All roof penetrations shall be made in adequate time to allow the Roofing installer to make proper flashings. Carefully review architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical Drawings and place boxes and conduit to avoid conflicts with structural members or other general construction. Provide a j-box at all transitions from EMT or RGS conduit to flexible conduit. Furnish sleeves for timely placing in construction for all conduit passing through concrete walls, partitions, beams, floors, and roofs while same are under construction. A conduit sleeve shall be one size larger than the size of conduit which it serves except where larger sizes are required for manufactured water, fire, or smoke stop fittings. Seal opening around sleeve and conduit in accordance with firestopping specified in Div. 7. Sleeves set in concrete floor construction shall be minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. Sleeves shall extend 3 inches above the finished floor. All conduit passing through concrete or masonry walls shall have Schedule 40 galvanized steel sleeves. Sleeves shall be set flush with finished wall. If holes and sleeves are not properly installed and cutting and patching becomes necessary, it shall be done by approved parties at no expense to the Owner. Undertake no cutting or patching without first securing approval. Install manufactured UL listed water, fire, and smoke stop fittings, or caulk around conduit or cables in sleeves with sufficient UL listed fire safing insulation or foam to maintain wall or floor slab fire ratings. Where penetrations must be water-proofed, install manufactured water stop fittings, or properly caulk with oakum and run full of asphalt mastic. Sleeves penetrating walls below grade shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with 1/4-inch thick steel plate secured to the pipe with continuous fillet weld. The plate shall be located in the middle of the wall and shall be 2-inches wider all around than the sleeve which it encircles. The entire assembly shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. All conduit passing through the housing on connected equipment, shall pass through a cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet. Metallic conduit installed below grade shall be PVC Coated as specified above. The entire length of metallic conduit, including fittings, shall be protected to a point 6 inches above finished grade (or concrete slab). Coordinate locations of raceways in fire rated partitions so as not to affect the fire rating of the partition. Notify the Architect in writing where additional construction is required to maintain the partition fire rating. Conduit utilized for 120 volt branch circuits, other than lighting, controls, and signal circuits, shall not be smaller than 3/4". Conduit fill for conductors shall be based on NEC with a 100% load factor. TELECOM/DATA, SECURITY, AND SIGNAL SYSTEM RACEWAYS: General: Conduit shall be installed in accordance with the previous specified requirements for conduit and tubing and with the additional requirements that no length of run shall exceed 50 feet for 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch trade sizes, and 100 feet for 1-inch or larger trade sizes, and shall not contain more than two 90-degree bends or the equivalent thereof. Pull or junction boxes shall be installed to comply with these requirements. Empty telephone and signal system raceways shall include a pull wire or cord, as described in Empty Conduit Raceway System hereinbelow.
16110 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EMPTY CONDUIT RACEWAY SYSTEM: General: Empty conduit in which wire is to be installed by others shall have pull wires installed. The pull wire shall be No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel, or plastic having not less than 200-pound tensile strength. Not less than 12 inches of slack shall be left at each end of the pull wire. END OF SECTION 16110
ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
16115 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
SECTION 16115 - ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide electrical gutter work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified. Application: The types of electrical gutters required for the project include the following: Electrical wiring gutters. Electrical metering gutters. Telephone distribution wireway. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit Catalogue cut sheets indicating the types of wiring gutters and wireways to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: General Electric Square D UL Label: All gutters and wireways shall be UL Labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS: General: Provide hinged galvanized steel electrical gutters and wireways in the types and sizes indicated, minimum 16 gage thickness, with rounded edges and smooth surfaces; constructed in compliance with applicable standards; and with additional features as indicated or required. Size: Provide size as indicated where size is not indicated, construct in accordance with the NEC and other applicable standards. Accessories: Provide gutter and wireway accessories where indicated, constructed of same metal and finish as gutters or wireways. Supports: Provide gutter and wireway supports where indicated, conforming to the NEC, as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION
ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
16115 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
General: Install gutters and wireways where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", and with recognized industry practices to ensure that the gutters and wireways comply with the specified requirements and serve the intended purposes. Comply with requirements of NEMA and the NEC pertaining to installation of electrical gutters. Finishing: Remove burrs and sharp edges of gutters and wireways wherever these could possibly be injurious to wiring insulation or jacket. Grounding: Electrically ground gutters and wireways to ensure continuous electrical conductivity. Cables: Complete gutter and wireway installation before starting the installation of cables. Provide sufficient space to permit access for installing, splicing, and maintaining the cables. END OF SECTION 16115
CABLE, WIRE, AND CONNECTIONS
16120 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
SECTION 16120 - CABLE, WIRE, AND CONNECTORS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide electrical cable, wire, and connector work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified. Types: The types of cable, wire, and connectors required for the project include the following: 600 volt building wire and cable. 600 volt building wire and cable connectors. Application: The applications for cable, wire, and connectors required on the project are as follows: Power distribution circuitry. Lighting branch circuitry. Appliance, receptacle, and equipment branch circuitry. Motor branch circuitry. Control wiring. Fire alarm wiring. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of wire and cable to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Cable and Wire: Cerro Wire and Cable Co. Essex International, Inc. General Cable Corp. Okonite Co. Phelps Dodge Corp. Senator Company Southwire Company Connectors: AMP, Inc.
16120 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Burndy Corp. General Electric Co. Ideal Industries, Inc. Mac Products, Inc. Minnesota Mining and Mfg. Co. O.Z. Gedney Co. Thomas Betts Co. UL Labels: All cable, wire, and connectors shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 600 VOLT BUILDING CABLE, WIRE, AND CONNECTORS: General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide cable, wire, and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by his published product information, designed and constructed as instructed by the manufacturer, and as required for the installation. Wire and Cable: Provide factory-fabricated wire and cable of the size, rating, material, and type as indicated for each use. Conductors Copper: Provide soft or annealed copper wires meeting, before standing, the requirements of ASTM B-3, "Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes", latest edition. Conductors for power wiring sized No. 14 AWG through No. 10 AWG may be solid or stranded. Conductors for control wiring sized No. 18 AWG through No. 10 AWG shall be stranded. Conductors sized No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Stranding shall be Class B meeting the requirements of ASTM B-8, "Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, or Soft". Insulation: THHN/THWN. "MC" Cable: At the Contractor's option, and subject to the approval of the local electrical inspection department, armor-clad "MC" flexible cable in accordance with NEC Article 330 may be used for receptacle circuits, switch legs, and lighting fixture connections. Where MC cable is used, a j-box for the circuit homerun shall be provided within 10 horizontally of the first device in the circuit. EMT conduit shall be used for the circuit homerun. Armor-clad "MC" cable shall consist of two, three, or four No. 12 AWG copper THHN insulated phase conductors, and one No. 12 AWG bare copper ground conductor enclosed in a flexible metal armor. "MC" cable terminations shall be made using approved fittings. Connectors for Building Wire and Cable: Provide factory-fabricated, metal connectors of the size, rating, material, type, and class required for each use. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install electrical cable, wire, and connectors as shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC, the NECA's
16120 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
"Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions. Coordination: Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface. Identification: Refer to Section 16195. 600 Volt Building Wire and Cable: Pull all conductors together when more than one is being installed in a raceway. Whenever possible, pull all conductors into their respective conduits by hand. Use pulling compound or lubricant when necessary; compound shall not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Before any wire or cable is pulled into any conduit thoroughly swab the conduit to remove all foreign material and to permit the wire to be pulled into a clean, dry conduit. Run all feeders their entire length in continuous section without joints or splices. Conductor fill in conduit shall comply with NEC. No wire smaller than No. 12 AWG will be permitted for any lighting circuit except that No. 14 AWG Type THHN wire may be used for lighting fixture "pig-tails". No wire smaller than No. 10 AWG shall be utilized for any power circuit or for any lighting circuit homerun. No wire smaller than No. 18 AWG shall be utilized for any control circuit, unless shown otherwise. Where separate homeruns are indicated on the plans, do not utilize the neutral conductor for any other circuits. Terminate only at devices and panelboard as indicated. No tap or splice shall be made in any conductor except in outlet boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, splice boxes, or other accessible locations. Make all taps and splices by the use of an approved type compression connector. Insulate all taps and splices equal to that of the adjoining wire. Make splices or taps only on such conductors as are a component part of a single circuit, properly protected by approved methods. Support all conductors in vertical raceways, as specified in Section 300-19 of the NEC. Do not permit conductors entering or leaving a junction or pull box to deflect so as to cause pressure on the conductor insulation. Make joints in branch circuits only where such circuits divide. These shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced that branch from the circuit. Make connections in conductors up to a maximum of one No. 6 AWG wire with two No. 8 AWG wires using twist-on pressure connectors of required size. Make connections in conductors or combinations of conductors larger than described hereinabove using cable fittings of the type and size required for the specific duty. After a splice is securely "made-up", insulate entire assembly with UL-approved insulating tape to a value equivalent to the adjacent insulation. Make all splices and connections in control circuit conductors using UL-approved solderless crimp connectors.
16120 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Make all grounding connections using ground clamps, connectors, or exothermic welds of a type suitable and UL-approved for duty involved. TESTING: Pre-Energization Check: Prior to energization, check cable and wire for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits. Correct malfunction when detected. Feeder Insulation Resistance Test: Each main 600 volt feeder conductor shall have its insulation resistance test after the installation is complete except for connections at its source and point of termination. Test shall be made using a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a voltage of not less than 1000 VDC. Resistance shall be measured from conductor to conductor and from conductor to ground. Insulation resistance shall not be less than the following: Wire Size Insulation Resistance (Ohms) (AWG) No. 12 1,000 K No. 10 through No. 8 250 K No 6 through No. 2 100 K No. 1 through No. 4/0 50 K Larger than No. 4/0 25 K Conductors which do not meet or exceed the insulation resistance values listed above shall be removed, replaced, and retested. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 4 copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall include conductor tested, date and time of test, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. END OF SECTION 16120
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
16125 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
SECTION 16125 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: The extent of electrical connections for equipment is as shown and scheduled, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. Types: The types of electrical connections specified in this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following connections: Motors Resistance heaters Motor starters Light fixtures Converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, and rheostats Master units of communication, signal, alarm, clock, public address, sound, and video systems Line voltage temperature control equipment Elevators and escalators Work of Other Sections: Refer to Sections 16910 and 16920 for miscellaneous electrical controls, control wiring, and HVAC control system wiring. Refer to other Divisions of these Specifications for specific individual equipment electrical requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: AMP, Inc. Burndy Corp. Cadweld General Electric Corp.
16125 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
Ideal Industries, Inc. Minnesota Mining and Mfg. Co. O.Z. Gedney Co. Thomas Betts Co. UL Label: All products shall be UL labeled to the maximum extent possible. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly of materials, including, but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations. Raceways and boxes: Refer to Section 16110 and 16130. Cable, Wire, and Connectors: Refer to Section 16120. Terminals: Provide electrical terminals as instructed by the terminal manufacturer for the intended application. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: General: Install electrical connections as shown, in accordance with applicable portions of the NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions. Conductors: Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, match conductors of the electrical connection for proper inter-face between the electrical supply and the installed equipment. Splice Insulation: Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of a higher rating than, insulation on the conductor being spliced. Appearance: Prepare cables and wires by properly cutting and stripping covering, jacket, and insulation to ensure a uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Routing: Trim cables and wires to be as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing, and maintenance. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Conduit: Provide PVC-coated rigid steel conduit and fittings where required for highly-corrosive atmospheres. Flexible Conduit: Provide flexible conduit, minimum 18 inches for connection of lighting fixtures and other electrical equipment connections, where subject to movement and
16125 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
vibration. Liquid-tight Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit, minimum 18 inches for connection of all motors, and for other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration, and also where subjected to one or more of the following conditions: Exterior location Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate Corrosive atmosphere Subjected to water spray Subjected to dripping oil, grease, or water. Conduit Location: All horizontal runs of conduit (not strapped to walls) shall be above 8 feet high, with a vertical drop to equipment. Conduit blocking walk and service space will not be acceptable and will require relocation. Conduit on and adjacent to equipment shall be located to allow free access to all removable panels for equipment service. Motor Connections: Where possible, terminate conduit in conduit boxes at motors. Where motors are not provided with conduit boxes, terminate the conduit in a suitable condulet, and make motor connections. All conduit passing through the housing on connected equipment shall pass through a cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet. Coordination: Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation work. Identification: Refer to Section 16010 for identification of electrical power supply conductor terminations with markers approved as to type, color, letter, and marker size by the Architect. Affix markers at each point of termination, as close as possible to each point of connection. Elevators: Coordinate power and control provisions shown for elevators with the provisions required for the elevators as furnished. Where the power and control requirements are less than or equal to those shown, then modifications to power and control provisions shown shall be made at no cost as a matter of job coordination. Where power and control requirements are in excess of those shown, notify the Architect in writing of the requirements. END OF SECTION 16125
ELECTRICALBOXES AND FITTINGS
16130 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide electrical box and fitting work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified. Types: The types of electrical boxes and fittings required for the project include the following: Outlet boxes. Junction boxes. Pull boxes. Floor boxes. Fire rated poke-thru boxes. Conduit bodies. Bushings. Locknuts. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of electrical boxes and fittings to be used. Include dimensioned drawings of special electrical boxes showing the accurately scaled boxes, their layout, and relation to associated equipment. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Interior Outlet Boxes: Appleton Hubbell / Raco Division Thomas & Betts / Steel City Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Appleton Electric Co. Cooper / Crouse-Hinds Division Hubbell / Bell Division Thomas & Betts / Steel City Division Junction and Pull Boxes:
16130 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Appleton Electric Co. Hoffman Engineering Co. O.Z. Gedney Co. Square D Co. Thomas & Betts / Kindorf Division Floor Boxes: Hubbell, Inc. Thomas & Betts / Steel City Division Wiremold / Walker Division Fire Rated Poke-Thru Boxes: Hubbell, Inc. Wiremold / Walker Division Conduit Bodies: Appleton Electric Co. Crouse-Hinds Co. Hubbell / Killark Division Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Appleton Electric Co. Hubbell / Raco Division Thomas & Betts / Steel City Division UL Label: All electrical boxes and fittings shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FABRICATED MATERIALS: Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape, and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. Provide "Gang" boxes where devices are shown to be grouped. Types for Various Locations: Ceilings: minimum 4 inches square, 2-1/8 inches deep. Plaster Walls: minimum 4 inches square, 2-1/8 inches deep, with raised plaster cover; set with face approximately 1/8 inches from finished surface. Furnish shallow boxes where necessary. Dry-wall Construction Walls: minimum 4 inches square, 2-1/8 inches deep, with raised plaster cover; set with face approximately 1/8 inches from finished surface. Furnish shallow boxes where necessary. Utilize multi-gang junction boxes with multi-gang plaster covers at all locations where
16130 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
three or more grouped wiring devices are shown. Gangable switch boxes are not acceptable. Masonry Walls: Galvanized switch boxes made especially for masonry installations; depth of boxes must be properly coordinated for each specific installation. Surface: Cast metal Type FS or FD box with surface cover. Special: Where above types are not suitable, furnish boxes to suit the use taking into account space available, appearance, and Code requirements. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including proper covers or wall device plates, mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, plaster rings for all boxes in plaster construction, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide hot dipped galvanized cast-iron weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape, and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit hubs. Refer to Section 16140 for description of coverplate. Floor Boxes: Provide fully adjustable floor boxes for installation in concrete floors as indicated. Boxes shall be adjustable both before and after the concrete pour. Waterproof Membrane Floors - Flush Boxes: Concrete-tight cast iron floor box with brass trim to suit device shown and floor finish. Non-Waterproof Membrane Floors (above grade)-Flush Boxes: Concrete-tight steel floor box with brass trim to suit device shown and floor finish. Fire Rated Poke-Thru Boxes: Fire rated, UL listed poke-thru boxes for installation through concrete slabs. Boxes shall be suitable for the slab thickness of the building and shall have UL listed abandon plates for use where boxes are removed. Provide poke-thru boxes to suit device(s) shown. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized sheet steel; junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers, of the type, shape, and size, to suit each respective location and installation. Types for Various Locations: 100 Cubic Inches in Volume or Smaller: Standard outlet boxes with stamped knockouts. 150 Cubic Inches in Volume or Larger: Code gage steel with sides formed and welded, screw covers unless shown to have hinged doors. Hinged doors with locking device same as furnished on panelboards. Knockouts factory stamped or formed in field with a cutting tool to provide a clean symmetrically-cut hole. Exterior or Wet Areas: Weatherproof galvanized steel construction with proper gaskets and corrosion-resistant fasteners.
16130 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies, of the type, shape, and size, to suit each respective location and installation, constructed with threaded conduit ends, removable cover, and corrosion-resistant screws. Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts, and insulated conduit bushings of the type and size to suit each respective use and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS: Install electrical boxes and fittings as shown, in compliance with NEC requirements, or in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that the boxes and fittings serve the intended purposes. Use outlet and switch boxes for junctions on concealed conduit systems except in utility areas where exposed junction or pull boxes may be located. Determine from the Drawings and by actual determination on the site, the exact location of each outlet. The outlet locations shall be modified from those shown to accommodate changes in door swings or to clear other interferences that may arise from job construction details, as well as modification to center them within room spaces. These modifications shall be made with no changes in contract price and shall be a matter of job coordination. Check these conditions throughout the entire job and notify the Architect of discrepancies, as they may occur, to verify the modifications, if any, before proceeding with the installation of the work. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction, blocked in place and secured. Set all wall boxes flush with the finish and install extension rings as required to extend boxes to the finished surfaces of special furring or wall finishes. Unless otherwise noted on Architectural or Electrical drawings or directed to the contrary at the time of installation, outlet boxes shall be placed at the following heights (center of box to finished floor level) and shall comply with ADA: Wall switches, wall telephone outlets 48 AFF to centerline of box. Thermostats - 48 AFF to centerline of box. Receptacles and telephone outlets - 18 AFF to centerline of box mounted with long axis vertical. On exposed conduit systems provide pull boxes, junction boxes, wiring troughs, and cabinets wherever necessary for proper installation of various electrical systems. Provide weatherproof boxes for exterior locations and interior locations exposed to weather or moisture. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring. Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry. Boxes for any conduit system shall be independently supported from the structure and shall
16130 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
not be secured to the ceiling system, HVAC ductwork, or mechanical piping. Provide junction and pull boxes for feeders and branch circuits where shown and where required by the NEC, regardless of whether boxes are shown or not. Coordinate locations of boxes in fire rated partitions and slabs so as to not affect the fire rating of the partition or slab. Notify the Architect in writing where modifications or additional construction are required to maintain the partition or slab fire rating. END OF SECTION 16130
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide wiring device work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified. Types: The types of electrical wiring devices required for the project include the following: Receptacles Switches Wall plates/cover plates SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of wiring devices to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Cooper Industries Hubbell, Inc. Leviton Mfg. Co, Inc. Lutron, Inc. Pass & Seymour/Legrand, Inc. UL Label: All wiring devices shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FABRICATED DEVICES: General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices in type, color, and electrical ratings for the service indicated. All colors shall be verified with Architect during submittal review. Other manufacturers standard colors shall be provided as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Receptacles: Comply with NEMA Standard WDI and as follows:
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
General-Duty: Provide simplex or duplex specifications grade type receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, with metal mounting straps, side wired with screw type terminals, high impact thermoplastic body and face, NEMA configuration as indicated. Colors for special receptacles shall be as specified. 20 amp, 125 volt grounded duplex NEMA #5-20R: Hubbell #HBL5362W equivalent by manufacturers listed above. 20 amp, 125 volt ground fault duplex NEMA #5-20R: Hubbell #GF5352W equivalent by manufacturers listed above. 20 amp, 125 volt isolated ground duplex NEMA #5-20R: Hubbell #IG5362 equivalent by manufacturers listed above. 20 amp, 125 volt isolated ground simplex NEMA #5-20R: Hubbell #IG5461 equivalent by manufacturers listed above. or or or or
Heavy-Duty Simplex: Provide single heavy-duty type receptacles, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, with metal mounting straps, back wiring, black or brown reinforced thermoplastic body, NEMA configuration as indicated. 30 amp, 125 volt grounded, 3-wire, 2-pole NEMA #5-30R: Hubbell #HBL9308 or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. 15 amp, 250 volt, grounded, 3-wire, 2-pole NEMA #6-15R: Hubbell #HBL5661 or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. 20 amp, 250 volt grounded, 3-wire, 2-pole NEMA #6-20R: Hubbell #HBL5461 or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. 30 amp, 250 volt, grounded, 3-wire, 2-pole NEMA #6-30R: Hubbell #HBL9330 or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. 20 amp, 125/250 volt, grounded, 4-wire, 3-pole NEMA #14-20R: Hubbell #HBL8410 or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. Switches: Comply with NEMA Standard WD1 and as follows: Rocker: Provide specification grade flush rocker switches, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with plaster ears, white switch rocker, and side-wired screw terminals. V Single-pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch: Hubbell #HBL2121WA or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. Three-way, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch: Hubbell #HBL2123WA or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. Four-way, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch: Hubbell #HBL2124WA or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. Single-pole, 120 volt, 20 amp switch, red pilot light: Leviton #5628-2W or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. Single-pole, 277 volt, 20 amp switch, red pilot light: Leviton #5629-2W or equivalent by manufacturers listed above.
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Single-pole, double-throw, center off, 120/277 volt, 15 amp momentary contact switch: Leviton #5657-2W or equivalent by manufacturers listed above. Toggle: Provide specification grade flush toggle switches, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with plastic ears, white switch handle, side-wired terminals, horsepower rated. Single-pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch: Hubbell #HBL1221W. Single-pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch, key operated: Hubbell #HBL1221L. Single-pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch, red pilot light: Hubbell #HBL1221PL. Wall Box Dimmers: Provide self-contained, wall box mounted, linear slide square law dimmers with a positive OFF position at the end of travel. Dimmers shall operate continuously at rated load in an ambient temperature up to 40 degree C and with an input of 100 to 130 volts. Single-pole, 120 volt, 1000 watt: Lutron #N-1000. Single-pole, 120 volt, 1500 watt: Lutron #N-1500. Single-pole, 120 volt, 2000 watt: Lutron #N-2000. WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES Wall Plates: Provide switch, duplex outlet, and telephone wall plates, with single or multi-gang cutouts as indicated or required, complete with metal screws for securing plates to devices. Screw heads shall be colored to match finish of plate. Wall plates and wiring devices shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Wall plates shall possess the following additional construction features: Material and Finish: Specification grade, smooth, white nylon for general duty receptacles and switches. Specification grade, Type 302/304, satin-finished stainless steel, 0.030-inch thick for heavy duty receptacles. Specification grade, weatherproof, cover plate, Lexan fiberglass-reinforced, with gasket, for interior wet area receptacles and weather-resistant, NEMA 3R while-in-use, hinged polycarbonate with gasketing for exterior receptacles.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES: General: Install wiring devices where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. Delay installation of devices until wall construction and wiring is complete.
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Box Condition: Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, debris, and similar matter. Alignment: Install all wiring devices plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall, floor, or ceiling in which they are installed. Switches: Install rocker switches on the strike side of doors as hung and in a uniform position so that the same direction will open and close the circuit throughout the project. Where more than one switch is installed in the same location, install switches in a multi-gang box with a single cover plate. Locate edge of switch box approximately 3 from edge of door trim where possible. Use toggle switches for motor switches only. Receptacles: Install receptacles vertically except over countertops. Mount horizontally at 6 inches to receptacle centerline above counter tops unless indicated otherwise. Where splash-backs occur above counters, mount devices horizontally at 4 inches to receptacle centerline above top of splash-back. All devices shall be installed complete with cover plates. Cover plates: Install stainless steel cover plates on all wiring devices in elevator lobbies, entrance lobbies, restrooms, and public areas and on all heavy-duty receptacles. Install weatherproof cover plates on all exterior and wet area receptacles. Install nylon cover plates on all other general duty wiring devices. PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES: General: Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, take precautions to protect these items from damage. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs. TESTING: General: Prior to energization, check for continuity of circuits, for short circuits, and check grounding connections. After energization, check wiring devices to demonstrate proper operation and check receptacles for correct polarization. END OF SECTION 16140
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification sections, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Conduit and equipment supports. Fastening hardware. Floor mounted equipment pads. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of supporting devices to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Steel Channel and Fittings: B-Line Kindorff Unistrut Ratings: Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. UL Label: All electrical support materials shall be UL labeled where labeling is available.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIAL Support Channel: Galvanized steel.

SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Hardware: Corrosion resistant. Concrete: Refer to Division 3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using precast insert system, preset inserts, or beam clamps. Spring steel clips and clamps may be used only for runs consisting of a single conduit. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; selfdrilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, conduit, or suspended ceilings. Use powder-actuated anchors only for lighting fixture safety slack wires. Do not drill structural steel members without prior approval of the Architect. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. Install all floor mounted electrical equipment on 4" concrete pads except where mounted on raised floor systems. Provide 2" border on exposed sides and 4" border on exposed fronts and backs. Provide 45 degree chamfered edge. Mount floor mounted equipment on raised floors directly on raised floor. Provide any additional supports or bracing as recommended by raised floor manufacturer. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification sections, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Nameplates. Wire and cable markers. Conduit color coding. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of electrical identification devices to be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on a black or red background. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
16195 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. Secure nameplates to wiring device wall plates using double sided foam tape. Mark panel and circuit numbers on all junction box covers and back side of all wiring device plates legibly with permanent ink felt tip marker. Clean and degrease surface and paint as required before marking. WIRING DEVICE WALLPLATES: Labels shall be placed on all receptacle and light switch wallplates. The labels shall identify the panel and circuit supplying each device and junction box. Labels shall be self adhesive, polyester film or vinyl with 1/4 minimum black lettering. CORD CAPS: Provide label or mark with permanent marker the NEMA configuration on the end of the cord cap so that the configuration can be determined when the device is plugged in. UNDERGROUND CABLE IDENTIFICATION: Bury a continuous, preprinted, bright-colored plastic ribbon cable marker with each underground cable (or group of cables), regardless of whether conductors are in conduit or direct buried. Locate each directly over cables, 6 inches to 8 inches below finished grade. CABLE/CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION: Coordinate a uniform and consistent scheme of color identification throughout the building system. Identification shall be by the permanent color of the selected covering. On large conductors, secure identification by means of painted color banding of plastic tape. Color scheme shall be as follows unless other colors are required by local codes: 120/208 Volt 277/480 Volt Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral Ground Red Black Blue White Green Brown Yellow Purple Natural Gray Green
1 Phase, 120 Volt, Process control wiring: Phase Red Neutral White Ground Green Wire identification numbers shall be placed on each end of the conductor involved by using sleeve type, heat shrinkable markers. Wire markers shall be T&B Shrink-Kon Type HVM. The markers shall be installed so as to be readable form left to right or top
16195 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
to bottom. Wire numbers as shown on the electrical cable schedules shall be machine printed. IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT: All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Care shall be taken not to obliterate this nameplate in any way. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. Separately enclosed and 3 Pole Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, Disconnect Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch - Identify circuit and load served, including location. White letters on black background for 208/120V normal power; Black letters on white background for 480/277V normal power; White letters on a red background for 208/120V generator supported emergency power; Red letters on a white background for 480/277V generator supported emergency power. Panelboards and Switchboards: 1/4 inch - Identify equipment designation; 1/8" Identify voltage rating and source. White letters on black background for 208/120V normal power; Black letters on white background for 480/277V normal power; White letters on a red background for 208/120V generator supported emergency power; Red letters on a white background for 480/277V generator supported emergency power. Transformers: 1/4 inch - identify equipment designation; 1/8" - identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load. White letters on black background for normal power; White letters on a red background for generator supported emergency power. Cardholders and directory cards shall be furnished for circuit identification in panelboards. Cardholder shall be located on inside of panel door and shall be in a metal frame with clear plastic front. Circuit lists shall be typewritten. Circuit descriptions shall include locations and name of each item of equipment served. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of electrical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre-printed or hand printed. Tags shall convey the message example: "DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BURNER IS OPERATING". Prohibited Markings: Markings which are intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from which the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation within the public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices which bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters' Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement.
16195 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
JUNCTION BOX COLOR CODING SCHEDULE Paint junction boxes in accordance with local code required color coding system. If there is no local code requirement for j-box color coding, paint j-box cover and body as follows: 480 Volt, Single & Three Phase System: Yellow. Emergency Power, 480 V. and 208 V.: Red. Paint j-boxes prior to marking circuit number on j-box cover as required above. All circuits within a junction box shall be identified by panel identification and circuit number including neutral identification. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design.
END OF SECTION
SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16440 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16440 - SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide safety and disconnect switch work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified. Types: The types of safety and disconnect switches required for the project include the following: Electrical Service disconnects. Equipment disconnects. Motor-circuit disconnects. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of safety and disconnect switches to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: General Electric Co. Square D Co. NEMA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) Std. KS1. UL Approved: Safety and disconnect switches must have UL approval and bear the UL label.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIAL: SIDE HANDLE SWITCHES:

16440 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
General: Provide heavy-duty type, dead-front, sheet steel-enclosed, surface-mounted safety switches of the type and size indicated. Safety switches shall be rated for the voltage of the circuit in which they are installed. Safety switches used as motor disconnects shall be horsepower rated for the motor served. Disconnect switches utilized for service entrance shall be rated as such and shall have ground fault protection where shown or as required by code. Switch Mechanism: Safety switches shall be quick-make, quick-break type with permanently attached arc suppressors and constructed such that switch blades are visible in the OFF position with the door open. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not of the cover. Switch shall have provision to padlock in the OFF position. Safety switches shall have a cover inter-lock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the switch mechanism is in the ON position, or closing of the switch mechanism when the switch door is open. Cover interlock shall have an override mechanism to permit switch inspection by authorized personnel. All current-carrying parts shall be constructed of high-conductivity copper with silver-plated switch contacts. Lugs shall be suitable for copper cable and front removable. Fusing: Provide fusible safety switches where indicated. Fuse clips shall be positive pressure rejection-type fuse clips suitable for use with UL Class R fuses. Neutral: Provide safety switches with number of switched poles as indicated. Where a neutral is present in the circuit, provide a solid neutral with the safety switch. Enclosures: All safety switches installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless otherwise shown. Safety switches installed in exterior locations shall be NEMA 3R (water-resistant) unless otherwise shown. Safety switches installed at cooling towers, and in other wet areas, shall be NEMA 4 (stainless steel), unless otherwise shown. TOGGLE TYPE SWITCHES: General: Provide toggle disconnect switches for small appliances and fractional HP motors. Refer to Section 16140. Provide motor HP rated switch as applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
16440 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
INSTALLATION OF SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES: General: Install safety and disconnect switches where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of the NEC, the NECA'S "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. Location: Provide safety switches where shown and at each motor which is out of sight of, or greater than 50 feet from, the switch or panel from which the motor circuit is fed. Supports: Provide all safety and disconnect switches with galvanized angle or other suitable supports where mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical. Switches shall not be supported by conduit alone. Where safety and disconnect switches are mounted on equipment served, the switch shall not inhibit removal of any service panels or interfere with any required access areas. Disconnect Switches: Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, motors, and controllers within sight of the controller position unless otherwise indicated. Coordination: Coordinate safety and disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work as necessary for proper interface. TESTING: General: Prior to energization, check for continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
16450 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 16450 - ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide electrical service and equipment grounding as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified. Types: The types of electrical service and equipment grounding specified in this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, grounding all equipment and devices shown, and as required by the National Electrical Code (NEC), the local electrical inspection department, and The Power Company. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of grounding devices and materials to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: NEC Compliance: Comply with Article 250 of the NEC (NFPA 70) for grounding. Approval: All grounding shall be in accordance with the requirements of, and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect and the local electrical inspection department. UL Label: All grounding products shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCT MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS: General: For each electrical grounding connection, provide a complete assembly of materials to construct a completely grounded electrical system. Ground Rods: Ground rods shall be 3/4-inch diameter and a minimum of 10-feet long, copperclad type with cold drawn steel core and min. 0.010 thick copper jacket. UL Listed. Ground Rod Backfill: Ground enhancement material to lower resistivity to ground in poor soil conditions. Eritech GEM.
16450 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Raceways: Raceways for grounding conductors shall be as specified in Sections 16110 and 16130. Cable, Wire, and Connectors: Grounding cable, wire, and connectors shall be as specified in Section 16120.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING: General: Install grounding connections as shown and specified, in accordance with applicable portions of the NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions. Grounding Electrode System: The main switchboard neutral and ground bus shall be connected to the incoming cold water piping system to the building and the building structural and reinforcing steel as required by the NEC and the City of Austin Electric Code Amendments. The main grounding conductor shall be sized as shown, and shall be run in conduit. The cold water pipe ground shall be supplemented as required by NEC, Article 250 H, and as required by the local inspection department. In addition, the lightning protection system ground rods specified in Section 16670 shall be interconnected with a bonding loop below the basement slab. This loop shall be bonded to the electric service ground, and to the Power Company transformer ground rods. The bare copper grounding conductor shall be directly buried in earth at a depth of not less than 30" and shall be laid slack in ditching and to form a continuous loop following the perimeter of the building at a distance of at least 5' outside the building footing or at least 8' outside the building perimeter, whichever is greater. Where shown on drawings, install ground enhancing backfill material at the ground rods indicated in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Building Equipment Grounding System: The building equipment grounding system shall consist of the ground wire, and electrically continuous metallic conduit system as shown. Every item of equipment served by the electrical system shall be bonded to the building equipment ground. Portions of metallic piping and duct systems which are electrically isolated shall be bonded to the equipment grounding system with a flexible bonding jumper. System Neutral: The system neutral shall be grounded to the grounding electrode system at the service entrance only, and shall be kept isolated from the building grounding system throughout the building. The neutral of separately derived systems shall be grounded at one point as specified hereinbelow. Miscellaneous: Provide bonding and grounding wires run in conduit and sized per the NEC in accordance with the local electrical inspection department and the NEC. Metallic piping and duct systems which enter the building shall be grounded at the point of entry to
16450 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
the building, in accordance with the NEC. Continuity: Continuity of the building equipment grounding system shall be maintained throughout the project. Grounding jumpers shall be installed across conduit expansion fittings, all liquid-tight flexible metal and flexible metal conduit, light fixture pigtails in excess of 6 feet, and all other non-electrically continuous raceway fittings. Main Conductors: All main grounding conductors shall be stranded copper conductors, sized as shown, and run in a suitable raceway. All main grounding conductors shall be continuous without joints or splices over their entire length. Special Grounding: Provide special grounding systems where shown. Separately Derived System Grounding: Bond the case and neutral of each transformer directly to the nearest available effectively-grounded structural metal member of the structure, the nearest available effectively-grounded metal water pipe, or in accordance with the local electrical inspection department. Flexible conduit shall not be used as a ground path to a transformer. Provide ground conductors from low voltage panelboards with isolated ground bus, do not use conduit system as a ground. Telecom/Data Equipment Grounding: Provide a ground conductor from the telecom/data service equipment to the building grounding system as required by the I.T. Consultant. Fluorescent Fixtures: Carefully and securely ground all fluorescent fixture bodies to the conduit grounding system. Flexible conduit longer than 6 feet shall not be considered a ground path. Receptacles: Ground all grounding-type receptacles with a separate ground wire where shown on Drawings. Receptacles with ground straps shall not require ground wire unless otherwise shown. Motor Frames: Ground the frame of each motor with a properly sized separate ground wire around the liquid-tight flexible conduit. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit Systems: Install a continuous grounding conductor in accordance with NEC. COORDINATION: General: Coordinate installation of grounding connections for equipment with equipment installation work. TESTING: Ground Resistance Test: Perform a ground resistance test for comparison to future inspection and testing data by the Owner. Overall system resistance shall not exceed 1 ohm. Test shall be performed using a Biddle Megger Earth Tester or equivalent test instrument. The test shall not be performed immediately following wet weather conditions.
16450 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Submittals: Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 2 copies of certified test results for Owner's record and submit 5 copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall include date and time of tests, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions.
TRANSFORMERS
16460 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 16460 - TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: specified. Provide transformer work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as
Types: The types of transformers required for the project include dry-type general purpose transformers. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the transformers to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: General Electric Square D Powersmiths Transformers shall be built in an ISO 9001:2000 certified facility. Standards: Transformers shall be designed and tested in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI standards including, but not limited to the following: ANSI/IEEE C57.110-1998 IEEE Recommended Practice for establishing transformer capability when feeding non-sinusoidal load currents 1100 IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment 519-1992 IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems
TRANSFORMERS
16460 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
C57.12.91-1995 IEEE Standard Test Code for Dry-type Distribution and Power Transformers ANSI/NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. TP-1 Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers FEDERAL REGISTER US Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy. 10 CFR Part 430, July 29, 2004. Energy Conservation Program for Commercial and Industrial Equipment: Energy Conservation Standards for Distribution Transformers; Proposed Rule International Standards Organization (ISO) ISO 9001:2000 Quality Management System Underwriters Laboratory (UL) UL 1561 Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers
UL Label: All transformers shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide transformer manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by his published product information, designed and constructed as and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for a complete installation. DRY-TYPE GENERAL-PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS: General: Indoor transformers shall be dry-type, two-winding transformers, rated as shown, and shall have manufacturer's standard impedance. Construction: Transformer core shall be constructed of cold-rolled, oriented, high permeability silicon steel, either formed as a coil or laminated. Windings shall be copper or electrical grade aluminum individual windings terminated with tin-plated or silver-plated copper bars, or wire electrically welded to the ends of the windings. Foil windings shall not be acceptable. Neutrals: Transformers shall have the neutral lugs sized to accommodate the neutral conductors as indicated.
TRANSFORMERS
16460 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Taps: Transformers 0.25 to 0.75 KVA shall have no taps. Transformers 1 to 3 KVA shall have two 5 percent taps below normal. Transformers 5 to 25 KVA shall have four 2-1/2 percent taps, two above and two below normal. Transformers larger than 25 KVA shall have six 2-1/2 percent taps, two above and four below normal. Temperature Rating: Transformers shall utilize an insulation system which has been properly temperature classified and approved by UL. Transformers smaller than 2 KVA shall have a maximum winding temperature rise of 80 degree C with an insulation system temperature classification of 155 degree C. Transformers 2 KVA through 25 KVA shall have a maximum winding temperature rise of 115 degree C with an insulation system temperature classification of 185 degree C. Transformers 25 KVA and above shall have a maximum winding temperature rise of 150 degree C with an insulation system temperature classification of 220 degree C. Load Rating: Transformers shall be capable of operating at 100 percent of nameplate rating continuously while in an ambient temperature not exceeding 40 degree C. Transformers 5 KVA and larger shall be capable of meeting the daily overload requirements of ANSI Standard C57.12. Vibration Isolation: Each transformer core and coil shall be mounted in the transformer enclosure on rubber vibration isolators. If vibration isolators limit the transmission of sound from the 120 Hertz harmonic to 10 percent of its unisolated level, and are certified as such on the shop drawings, the vibration isolators under Part 3 may be omitted. Sound Rating: The transformer shall have sound levels equal to or lower than those ratings established in the latest revision of NEMA ST-20 and as shown in the following table. Sound ratings shall be measured per ANSI C89.9l. Transformer Rating KVA (600 Volt Class) 0-9 l0-50 51-150 151-300 30l-500 Testing: The manufacturer shall have thoroughly tested each transformer for proper operation before shipment. The manufacturer shall have performed the following additional tests on units identical to the design type being supplied. Furnish proof of performance of these tests in the form of
Maximum Sound Level Decibels Per NEMA St-20 40 45 50 55 60
TRANSFORMERS
16460 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
test data sheets upon request: Sound levels Temperature rise tests Full-load core and winding losses Percent regulation with 80 and 100 percent power factor load Percent impedance Exciting current Insulation resistance No load losses Efficiency at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load per NEMA TP-2. HARMONICS MITIGATING DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS General: Equal to General Purpose transformers except with K13 rating, electrostatic shield between windings, double size neutral lugs. Square D NLP series or equivalent by listed acceptable manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS: General: Install transformers where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that the transformers comply with the requirements and serve the intended purpose. Comply with the requirements of NEMA and NEC standards, and applicable positions of NECA's "Standard of Installation", for installation of transformers. Dry-Type Transformer Mounting: Floor mount transformers on properly sized Amber/Booth Type RYD rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. At the Contractor's option and where shown, transformers shall be trapeze mounted using properly sized Amber/Booth Type BRD rubber-in-shear hangers. Transformer enclosures shall make no contact with wall surfaces. Refer to Section 16190. Conduit: All conduit directly connected to transformer enclosures shall be flexible steel conduit extending for a minimum of 1 foot from transformer enclosure as measured along the conduit centerline. Include a ground wire, size per the NEC, in each length of flexible conduit. TESTING: Insulation Tests: Prior to energization, check transformer windings for continuity. Test the insulation resistance from primary winding to secondary winding and from each winding to ground. Tests shall be made with a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a voltage of not less than 1000 VDC.
TRANSFORMERS
16460 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Winding Current: During initial no-load energization, check current in each primary winding. Tap Settings: Measure and record load current and voltage of transformers while loaded to verify proper transformer tap settings. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 7 copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Reports shall include transformer tested, date and time of tests, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. Notification: Notify Architect in writings of any deviation from manufacturer's pre-shipment test data.
PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
16470 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide products produced by one of the following: General Electric Co. Square D Co. UL Standards: Panelboards and enclosures shall conform to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL labeled. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the panelboards and enclosures to be used. Include layout drawings and listings of all accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCT MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS: General: Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be dead-front safety-type equipped with molded case circuit breakers as shown and scheduled. Power distribution panelboards shall be dead-front type equipped with fusible switches or circuit breakers as shown and scheduled. Power distribution panelboards utilized for service entrance shall be rated for service entrance. Distribution panelboard devices shall have ground fault protection where shown or as required by code. Busing Assembly: Panelboard and power distribution panel board busing shall be silver-plated copper. Bus structure and mains shall have ratings as shown and scheduled. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50 degree C rise above 40 degree C ambient. Heat rise test shall be conducted in accordance with UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. All bolted joint connections shall have a least two bolts per joint per phase. Half lapped bus joint construction will not be acceptable. Furnish a bare, uninsulated ground bus inside each panelboard enclosure. All 120/208 volt panelboards shall have an insulated 100% rated ground bus for isolated ground
16470 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
connections. All panelboards shall have the terminal capacity to terminate neutral and ground conductors for each pole of the panel to the associated bus structures. All two-section panelboards shall be connected with copper cable, with an ampacity meeting or exceeding the main bus ampacity. All panelboards served by Harmonics Mitigating Transformers shall have a 200% rated neutral bus. Feed-through Lugs: Provide feed-through lugs on all panelboard busses. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be of the molded case, thermal magnetic type equipped with individually insulated, braced, and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall have bolt-in breakers. All 2- and 3-pole breakers shall have common trips. Provide panelboard circuit breakers with conventional interrupting capacity unless otherwise shown, but in no case less than the following symmetrical amperes RMS: Voltage (volts) Interrupting Capacity 120/208 277/480 10,000 AIC 22,000 AIC
Ground fault interrupter (GFI) circuit breakers, where shown, shall be a 5ma ground fault trip and shall include a TEST button. Integrated Equipment Rating: Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short-circuit rating equal to the interrupting rating of the weakest overcurrent device installed in the panelboard. Such ratings shall have been established by tests on similar panelboards with the circuit breakers or fusible switches installed. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide sheet steel enclosures, NEMA Type 1, minimum 16-gage thickness, with multiple knockouts, unless shown otherwise. Provide doors with concealed hinges, spring-loaded door pulls, and flush lock and key, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, equipped with interior circuit directory frame, card, and clear plastic covering for all panelboards. Provide painted grey enamel finish over a rust inhibitor. Enclosure shall be for recessed or surface mounting as shown. Enclosures shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer as panelboards to be enclosed. Multi-section panelboards shall have common cover and trim.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES: General: Install panelboards and enclosures, as shown, including electrical connections, in
16470 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. Coordination: Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceways installation work. Anchoring: Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secured. Refer to Section 16190. Directory Card: Type the enclosure's circuit directory card upon completion of work. Circuit Arrangement: Branch circuit connections to 3-phase lighting and appliance panelboards shall be arranged such that when two or three circuits are run with a common neutral, each circuit shall be connected to a different phase unless otherwise shown. Branch circuits shall be connected to the circuit breakers in the lighting and appliance panelboard to provide the best possible phase balance, unless otherwise shown. TESTING: General: Prior to energization, check for continuity of circuits and for short circuits. Thermographic Testing: Refer to Section 16010 for thermographic testing.
FUSES
16475 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16475 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: The extent of fuse work is as shown and scheduled, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. Types: The types of fuses required for the project include the following: 600-volt current-limiting fuses. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the fuses to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Bussmann Mfg. Chase Shawmut Co. Economy Fuse Coordination: All fuses shall, to the maximum extent possible, be from the same manufacturer to facilitate positive selective coordination of protective devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS CURRENT LIMITING FUSES - 600 VOLTS AND LESS: General: Provide 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity (AIC) current-limiting fuses of the current ratings shown and with a voltage rating equal to or greater than the voltage at the point of application. Types:
FUSES
16475 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Fuses in circuits supplying individual motors, groups of motors, or loads including motors, 600 amperes or less, shall be UL Class RKl dual-element, time-delay fuses, unless otherwise shown. Fuses in circuits supplying individual motors, groups of motors, or loads including motors, 601 to 4000 amperes, shall be UL Class L time delay fuses, unless otherwise shown. Fuses in circuits supplying other than motor loads, 600 amperes or less, shall be UL Class RK1 dual-element, time-delay fuses, unless otherwise shown. SPARE FUSES: General: Provide spare fuses in the amount of 10 percent of each type and size installed, but not less than three spares of a specific size and type. Deliver these spares to the Owner at the time of acceptance of the project. Fuses shall be neatly encased in a properly labeled steel enclosure with padlock provision, to be wall mounted as directed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install fuses in fuse holders immediately prior to energization of the circuit in which the fuses are installed. Fuses shall not be installed and shipped with equipment. Labels: Place fuse identification labels, showing fuse size and type installed, inside the cover of each switch.
16485 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16485 - MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: The extent of motor starter work is as shown and scheduled, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. Types: The types of motor starters required for the project include the following: Individual motor starters Combination motor starters Manual motor starters SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the motor starters to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: General Electric Co. Square D Co.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS INDIVIDUAL MOTOR STARTERS: General: Individual motor starters shall consist of an integrally mounted, magnetic, full-voltage non-reversing (FVNR), or reduced-voltage, non-reversing (RVNR) or two-speed, two-winding (2S-2W) starter in a heavy duty type, dead front, sheet steel enclosure, and surface mounted. Size and number of poles shall be as shown and required by equipment served. All starters shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Contacts: Magnetic starter contacts shall be solid silver cadmium oxide alloy, and shall not
16485 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
require any filing, dressing, or cleaning throughout the life of the starter. Operating Coils: Operating coils shall be 120 volts, and shall be pressure molded and designed so that accidental exposure to excessive voltage up to 480 volts will not damage the coil. The starter design shall also be such that when a coil fails due to an over-voltage condition, the starter shall definitely open, and shall not freeze in the closed position. Overload Relays: All starters shall have manual-reset, trip-free overload relays in each phase conductor. Three-phase FVNR starters shall have three overload relays. Single-phase FVNR starters shall have an overload relay in each ungrounded conductor. Two-speed, full-voltage magnetic starters shall not be field-convertible from manual to automatic reset. Pilot Lights: Provide RUNNING pilot lights for all motor starters. Furnish additional pilot lights for motor starters as shown. Provide FAST and SLOW pilot lights for all two-speed starters. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor starter, and shall not be wired across the operating coil. Controls: Provide starters with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches, or START-STOP pushbuttons as shown or required. Provide for FAST-SLOW speed selection from HVAC control system for all two-speed starters. All two-speed starters shall have deceleration relays between fast and slow speeds. Coordinate motor starter controls with the requirements of Division 15. Motor starter controls shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. Control Power: A single phase control power transformer shall be included integrally with each starter for 120 volt control power. The primary shall be connected to the line side of the motor starter; the secondary shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals will not be located above the transformer. Auxiliary Contacts: Each starter shall have one normally open and one normally closed convertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the "holding interlock" and control wiring. In addition, it shall be possible to field-install one or more additional auxiliary contacts without removing existing wiring, or removing the starter from its enclosure. Power Monitors: Provide a 3-phase power monitor for each motor starter serving a motor of 25 HP or greater. Monitor relay shall drop out upon loss of any phase, undervoltage on any or all phases, or phase reversal from A-B-C sequence. Relay shall be adjustable for trip range and shall automatically reset upon correction of trouble. Unit Wiring: Unit shall be completely pre-wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for: connection of power supply conductors to switch line side terminals; motor leads to the starter load side terminals; and control conductors to holding coil terminals.
16485 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Enclosures: All motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures, unless shown otherwise. COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS: General: Combination motor starters shall consist of an integrally mounted magnetic starter and a fusible disconnect switch in a heavy-duty type, dead-front, sheet steel NEMA 1 enclosure, surface mounted. Combination motor starters installed at cooling towers, and in other wet areas, shall be NEMA 4 (stainless steel), unless otherwise shown. Size and number of poles shall be as shown and required by equipment served. Combination motor starters shall be as specified for individual motor starters in Individual Motor Starters, except as modified herein. Disconnect Switch: Disconnect switch shall be as specified in Section 16440. Unit Wiring: Unit shall be completely pre-wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for: connection of power supply conductors to switch line side terminals, motor leads to the starter load side terminals, and control conductors to holding coil terminals. Enclosures: All combination motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures, unless shown or specified otherwise. MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS: General: Manual motor starters shall consist of an integral starter and overload protection in a common enclosure, surface mounted. Size and number of poles shall be as shown and required by equipment served. Furnish pilot light as indicated. Manual Motor Starter: Manual motor starter with overload protection, 1 HP maximum, 115 or 230 volts; General Electric Model No. CK101Y1-(1) Pole, CR101H1-(2) Pole; General Electric Model No. CR101Y11-(1) Pole, with a pilot light, CR101H11-(2) Pole; with pilot light. Enclosures: All manual motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures, unless shown otherwise. Switch: For self-protected motors where one pole toggle motor control switch is allowed, the switch shall be as specified for toggle switches in Section 16140.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS: General: Install motor starters where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of the NEC and the NECA's "Standard of
16485 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. Overloads: Install overload heaters in each motor starter that is not microprocessor controlled. Heater ratings shall be based on actual motor nameplate full load amps. Supports: Provide all individual and combination motor starters with galvanized angle or other suitable supports where mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical. Starters shall not be supported by conduit alone. Where motor starters are mounted on equipment served, the switch shall not inhibit removal of any service panels or interfere with any required access areas. Manual motor starters shall be installed plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall in which they are installed. Coordination: General: Motor starters shall be provided to properly coordinate with motors as furnished by Division 15. Motor starter controls shall be provided to properly coordinate with controls specified in Division 15. TESTING: Pre-Energization Check: Check motor starter for continuity of circuits and for short circuits. Post Hook-up Test: Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups energize motor starter and demonstrate satisfactory functioning.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
16510 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16510 - LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: The extent of lighting fixture work is as shown and scheduled, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. Types: The types of lighting fixtures required for the project include the following: Fluorescent type fixtures. High-intensity-discharge (HID) type fixtures Incandescent type fixtures. Applications: The applications of lighting fixtures required for the project include the following: General lighting Emergency lighting Outdoor area lighting SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the lighting fixtures and lamps to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by manufacturers as shown or scheduled (or equal to), for each type of lighting fixture. Provide products produced by one of the following for ballasts and lamps: Ballast Manufacturers: Advance (Div. of Phillips Electronics North America Corp.) General Electric Co. Osram Sylvania Inc. Universal Lighting Technologies
16510 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Lamps: General Electric Co. Osram Sylvania Inc. Phillips Lighting Company CBM Label: Provide fluorescent ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers' Association (CBM) standard and carry the CBM mark on the label. UL Standards: Lighting fixtures shall conform to all applicable UL standards, and shall be UL labeled. WARRANTY Straight Tube Fluorescent Lamps and ballasts: Provide 36 month lamp warranty and 60 month ballast warranty. Refer to Division 1 for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: General: Provide lighting fixtures, of the size, type, and rating indicated, complete with, but not necessarily limited to, lamps, lampholders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, and wiring. Provide earthquake clips where required for incandescent and fluorescent fixtures and provisions for separate supports for HID fixtures. Two year ballast warranty service program is required for all ballasts. LIGHTING FIXTURES: Fluorescent Fixtures: Provide fluorescent fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule on drawings. Fluorescent fixture lenses, where required, shall be extruded virgin acrylic, prismatic type, nominal 0.125-inch thick. Fluorescent fixtures in continuous rows shall be supplied with all fixture couplings, chase nipples, and other accessories recommended by the manufacturer for continuous row installation. HID Fixtures: Provide HID fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts. Provide a shield below the lamp to prevent glass, if a lamp breaks, from falling to the floor. Protect HID lighting fixtures on the line side of the ballast with fuse and holder. Holder shall be mounted in a protected location convenient for changing fuses, or be an in-line water proof holder. Size and type of fuse shall be a recommended by ballast manufacturer.
16510 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Incandescent Fixtures: Provide incandescent fixtures complete with extended life lamps. Provide recessed incandescent fixtures with trim rings compatible with the ceiling material where fixture is to be installed. Low voltage fixtures shall be supplied with transformers. Exit Signs: The exit lighting fixtures shall meet the requirements of Federal, State, and Local codes. BALLASTS: Straight Tube Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Electronic type, programmed rapid start; 0.71 Ballast Factor; Series type circuit; Less than 40 KHz lamp frequency; Less than 1.6 Lamp CCF; Less than 10% THD; Greater than 98% Power Factor; UL Listed, Class P, Type 1 Outdoor; CBM certified; FCC 47CFR Part 18 Non-Consumer Class A Sound Rating; Voltage as required by circuiting on drawings. Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: UL Listed; CBM certified; High power factor; Internal thermal protection; or electronic type similar to those specified for straight tube lamps; Voltage as required by circuiting on drawings. Fluorescent Lamp Dimming Ballasts: Electronic type, Programmed start; UL Listed; CBM certified; Dimming range of 100% to 5% relative light output for T8 and CFL lamps and 100% to 1% relative light output for T5/HO lamps; Ignite lamps at any output setting without first going to another output setting; Less than 10% THD; High Power factor; Crest factor of less than 1.7; Class A sound rating; Comply with FCC Class A requirements for electronic devices; Voltage as required by circuiting on drawings. Advance Mark 10 or equivalent by listed acceptable manufacturers. HID Ballasts: Provide high power factor, constant wattage, auto-transformer ballasts with a -20 degree F temperature rating. Use ballasts for lamps up to 250 watts with a "B" sound rating. Use ballasts for lamps 400 watts and larger with a "C" sound rating. Voltage: Ballasts for use on 120 volt systems shall be suitable and guaranteed for a voltage range of 112 volts to 127 volts. Ballasts for use on 277 volt systems shall be suitable and guaranteed for a voltage range of 255 volts to 290 volts. Ballasts for use on 480 volt systems shall be suitable and guaranteed for a voltage range of 450 volts to 500 volts. LAMPS: General: Provide lamps of the wattage, type, color, and reflector lamps with type of beams indicated, as shown, and scheduled. Provide extended service incandescent lamps that are inside frosted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
16510 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
INSTALLATION: General: Install lighting fixtures of the types indicated, where shown, and at the indicated heights in accordance with the fixture manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that the fixtures comply with the requirements and serve the intended purposes. Fixtures shall exactly fit the type of ceiling system scheduled for the space. Where a fixture type designation may have been omitted from the plans, contact the Architect/Engineers in writing prior to the bid opening to determine which fixture type is intended at the location in question. No allowance will be made for failure to comply with this requirement. Furnish and install lighting fixtures complete with lamps for every lighting outlet shown on the accompanying drawings. Furnish all lighting fixtures complete with mounting accessories to suit the specific service indicated. Coordinate with Architectural drawings and specifications. Provide fixtures shown in the schedule to be recessed complete with any accessories required to fit the fixture to the specific ceiling construction. Install recessed fixtures to permit removal from below. Provide fluorescent fixtures shown to be mounted in continuous rows with all fixture couplings, chase nipples, and/or accessories recommended by the manufacturer for continuous row installation. Connect "Lay-in" fluorescent fixtures to be mounted in suspended acoustical ceilings to Jboxes attached to the building structure with a minimum of 10' of 1/2" flexible metal conduit plus enough slack to relocate fixture to adjacent ceiling tiles. Furnish fixtures in suspended ceilings with safety clips attached to the ceiling grid support "T's" and provide "slack" safety wires at opposite corners connecting each lay-in fixture to the structure above. Fasten fixtures securely to the indicated structural support members of the building. Provide separate supports for all recessed ceiling-mounted HID lighting fixtures. Check to ensure that solid pendant fixtures are plumb. Standards: Comply with NEMA standards, applicable requirements of the NEC pertaining to installation of interior lighting fixtures, and with applicable portions of the NECA's "Standard of Installation". TESTING: General: Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of lighting fixtures and controls. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate proper operation; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and
16510 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
processed with retesting. Lamps: Install all new incandescent lamps just prior to final inspection. Fluorescent and mercury vapor lamps may be utilized in the final finishing of the building. Replace gaseous discharge lamps that are defective, show discolorations, or have exceeded more than 1/3 of their rated life, as per construction inspector's records, with new lamps for final inspection. Pre-Inspection Tasks: Immediately before final inspection, thoroughly clean all fixtures inside and out, including plastics and glassware, adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surfaces, replace broken or damaged parts, and lamp and test all fixtures for electrical and mechanical operation. Any fixtures, or parts of fixtures, which have begun to show signs of rust or corrosion at the time of completion of the job, shall be removed, and replaced with properly protected metal parts.
STANDBY GENERATOR SETS
16620 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16620 - STANDBY GENERATOR SETS
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide standby engine-driven generator set work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified. Type: The type of standby engine-driven generator set required for the project is a diesel engine-driven generator set. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Engine-Driven Generator Sets: Caterpillar Co. Onan Corp. NEC and NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the NEC (NFPA 70 latest edition) including, but not limited to, emergency and standby power generator systems, and with NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems and NFPA 37 - "Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines". SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the generator sets to be used. Include detailed installation drawings and all documentation required for submission to hazardous material regulation authorities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS PACKAGED ENGINE-GENERATOR SETS: General: Provide diesel engine-driven generator set, complete with safety devices, main output breaker, vibration isolators, skid mounted fuel tank, weather-resistant housing, and exhaust silencer. Installation shall be complete with all necessary fuel connections, radiator
16620 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
cooling, and engine exhaust. System shall be UL 2200 Listed. Unit shall be capable of continuous standby service of ratings as indicated on the drawings. Engine: Engine shall be an 8, 12, or 16 cylinder, 2 or 4 cycle, turbocharged or normally aspirated full diesel engine, water-cooled with mounted water pump. Following items shall be included: Intake and exhaust valves shall be heat-resisting alloy steel, free rotating. Exhaust valve seat inserts shall be replaceable. Belt-driven engine alternator; 24-volt DC, with transistorized voltage regulator. Hydraulic or electric speed-sensing governor capable of isochronous frequency regulation from no load to full rated load. Speed droop shall be externally adjustable from isochronous to 5 percent. 24-volt battery starting with lead-acid batteries with dual rate battery charger, battery rack, and battery charger disconnect relay. Air cleaner, fuel and lube oil filters shall have replaceable elements. Forced feed gear design lube oil pump; full pressure lubrication to all bearings; dual, full flow oil filters; oil level indicator; low oil pressure shutdown; lube oil cooler. Muffler, critical silencing type, with wall thimble, flex connection (18-inch minimum), and condensation trap. All accessories required for diesel fuel operation, including but not limited to: fuel filter, fuel pressure gage, engine fuel transfer pump, generator skid-mounted fuel oil tank and with fuel level gage, low fuel level switch, rupture tank fuel basin alarm, and water jacket heaters. Refer to Fuel paragraph below. All accessories required for unit-mounted radiator-type cooling, including but not limited to: skid-mounted closed-circuit radiator with cooling water connections to engine, self-sealing engine-driven water pump, belt-driven pusher fan, thermostatic temperature control, high coolant temperature shutdown, and corrosion-resistant coolant filter. Engine-driven pusher type cooling fan shall be sized to maintain safe operation at 120 degree F maximum ambient temperature. Air flow restriction from the radiator shall not exceed 0.5 inches of H2O. Engine Characteristics: The brake horsepower of the engine with all attached accessories shall not be less than that which is required to provide the full load rating of the generator, including a 10 percent reserve factor and, including the following constraints: Ambient conditions of 50 feet altitude, and an ambient temperature of 10 degree F to 120 degree F.
16620 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
The BMEP of the turbocharged engine producing rated generator capacity shall not exceed 275 psi for 4-cycle engines, and 150 psi for 2-cycle engines. The RPM of the engine shall not exceed 1800 RPM, and the engine piston speed shall not exceed 2,000 feet per minute. Engine Instrument Panel and Accessories: Engine instrument panel shall contain oil pressure gage, coolant temperature gage, battery charge rate ammeter, rupture tank fuel basin alarm, and following items: High engine temperature, low oil pressure, and overspeed shutdown with signal light and alarm contacts. Operation selector switch (RUN-STOP-AUTO) shall allow manual starting of plant without assuming load. Solid-state cranking cycle device preset at 30 second cranking cycle and 10 second rest cycle followed by a 30 second cranking cycle. If engine fails to start on second try, an overcranking alarm shall sound and cranking cycle shall stop. Two sets of auxiliary contacts shall close when engine starts; one set shall energize outside air damper motor operator and one set is spare. Engine starting batteries shall be 24 volt lead-acid type and have adequate capacity for cranking engine at firing speed for 6 periods of 30 seconds each, with 10 second rest periods between. BECC Remote Annunciator: A remote annunciator shall be located in the Building Engineers office and shall have the following control and alarm functions: Visible and audible alarm with silence switch for generating power, fail to start (overcrank), low lube oil pressure, high water temperature, low water jacket temperature, engine overspeed, low battery voltage, high battery voltage, low fuel oil level, rupture tank fuel basin alarm, and generator control switch in auto mode, and automatic transfer switch position. Visible indicators shall be provided to indicate the position (normal or emergency) of each transfer switch. Selector switches shall be provided for generator operation (ON-OFF-AUTO) and for each transfer switch (NORMAL-AUTO-EMERGENCY). Generator: Generator shall be 4-pole, revolving field type, brushless, rotating rectifier exciter, temperature-compensated solid state voltage regulator, open dripproof, single bearing, permanently aligned generator connected to engine with flexible disc coupling, including the following:
16620 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Generator minimum rating as indicated on drawings. NEMA Class F insulation as defined by NEMA MG1.65. Temperature rise at rated load within NEMA MG1-22.40 definition. Double-sealed ball bearings, lubricated for life. Direct-drive centrifugal blower cooling. Main output breaker shall be of the same manufacture as specified in Section 16425. Space heaters shall be provided to prevent condensation in generator. Generator Instrument Panel: Generator instrument panel shall be shock-mounted to generator set and shall include: Manual reset generator circuit breaker Voltage adjustment rheostat Frequency meter AC voltmeter with PHASE SELECTOR/OFF switch Running time meter AC ammeter with PHASE SELECTOR/OFF switch 3 phase kilowatt meter Engine-Generator Set Performance: Frequency regulation: Isochronous from no load to full rated load. Voltage regulation: +2 percent no load to rated load; rheostat for +5 percent voltage adjustment. Instantaneous voltage dip shall be less than 12 percent of rated voltage when full, 3 phase load and rated power factor is applied to the generator. Recovery to stable operation shall occur within 5 seconds. Stable or steady state operation is defined as operation with terminal voltage remaining constant with +1 percent of rated voltage. Temperature rise shall be within NEMA MG1-22.40 definition. Largest motor to be started is a Fire Pump (refer to Mechanical drawings for HP rating) with a wye-delta starting system. Fuel System: Provide a mechanical fuel pump capable of providing adequate fuel to the injection system for any operating condition.
16620 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Provide a self-priming fuel injection system. Provide a double walled fuel tank, capacity as indicated on drawings, with leak detection and monitoring system in base of generator set. Fuel tank system shall be UL 142 Listed. Provide all auxiliary accessories and wiring required for proper operation and maintenance as recommended by manufacturer including equipment and wiring for remote annunciation of alarms at facilities engineering office. Provide all components and certification as required by Austin Fire Department and the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. Enclosure and Mounting: Mount the complete engine generator and auxiliaries on a heavy structural steel I beam with mounting brackets for securing to a concrete pad. Completely factory assemble the unit so that only external field connections are required. Provide weather resistant, vandal resistant, and rodent resistant housing. Seal doors against sound travel and weather and provide with padlock. The ventilation air shall be drawn from louvers in the sides or rear of the enclosure across the generator and through the radiator then exhausted through the front. The complete enclosure and mountings are to be in accordance with OSHA standards and are to be classified for all weather conditions. All side panels shall be removable. Enclosure shall provide spill containment for all generator fluids including fuel. Enclosure shall be UL 2200 Listed. Manual Stop Station: Provide a break-glass type Manual Stop Switch with red, mushroom type push-button behind locking glass door to shut down generator set. Locate as indicated on plans. Low Voltage Wiring: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120, except that conductors shall consist of a twisted pair cable whenever possible and shall be plenum rated, stranded, and No. 20 AWG or larger as required by instrument supplier. The instruments in each switchboard shall be linked over a single data line. Raceways: Raceways for low voltage wiring shall be as specified in Sections 16110 and 16130.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS: General: Install standby engine-driven generator sets where shown, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices, to ensure that the sets comply with the specified requirements and serve the intended purposes. Standards: Comply with NEMA standards, requirements of the NEC, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to installation of standby engine-driven generator sets and accessories.
16620 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Vibration Mounts: Install units on properly sized spring-type vibration mounts and ribbed Neoprene vibration isolators; comply with manufacturer's indicated installation method if any. Concrete Pad: Install generator set on a 6-inch reinforced concrete pad. The generator pad shall extend 6-inches beyond the generator set base, unless shown otherwise. Furnish the exact position of any block outs, mounting bolts, and the dimensions and location of the generator pad in a timely manner so as to prevent delay of the concrete work. GROUNDING: General: Install the generator as a non-separately derived system. Do not ground the generator neutral to the generator frame. Ground the generator frame through the feeder conduit system. Low Voltage Control Wiring: Low voltage control wiring for the power monitoring which is in vertical risers or exposed in mechanical spaces, shall be installed in a suitable raceway. Low voltage control wiring which is concealed inside walls or ceiling spaces, shall be routed without a raceway. Where low voltage cable is routed through metal stud top plates, or other areas which could injure the cable, provide a suitable grommet. CONTROLS: General: Provide generator start-up control wiring from each automatic transfer switches to the standby generator set. Transfer switches shall transfer to emergency power within the time frame as allotted by NFPA for all lighting circuits. COORDINATION: Control Wiring: Coordinate control wiring connections and provisions with Division 14 for elevators. This coordination shall be the responsibility of this Division. TESTING: General: Upon completion of installation of engine-driven generator set and after building circuitry has been energized with normal power source, test emergency power system to demonstrate standby capability and compliance with specified requirements, including automatic start-up, controls and full load acceptance. Tests shall include full load acceptance testing with a full load rated load bank. Full load test period shall be a minimum of 4 hours continuous trouble-free operation. Tests shall include operation of standby power system with voltage check while the system is loaded to ensure proper operation of the emergency generator, transfer switches, and other system components. Operation of the system shall simulate standby power conditions, that is, loss of main electrical power to the building. Test period for operation of the system shall be trouble-free operation with at least four automatic transfer switch operations (each switch) within the period of operation.
16620 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Notice of testing shall be provided 2 weeks in advance to Engineer and Commissioning Agent so that generator test can be witnessed by same. Testing shall not take place without the Engineer and Commissioning Agent being present. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 4 copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall include date and time of test, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
16625 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16625 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Provide automatic transfer switch work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified. Type: The type of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) shall be inherent double throw transfer switch mechanism with microprocessor controlled operation. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Automatic Transfer Switches: Automatic Switch Co. Russelectric, Inc. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the automatic transfer switches to be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS General: Provide automatic transfer switches with number of poles, voltage, and full load current rating as shown. Transfer switches shall be UL listed per applicable UL standards as a recognized component for emergency systems and rated for all classes of loads. Sizes rated below 400 amperes shall also be rated for 100 percent tungsten lamp loads. MECHANICALLY HELD AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS): The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator shall be a momentarily energized, single-solenoid mechanism. Main operators which include overcurrent disconnect devices shall not be acceptable.
16625 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages, so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes and above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and close-on capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches rated 600 amps and higher shall have front removable and replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus bars. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two active power sources are not acceptable. Where neutral conductors must be switched as shown on the plans, the ATS shall be provided with fully rated 4 pole design. Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the plans, a neutral conductor plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided. WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATINGS: The ATS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short circuit current at the ATS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans. The ATS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in accordance with that standard's 1 and 3 cycle, long-time ratings. ATSs which are not tested and labeled with 1 and 3 cycle (any breaker) ratings and have series, or specific breaker ratings only, are not acceptable. MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER: General: The controllers sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially through an optional serial communication module. A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to 1% of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to 0.2%. The panel shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -55 to +85 degrees C. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify field-wiring
16625 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
connections. The panel shall be enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance. The protective cover shall include a built-in pocket for storage of the operators manuals. Display and Keypad A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control through the serial communications input port. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via DIP switches on the controller: Nominal line voltage and frequency Single or three phase sensing Operating parameter protection Transfer operating mode configuration(Open transition, Closed transition or Delayed transition) Factory set to Open Transition. All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals. Voltage, Frequency and Phase Rotation Sensing Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout and trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise specified): Parameter Sources Dropout / Trip Pickup / Reset Undervoltage N&E,3 70 to 98% 85 to 100% Overvoltage N&E,3 102 to 115% 2% below trip Underfrequency N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100% Overfrequency N&E 102 to 110% 2% below trip Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1% below dropout Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within 0.5% over an operating temperature range of -20C to 60C. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA). Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to pro-vide digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation. Time Delays An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
16625 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on retransfer to normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and the other for the test mode function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external relay(s) for selective load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability to activate an adjustable 0 to 5 minute time delay in any of the following modes: Prior to transfer only. Prior to and after transfer. Normal to emergency only. Emergency to normal only. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments, except the extended parallel time, which shall be adjustable in .01 second increments. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a remote device connected to the serial communications port. Additional Features: A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test / automatic / reset modes. The test position will simulate a normal source failure. The reset position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal. A SPDT contact, rated 5 amps at 30 VDC, shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one contact, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided; one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source (red). LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and
16625 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
emergency sources, as determined by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source. The following features shall be built-in to the controller, but capable of being activated through keypad programming or the serial port only when required by the user: Provide the ability to select commit/no commit to transfer to determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which open to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port. Provide a neutral-off position for the transfer switch such that switch momentarily stops in the neutral position to allow motor transients to decay before connecting to the new source. The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that will allow the transfer switch to function in a non-automatic mode using an external control device. Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to seven different exercise routines. For each routine, the user shall be able to: Enable or disable the routine. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine. Set the start time, time of day day of week week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every) Set the duration of the run. At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. A 10-year life battery that supplies power to the real time clock in the event of a power loss will maintain all time and date information. System Status: The controller LCD display shall include a System Status screen which shall be readily accessible from any point in the menu by depressing the ESC key a maximum of two times. This screen shall display a clear description of the active operating sequence and switch position. For example: Normal Failed Load on Normal TD Normal to Emergency 2 min 15 sec Self Diagnostics: The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed.
16625 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Communications Interface: Provide options to make allow the controller to interface, through an optional serial communication module, with a network of transfer switches, locally (up to 4000 ft.) or remotely through modem serial communications.
Data Logging: The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory: Date and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency. Date and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal. Date and time and reason for engine start. Date and time engine stopped. Date and time emergency source available. Date and time emergency source not available. Statistical Data Total number of transfers. Total number of transfers due to source failure. Total number of days controller is energized. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available. Communications Module: A full duplex RS485 interface shall be installed in the ATS controller to enable serial communications. The serial communications shall be capable of a direct connect or multi-drop configured network. This module shall allow for the seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer devices. The serial communication interface shall be equal to ASCO Accessory 72. ENCLOSURE: The ATS shall be furnished in a Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise shown on the plans. All standard and optional door-mounted switches and pilot lights shall be 16-mm industrial grade type or equivalent for easy viewing & replacement. Door controls shall be provided on a separate removable plate, which can be supplied loose for open type units. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120, except that conductors shall consist of a twisted pair cable whenever possible and shall be plenum rated, stranded, and No. 20 AWG or larger as required by instrument supplier. The instruments in each switchboard shall be linked over a single data line. RACEWAYS: Raceways for low voltage wiring shall be as specified in Sections 16110 and 16130.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
16625 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
INSTALLATION: General: Install ATS and/or ATS/BPS where shown, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices, to ensure that the units comply with the specified requirements and serve the intended purposes. Standards: Comply with NEMA standards, requirements of the NEC, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to installation of ATS units and accessories. Mounting: Refer to Section 16190. Low Voltage Control Wiring: Low voltage control wiring for the data communications functions which is in vertical risers or exposed in mechanical spaces, shall be installed in a suitable raceway. Low voltage control wiring which is concealed inside walls or ceiling spaces, shall be routed without a raceway. Where low voltage cable is routed through metal stud top plates, or other areas which could injure the cable, provide a suitable grommet. CONTROLS: General: Provide generator start-up control wiring from each automatic transfer switches to the standby generator set. Load Disconnect: Provide load disconnect control wiring and relays as required from each automatic transfer switch elevator controller served by that automatic transfer switch, stopping all elevators during transfer in either direction. Elevator Emergency Operation: Provide control wiring as required from automatic transfer switch emergency position indicating contacts to the emergency operation terminals on each elevator controller served by that transfer switch, for initiating the emergency operating sequence. COORDINATION: Control Wiring: Coordinate control wiring connections and provisions with Division 14 for elevators. This coordination shall be the responsibility of this Division. TESTING: The complete ATS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the specification requirements. Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including compliance with the above codes and standards, and withstand and closing ratings. The certification
16625 - 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification. The ATS/BPS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 4 copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall include date and time of test, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
16670 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16670 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Furnish and install a complete system of lighting protection for Starr Parking Garage and coordinate with the installations of the Lightning Protection System installed under a separate contract on the adjoining Starr and Buttrey buildings to comply with all requirements of the National Fire Protection Association NFPA No. 78, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Code Standard UL 98A and the Lightning Protection Institute (LPI). Lightning protection system shall consist of air terminals, roof perimeter conductors, down conductors, ground rods, and all required accessories. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Only firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lightning protection system components whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years shall be used. Installer: Only a bonded lightning protection installer who is an associate member in good standing of the Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) shall be used. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) Labels: All conductors shall bear UL Label A at 10-foot intervals along the length of the conductor. All air terminals shall bear UL Label B. The completed installation shall be awarded the Master Label C plate as per UL 96A. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the lightning protection devices and materials to be used. Include complete layout drawings and installation details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: General: All components of the system shall individually meet the factory inspection requirements of UL 96A for lightning protection materials. Provide as specified in the
16670 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
following paragraphs: Air Terminals: Chrome-tipped, solid copper or aluminum, 98 percent conductivity, sized per applicable tables of NFPA 780 (1997). Air Terminal Base Plate: Compatible copper, copper alloy, or aluminum suitable for intended mounting. Main and Secondary Conductors, Class I: Copper or aluminum suitable for intended mounting. Main and Secondary Conductors, Class I: Copper or aluminum conductors, sized per applicable Tables for, Class I of NFPA 780 (1997). Ground Electrode: Copper rod, wing plate, or ground plate as required by soil conditions and as required for optimum performance of entire system. Aluminum will not be acceptable. Miscellaneous Hardware: Copper or aluminum, electrically compatible with other major components of the system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION DESIGN: The Lightning Protection Subcontractor shall design and layout the lightning protection system and submit drawings as required in Part 1 above. The lightning protection system shall conform to the aesthetic requirements of the building as determined by the Architect. CERTIFICATION: General: The entire installed lightning protection system shall be an LPI-certified lightning protection system complying with requirements of UL 96A (1998) for a Master Label C. The installation shall be in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions. INSTALLATION: Aluminum Materials: Aluminum conductors will not be permitted for installation underground or in highly corrosive atmospheres. If aluminum systems are employed, suitable bimetallic connectors shall be used ahead of copper ground electrode and counterpoise. Aluminum materials shall be employed at any location where aluminum materials are used on the structure and are contiguous to the lightning protection system elements. All
16670 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
aluminum elements shall be sized for equal ampacity and conductivity as required for copper. Cadwelds: Cadwelds will not be permitted on loose weave conductors, but may be used on conductors which are stranded tightly, for sizes 197 MCM and larger. Down Conductors: Down conductors shall be concealed at all points within the structure. Visual Access: All points of connection shall have visual access. Provide visual access via inspection pits (minimum 8" diameter or 8 x 8 square) or similar means. Pits shall be installed such that they are flush with finished grading or concrete work, coordinate with appropriate trades prior to installation in order to determine requirements. TESTING: Ground Resistance Test: Perform a ground resistance test for comparison to future inspection and testing data by the Owner. Overall system resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms total. Test shall be performed using a Biddle Megger Earth Tester, or equivalent test instrument. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit two copies of certified test results for Owner's record and submit four copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall include time and date of tests, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: General: The extent of fire alarm system work is as shown and scheduled on the drawings and includes, but is not limited to, providing a system with the following functions and operation: Provide an extension of the Starr Building fire alarm and voice communications system. Provide all components and accessories as required for complete operation of the Fire Alarm system in the Parking Garage as an integral part of the Starr Building Fire Alarm System. The system extension shall include but not be limited to: Auxiliary control panels as required. LCD remote annunciator located as indicated. Manual pull stations located as shown on the drawings. Area smoke detectors located as shown on drawings. Area heat detectors located as shown on drawings. Duct smoke detectors located as shown on the drawings. Sprinkler system waterflow(s) and valve supervisory switch(s) located as shown on the drawings. Magnetic door holders, located as shown on drawings. Interface with elevator recall functions for primary and alternate floors and elevator power shunt trip activation. Speakers/speaker strobes located as shown on the drawings. Synchronized visual notification appliances located as shown on the drawings. Conduit, wire, fittings, and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Operation: The system extension shall match the operation of the Starr Building system. Initiating device circuits (IDC): These circuits are used to monitor manual fire alarm stations, smoke and heat detectors, waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump functions, and air pressure supervisory switches shall be Class B (Style "A" or "B") as Defined by NFPA 72. The Initiating device circuits shall be EST Signature series modules or equivalent by listed acceptable manufacturers. 24 VDC Notification appliance circuits (NAC): These circuits shall be Class B (Style "Y") as Defined by NFPA 72. All notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit output rating of 2 amp @ 24 vdc. The notification circuits shall be power limited. Nonpower limited circuits are not acceptable. The 24 VDC Notification appliance circuits shall be EST Signature series modules or equivalent by listed acceptable manufacturers. Audio Notification Appliance Circuits: One-way audio notification appliance circuits (NAC) shall be Class B (Style "Y"). All notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit output rating of 35W @70Vrms. The notification circuits shall be power limited. Nonpower limited circuits are not acceptable. The one-way audio notification appliance circuits shall be EST Signature series modules or equivalent by listed acceptable manufacturers. Signaling line circuits: These circuits shall communicate from a panel/node to analog/addressable detectors, input modules, output modules, isolation modules and notification appliance circuits. Each signaling circuit connected to addressable/analog devices shall provide a minimum of 20 spare addresses. When a signaling line circuit covers more than one fire/smoke compartments, a wire-to-wire short shall not effect the operation of the circuit from the other fire/smoke compartments. The signaling line circuit (SLC) connecting panels and annunciators shall be Class B (style 4). The signaling line circuit connecting to addressable/analog devices including, detectors, monitor modules, control modules, isolation modules, and notification circuit modules shall be Class B (style 4). Network Wiring: The system supplied under this specification shall utilize node to node, direct wired multi-priority peer-to-peer network operations. The system shall utilize independently addressed, smoke detectors, heat detectors and input/output modules as described in this specification. The peer-to-peer network shall contain multiple nodes consisting of the command center, main controller, remote control panels, LCD/LED annunciation nodes, and workstations. Each node is an equal, active functional node of the network, which is capable of making all local decisions and generating network tasks to other nodes in the event of node failure or communications failure between nodes. This network shall be wired using a Class A configuration, a single break or short on the network wiring causes the system to isolate the fault, and network communication continues uninterrupted, without any loss of function. Should multiple wiring faults occur, the network re-configures into many sub-networks and continues to respond to alarm events from every panel that can transmit and receive network messages. Network Nodes: The remote control panels and/or network nodes shall meet the same requirements as described in control panel section and shall contain the following; Common control switches with 168 character LCD display, as required.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Integral power supply(s) with secondary stand-by power. Signaling line circuits for communications with analog/addressable devices, as required. Audio amplification, as required. Notification appliance circuits, as required. Auxiliary function circuits and operations, as required. DACT: The system shall provide off premise communications capability (DACT) for transmitting system events to multiple Central Monitoring Station (CMS) receivers. The system shall provide the CMS(s) with point identification of system events using Contact ID or SIA DCS protocols. The system shall provide an individual CMS account for each tenant, and send the required signals to the one or more CMS(s) and account(s) specified by each tenant. In the event of a panel CPU failure during a fire alarm condition, the DACT degrade mode shall transmit a general fire alarm signal to the CMS. The system shall also transmit an alphanumeric system activity message, by event, to a commercial paging system of the owners choice, using TAP Pager protocol. Sequence of Operation: General: The sequence of operation shall match the sequence of operation in th Starr Building. Refer to Starr Building Specifications. Fire Pump Annunciation: Activation of the fire pump in a running condition from the fire pump controller shall initiate an alarm signal on that fire pump supervisory zone and at the remote annunciator. Loss of power, phase monitoring, or other alarm signals from a fire pump controller or jockey pump controller shall initiate a trouble signal on that fire pump supervisory zone. Fire pump annunciation shall be on the base building fire alarm system. No building alarm shall sound. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by the same manufacturer that is installed in the Starr Building. Contractor Qualifications: The installing contractor shall be an authorized and designated representative of the Fire Alarm Manufacturer to sell, install, and service the manufacturer's equipment. The installing contractor shall have technical factory training specifically for the system proposed. The installing contractor shall be licensed by the State Fire Marshal to sell, install, and service fire alarm systems as required by Article 5.43-2 of the Texas Insurance Code. The installing contractor or equipment supplier shall have on staff a minimum of one (1) certified NICET Level II state licensed fire planner under whose supervision system design shall take place. All design drawings shall be certified by this person. The installing contractor shall have on his staff an installation superintendent who is
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
licensed by the State Fire Marshal's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation and check out will take place as required by the Texas Insurance Code. The installation contractor shall provide 24 hour, 7 day a week, 365 days per year emergency service with a qualified and state licensed service technician. The installing contractor shall have been actively engaged in the business of selling, installing, and servicing fire alarm systems for at least ten (10) years. The installing contractor shall have had actual installation experience of a minimum of 25 systems. Code Compliance: Comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) sections NFPA 13, NFPA 72, NFPA 90A, and additional sections where applicable. The complete combination fire alarm system shall comply with the City of Austin Building and Fire Codes, UBC, ANSI, NEC, and TAS. Modifications required to provide compliance shall be made at no cost to the Owner. Where Contract Documents requirements are in excess of Code requirements and are permitted under the Code, the Contract Documents shall govern. Listing and Approval: All fire alarm system components shall be UL listed. The pre-action system shall comply with the pre-action releasing system. All fire alarm system components shall be FM approved. Texas Accessibility Standards: All fire alarm components and installations shall meet the requirements of the Texas Accessibility Standards. SUBMITTALS Prior to submission of drawings to the Austin Fire Dept. for approval, submit the following to the Engineer for review: Catalogue data and equipment lists with complete specifications on each item of equipment proposed. After approval by the Austin Fire Dept., submit the following to the Engineer for review: Complete point-to-point drawings showing all peripheral equipment connections to control equipment and zone annunciation. All devices to show room or area location for identification purposes. Installation Drawings: Submit installation drawings showing all required devices, equipment and components in plan and riser format and bearing the signatures of both the local authority having jurisdiction and the licensed installer. Installer shall make specific and clear indication of any deviations from the Contract Documents. Drawings must be signed by a person having a current planners license for fire alarm from the State of Texas.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Warranty: The contractor shall warranty all materials, installation and workmanship for one year from date of acceptance, unless otherwise specified. A copy of the manufacturer's warranty shall be provided with close-out documentation and included with the operation and installation manuals. The System Supplier shall maintain a service organization with adequate spare parts stock within 75 miles of the installation. Any defects that render the system inoperative shall be repaired within 24 hours of the owner notifying the contractor. Spare Parts: The Contractor shall supply the following spare parts: Glass rods or panels for break glass manual fire alarm stations (if used) - Ten percent of the installed quantity, but no less than two devices. Keys - A minimum of ten sets of keys shall be provided and appropriately identified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: General: Provide the required intelligent fire alarm system products in the sizes and capacities indicated herein and on the drawings and complying with the manufacturer's published product information. Products shall be of standard materials and components, designed and constructed for the applications indicated. FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS General: Provide auxiliary control panels as required and where recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer. The control panel(s) shall match the Starr Building panels. SMOKE DETECTORS & ACCESSORIES General: Each analog addressable smoke detector's sensitivity shall be capable of being programmed individually as: most sensitive, more sensitive, normal, less sensitive or least sensitive. In addition to the five sensitivity levels the detector shall provide a prealarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the detector's alarm sensitivity value. An alternate alarm sensitivity level shall be provided for each detector, which can be set to any of the five (5) sensitivity settings manually or automatically using a time of day event. In addition to the five alternate sensitivity levels the detector shall provide an alternate prealarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the detector's alternate alarm sensitivity value. The detector shall be able to differentiate between a long drift above the prealarm threshold and fast rise above the threshold.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
The detector's sensing element reference point shall automatically adjust, compensating for background environmental conditions such as dust, temperature, and pressure. Periodically, the sensing element real-time analog value shall be compared against its reference value. The detector shall provide a maintenance alert signal that 75% to 99% compensation has been used. The detector shall provide a dirty fault signal that 100% or greater compensation has been used. The system shall allow for changing of detector types for service replacement purposes without the need to reprogram the system. The replacement detector type shall automatically continue to operate with the same programmed sensitivity levels and functions as the detector it replaced. System shall display an off-normal condition until the proper detector type has been installed or change in the application program profile has been made.
Duct Detector Housing: Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to mount an analog/addressable detector along with a standard, relay or isolator detector mounting base. The housing shall also protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. The housing shall utilize an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in baked red enamel. Remote alarm LED indicators and remote test stations shall be provided.
Smoke Detector Ionization: Provide analog/addressable ionization smoke detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The system shall have the ability to uniquely set the sensitivity and alarm verification values of each detector on a circuit. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting prealarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. Heat Detectors: Provide analog/addressable combination fixed temperature / rate-of-rise detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135F (57C) and a rate of rise alarm point of 15F(9C) per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft (21.3m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. Detector Bases: Provide standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on either North American 1-gang, 3 or 4 inch octagon box and 4 inch square box, or European BESA or 1-gang box. The base shall, contain no electronics and support all series detector types.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
MANUAL STATIONS: Provide analog/addressable double action, single stage fire alarm stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The fire alarm station shall be of polycarbonate construction and incorporate an internal toggle switch. A locked test feature shall be provided. The station shall be finished in red with silver "PULL IN CASE OF FIRE" lettering. The manual station shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 (38mm) deep 4 square boxes with 1-gang covers. NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES Speakers: Low Profile Speaker: Provide low profile wall mount speakers at the locations shown on the drawings. The low profile speaker shall not extend more than 1" (2.5cm) past the finished wall surface, and provide a switch selectable audible output of 2W (90dBA), 1W (87dBA), 1/2W (84dBA), or 1/4W (81dBA) at 10 ft. when measured in reverberation room per UL-464. Wattage setting shall be visible with the cover installed. When the cover is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for all wiring. The low profile speaker shall mount in a North American 4" x 2 1/8" square electrical box, without trims or extension rings. The low profile wall mount speaker shall be EST Genesis G4 series with white finish and FIRE in red letters on the side. Speaker-Cone-4in: Provide 4" white speakers at the locations shown on the drawings. Speakers shall have a 4" mylar cone, paper cones are not acceptable. The rear of the speakers shall be completely sealed protecting the cone during and after installation. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Speakers shall provide 1/4w, 1/2w, 1w, and 2w power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. At the 2 watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 90 dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz. when measured in reverberation room per UL-1480. Speaker-Reentrant Surface: Provide 4" surface re-entrant speakers at the locations shown on the drawings. Speakers shall provide 2w, 4w, 8w, and 15w power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. The re-entrant speakers shall utilize a high efficiency compression drivers. Cone type drivers are not acceptable. At the 15 watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 102 dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz. when measured in reverberation room per UL-1480. Weatherproof boxes shall be provided for outdoor mounting. Speaker-Strobes: Low Profile Speaker-Strobe: Provide low profile wall mount speaker/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. The low profile speaker/strobe shall not extend more than 1" (2.5cm) past the finished wall surface, and provide a switch selectable audible output of
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
2W (90dBA), 1W (87dBA), 1/2W (84dBA), or 1/4W (81dBA) at 10 ft. when measured in reverberation room per UL-464. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash output, that shall be switch selectable for output values of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd & 110cd. Wattage and candela settings shall be visible with the cover installed. When the cover is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for all wiring. The low profile speaker/strobes shall mount in a North American 4" x 2 1/8" square electrical box, without trims or extension rings. The low profile wall mount speaker/strobes shall be EST Genesis G4 series with white finish and FIRE in red letters on the side. Speaker-Strobe 4in: Provide 4" white speakers/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. Speakers shall have a 4" mylar cone, paper cones are not acceptable. The rear of the speakers shall be completely sealed protecting the cone during and after installation. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Speakers shall provide 1/4w, 1/2w, 1w, and 2w power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. At the 2 watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 87 dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz. when measured in reverberation room per UL-1480. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash. Strobe output shall be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of 15/75cd, 30cd, & 110cd devices. Speaker-Strobe Re-entrant: Provide 4" white flush re-entrant speaker/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. Weatherproof boxes shall be provided for outdoor mounting. Speakers shall provide 2w, 4w, 8w, and 15w power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. The re-entrant speakers shall utilize a high efficiency compression drivers. Cone type drivers are not acceptable. At the 15 watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 102 dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz. when measured in reverberation room per UL-1480. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash. Strobe output shall be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd, & 110cd devices. Strobes: Provide low profile wall mounted strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash outputs. Strobe output shall be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, or 110cd devices. Low profile strobes shall mount in a North American 1-gang box. INITIATION & CONTROL MODULES Relay Module: Provide addressable control relay circuit modules at the locations shown on the drawings. The module shall provide one (1) form C dry relay contacts rated at 24Vdc @ 2 amps (pilot duty) to control external appliances or equipment. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. Notification Appliance Circuits: Provide addressable notification appliance circuit modules at the locations shown on the drawings. The module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B notification circuit. The module shall provide polarized audible / visual
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
selection for 24Vdc @ 2amps, audio outputs at 25Vrms @ 50 watts or 70 Vrms @ 35 watts. Isolation Module: Provide addressable fault isolator circuit modules at the locations shown on the drawings. The module shall be capable of isolating and removing a fault from a Class A data circuit while allowing the remaining data loop to continue operating. Electric Door Locks / Strikes: Refer to Division 8 for Electric door locks/strikes. Provide control modules as required for connection to the Fire Alarm System under this Section. Operating power for door locks/strikes shall be provided at 120 volts by Division 16 from the base building electrical system and controlled by the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Magnetic Door Holders: Provide wall-mounted magnetic door holders where shown. Operating power for magnetic door holders shall be provided at 120 volts by Division 16 from the base building electrical system and controlled by the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Elevator Interface: Provide all wiring from the fire alarm system to the elevator controllers and all control and interface modules required for connection to the fire alarm system under this section. Coordinate with Division 14. WIRING AND RACEWAYS: Line Voltage Wiring: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120. Low Voltage Wiring: This wiring shall be specified in Section 16120, except that conductors shall consist of a multi-conductor jacketed cable whenever possible. Raceways: Raceways for line voltage and low voltage wiring shall be as specified in Section 16110 and 16130.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and rough-in drawings, and details on the Drawings. Install electrical work and use electrical products complying with the requirements of the applicable Division 16 Sections of these Specifications. Wiring: Install all wiring as required for the fire alarm system. Install all fire alarm system line voltage wiring in a suitable raceway. Install fire alarm system low voltage wiring that is exposed or routed through inaccessible areas in a suitable raceway. Concealed low voltage fire alarm wiring above accessible ceilings may be routed without conduit. Fasten flexible conductors, which bridge cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side and protect against abrasion. Tie and support the conductors neatly. Provide line voltage (120v) circuitry as required for connection of Fire Alarm System components, control panels, power supplies etc. and per NEC and NFPA requirements.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
All wiring shall be sized to conform to the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and as indicated on the engineered shop drawings. All wiring shall be U.L. Listed for LIMITED ENERGY (300V) and fire alarm applications. Wiring for non-power limited systems shall comply with Article 760 of NEC. Minimum wire size shall be #18 TFN type solid or #14 THHN seven strand. All wiring for intelligent/addressable and telephone communication circuits shall be of the TWISTED/SHIELDED type to guard against outside RF interference and induced noise. All wiring for the networks shall be twisted pair nonshielded. No line voltage or any other wiring shall be run in the same conduit as the fire alarm wiring. Contractor shall allow tenant and spare capacities as indicated in power supplies for visual signals. Coding: Number-code or color-code conductors appropriately for future identification and servicing of the system. Checkout: Check wiring to ensure that wiring is in accordance with the system manufacturer's wiring diagram and that the system is free of open circuits, short circuits, and grounds. TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION: Testing: After completion of system installation, perform final tests and adjustments on the system by specially trained personnel in the direct employ of the fire alarm system manufacturer. Submit four copies of certified test results to Engineer for review. COORDINATION: Elevators: Coordination of fire alarm recall provisions and connections with Division 14 shall be the responsibility of this Section. Fire Pump and Fire Sprinkler Systems: Coordination of fire sprinkler system provisions and connections with Division 15 shall be the responsibility of this Section. Temperature Control System: Coordination of fire alarm system shutdown and start-up requirements with the temperature control system furnished by Division 15 shall be the responsibility of this Section. INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS: Training: Upon completion of system installation, the System Supplier shall schedule and present a minimum of 8 hours of documented formalized instruction for the building owner,
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16720 - 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
detailing the proper operation of the installed System. The instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by a person factory trained in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and who is also thoroughly familiar with the installation. The instruction shall cover the schedule of maintenance required by NFPA 72 and any additional maintenance recommended by the system manufacturer. Instruction shall be made available to the Local Municipal Fire Department if requested by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Manual: A manual describing the theory of operation of the complete systems and including internal diagrams of all installed equipment shall be submitted upon completion of system installation.
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
16745 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
SECTION 16745 - COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Telecom / Data communications raceway systems. Security raceway system. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Conduit and outlet boxes to form empty raceway systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT Conduit: Refer to Section 16110. Outlet Boxes: Refer to Section 16130. Install all back boxes. Furnish back boxes indicated on drawings. Special back boxes to be supplied by Owner. Refer to the equipment manufacturer for details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Provide Telecom / Data and Security system conduits as indicated on Electrical drawings, Security drawings, and I.T. drawings. Provide electrical rough-in at security equipment locations as indicated on Security drawings. Provide electrical rough-in at telecom / data equipment rooms and equipment locations as indicated on I.T. drawings. At each telecom / data communication wall outlet location, install a 4" square backbox with a single gang ring and route a 3/4" conduit with pull wire into an accessible ceiling space. Cap conduit with insulating bushing. At each television outlet location install a 4" square backbox with single gang ring and route a 3/4" conduit with pull wire to accessible ceiling space. Cap conduit with insulating bushing. Provide an ivory color "cable TV without jack" cover plate.
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
16745 - 2
1 2 3 4 5
Coordinate all box locations with Architectural Elevations and Details.
END OF SECTION
MISC. ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND CONTROL WIRING
16910 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
SECTION 16910 - MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND CONTROL WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. Work Included: The extent of miscellaneous electrical controls and control wiring work is as shown and scheduled, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. Types: The types of miscellaneous electrical controls and control wiring specified in this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: Miscellaneous Electrical Controls: Contactors Relays Photocells Time switches Miscellaneous Control Wiring: Sewage ejector and sump pump controls and alarms. Domestic water pumps, fire pumps, house pumps, surge tanks, water system controls and alarms, and similar items. Water chilling units, oil pumps, purge pumps, oil heaters, safety devices, and similar items. Chilled, heating, and condenser water system controls, including flow switches, pressure differential controls, compression tank alarms, water treatment systems, and similar items. Stop-start stations and all necessary interconnecting and interlock wiring for all motors, controllers, air-cooled condensing units, interlocks, safety devices, and similar items. Additional control wiring and safety devices as shown and specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following:
16910 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
AMF Paragon Hubbell Intermatic Time Controls Lithonia Leviton Lighting Control & Design Sensorswitch Tork, Inc. SUBMITTALS Refer to Submittals in Section 16010. Submit product data sheets indicating the types of controls devices to be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS CONTACTORS AND RELAYS: General: Provide contactors and relays as shown and specified herein. The number of poles, ampere-ratings, and pole arrangements shall be as shown. All contactors and relays shall conform to the following: Be rated for continuous duty as full rated current in an unventilated enclosure. Eight-hour duty ratings will not be acceptable. Contacts shall be readily replaceable, self-aligning, silver or silver tungsten alloy. Control voltage shall be 120 volt, 60 Hertz, unless otherwise specified. All auxiliary contacts shall be rated for not less than 10 amperes. Contactors rated for lighting and mixed loads shall have an interrupting capacity of 150 percent of their continuous duty rating. Be capable of successfully handling inrush currents at 20 times rating. INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL: Lighting Control Panels: LC&D (Lighting Control and Design) GR 1400 panel with number of relays indicated. UL Lsted. NEMA 1 enclosure. Provide wiring and accessories as required to interconnect all lighting control panels. Digital Switches: LC&D Chelsea digital switches configured as indicated. UL Listed.
16910 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Photocells - Exterior: Provide self-contained, adjustable, weatherproof photoelectric controls designed for mounting on an outdoor junction box. Photoelectric control shall switch on at dusk and off at dawn, and be adjustable in a range of 2 f/c to 5 f/c. Photoelectric control shall have 2000 watt contacts suitable for the voltage shown and shall include an inherent 5 second delay in operation to prevent false switching. Manual Time Switches: Spring wound auto-off timer, 12 hour interval without hold, 120V/20A induction load rated contacts, contacts configured as required by circuit. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure where exposed to weather. MOTION SENSORS: Wall Mounted Switch Type: Intelligent, self adjusting, multi technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic), with manual override, manual adjustment for delayed off settings; mounted in standard NEMA single gang switchbox, UL Listed, and white finish. Where daylighting is available, enable daylight sensing feature to keep lights off if natural light provides over 50 FC of illumination. Sensorswitch WSD-PDT OR Leviton OSSMT-MD. Contractor shall verify locations indicated on floor plan, locate and add additional sensors as required for efficient operation per manufacturer's recommendations. Hubbell wall mount occupancy sensing devices are not acceptable. Dual technology, adaptive, self-adjusting motion sensing switch; Infrared and ultrasonic sensing; 1000 square feet coverage; 180 degree pattern; Manual override control;; Leviton OSSMT-MD. Ceiling Mounted: Intelligent, self adjusting, multi technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) with power pack and slave unit for switching two circuits total. Sensorswitch CMPDT-10 or Leviton OSC20-M. Locate as recommended by manufacturer. Contractor shall verify locations indicated on floor plan, locate and add additional sensors as required for proper and efficient operation per manufacturer's recommendations. WIRING AND RACEWAYS: Line Voltage Control Wiring: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120. Low Voltage Control Wiring: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120, except that conductors shall consist of a multi-conductor jacketed cable whenever possible. Raceways: Raceways for line voltage control wiring shall be as specified in Section 16110 and 16130. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS: General: Install miscellaneous electrical control devices as shown, in accordance with
16910 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
applicable portions of the NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions. Conductors: Connect electrical conductors to miscellaneous electrical control devices in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, match conductors of the electrical connection for proper interface between the electrical supply and the installed equipment. Contactors and Relays: Install contactors and relays mounted in panelboards or individual enclosures as shown and be complete, including all control wiring and devices. Photocells and Time Switches: Install lighting controls as shown. Photocell and time switch settings shall be as directed by the Architect. Ceiling Mounted Motion Sensors: Aim sensors to ensure complete coverage of area being controlled. Line and Low Voltage Control Wiring: Line and low voltage control wiring shall be installed in a suitable raceway. Connections: Refer to Section 16125 for connections to equipment. PROGRAMMING AND TRAINING: Programming: Provide initial complete programming of system with input from user for scheduling. Also provide a complete re-programming of system onsite after user has occupied space. Training: Provide a minimum of 4 hours of onsite training for building Owners personnel performed by factory trained technicians.
HVAC CONTROL WIRING
16920 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SECTION 16920 - HVAC CONTROL WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 16010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: The extent of HVAC control wiring is as specified in Section 15966 "Digital Building Control System", Section 15970, "Automatic Electrical Temperature Control System", and Section 15985, "HVAC Control Sequences", as indicated on the Drawings, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. All control wiring shall be by Division 15, except line voltage power which is by Division 16 as indicated by the requirements of Division 15, and as required by approved Division 15 shop drawings. The coordination of the line voltage requirements shall be by Division 16. Type: The type of HVAC control wiring specified in this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to: Line voltage (120-volt) control wiring. Low voltage (24-volt) control wiring. Work of Other Sections: The following Sections apply to the work of this Section: Section 15966, "Digital Building Control System" Section 15970, "Automatic Electrical Temperature Control System" Section 15985, "HVAC Control Sequences".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: Line Voltage Control Wiring: Line voltage wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120. Low Voltage Control Wiring: Low voltage control wiring shall be as specified in Section 15966. BCCS Trunk Cable: This cable shall be as required by, and capable of performing all functions specified in Section 15966.
HVAC CONTROL WIRING
16920 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Raceways: Raceways for control wiring shall be as specified in Section 16110 and Section 16130. Building Central Control and Temperature Control Devices: Devices shall be as specified in Sections 15966, 15970, and 15985.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF HVAC CONTROL WIRING: General: Install temperature control wiring in accordance with approved shop drawings, applicable portions of the NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions. Line and Low Voltage Control Wiring: Line and low voltage control wiring shall be installed in a suitable raceway. BCCS Trunk Cable: Install a multi-conductor trunk cable system from the Building Engineering Office, to all air-handling rooms and other locations as required by Section 15966. All trunk cables shall be installed in a suitable raceway, uncombined with any other wiring. The trunk cables shall be continuous runs from the Engineering Office to the remote panels, and between panels, without splices. Number-Code or Color-Code: Code conductors appropriately for future identification and servicing of the system. Coordination: Coordinate temperature control wiring and installation with Division 15 requirements. All applicable submittals by this Division shall certify that such coordination has been performed.

0932-2 Garage - Pricing Specs 10 - 0517

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

0932-2 Garage - Pricing Specs 10 - 0517

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROJECT MANUAL

May 17, 2010

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

Owner: Starr Colorado Partners. 1. Owner's Representative: Bill Ball - bill@kemp.net.

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

END OF SECTION 012200

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

END OF SECTION 012300

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

PDF electronic file.

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

END OF SECTION 013300

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

McKinney York Architects 0932-2

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Starr Garage Issued for Pricing 5/17/10

Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized